Tips Category RSS Feed | Tips RSS Feed on en Launch Media Network ARK Aberration Guide: How to Tame a Reaper Sat, 16 Dec 2017 20:58:10 -0500 Autumn Fish

The Reaper King and Reaper Queen are horrifyingly mysterious creatures found in the new Aberration expansion for ARK: Survival Evolved. These gargantuan monsters only show up when called by humanoid Nameless creatures, and they have nasty attacks that are really hard for unprepared Survivors to deal with.

You may think to tame one of these fascinating creatures for yourself, but it turns out that they aren't so easily fooled. Wild ones can't be tamed at all, and they don't lay eggs, either, which makes raising a baby Reaper a little hard -- unless you're willing to go through a little hell, that is.

The Reaper Queen has a particularly nasty attack where she uses her tail to impregnate the Survivor with her larva. While you could kill that parasite by exposing yourself to radiation, you also have the option to keep and raise it at risk to your own wellbeing.

So how do you find a Reaper Queen and coax her to impregnate you? And how do you raise and tame the baby Reaper after that? Let's dive in!

Reaper Queen Location and How to Get Impregnated in ARK Aberration

Reaper Queens have a chance of spawning to the call of an Alpha Nameless while 10 or more Nameless surround you. The Nameless creatures pop out of the ground to attack you when you draw near and typically dwell in the areas beyond the Spine.

They have a chance of spawning a Reaper King, too, but that's not what you're looking for. If he does spawn, kill him in order to get another chance at the Reaper Queen. The Alpha Nameless should call another after a while.

After she's arrived, you need to get her down to low health without killing her. Once she's all beat up, just take a Riot Shield and walk up to her, letting her hit you until she impregnates you and runs away.

ARK: Survival Evolved Aberration expansion Guide How to Tame a Reaper Queen Getting Impregnated and Pheromone Glands

How to Raise and Tame a Baby Reaper in ARK Aberration

You're probably going to want to chase after the Reaper Queen and kill it. Looting its corpse offers up valuable Reaper Pheromone Glands, which you'll need in order to survive the birthing process and to be sure the baby Reaper trusts you when it's born. In fact, you'll probably want to farm a few of these.

While in gestation, any XP you earn won't count for you. Instead, the baby Reaper absorbs it all, using it to grow stronger and boost its stat potential. It may be a good idea to farm XP during this time if you're looking for a strong Reaper. When gestation ends, the baby Reaper will burst out of your abdomen and kill you if you don't have the buff from Reaper Pheromone Glands activated.

Do not approach this baby without the Pheromone Glands, either, because it won't hesitate to attack you on sight. It's recommended that you keep it locked in a cage until it's fully imprinted and grown into its Juvenile stage because it won't listen to your whistles or commands. Additionally, you need to be quick about imprinting. If you don't imprint on the baby Reaper in time, not even the Pheromone Glands will save you from it. It'll attack you again all the same.

As a carnivore, they'll need Raw Meat to grow big and strong, so make sure you feed them plenty of it. Prime Meat and Mutton goes further, but I wouldn't fuss too much about it. Just feed them whatever meat you have on hand and they'll grow up just fine.


Now you can finally tame the wilds of Aberration with your very own Reaper. For more tips for surviving alongside dinosaurs and other fantastic creatures, be sure to check out the rest of our ARK: Survival Evolved guides.

How to Restart in Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Sat, 16 Dec 2017 10:40:24 -0500 Joshua Broadwell

Pokemon games are somewhat notorious for only having one save file. What if you want to play as a different gender, have a different team, choose Popplio instead of Rowlet (and don't lie; you know you want to) all on the same card? Unfortunately, Game Freak didn't see fit to address that problem with its latest games, so the only way to get a do-over in Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon is to start over completely. But the games don't do a tremendously good job of telling you how to do that. In fact, they don't tell you period.

How to Delete a Save File

Fortunately, it's super simple to delete a save file in Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon so you can start over. On the opening screen, the one where the cinematic is playing, press Up on the D-Pad, B, and X at the same time. You'll then be asked whether you really want to delete all your data and so on. It might take a try or two, unless you have excellent timing when pressing buttons, but you'll get there.


That's it for how to restart your save file, but be sure to check out our other Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon guides for other tips and tricks to help you be a Pokemon Master!

Fortnite May Tell You That You're Currently Banned During Maintenance Sat, 16 Dec 2017 10:37:23 -0500 Tobbpitt

Consider yourself an ethical player and haven't done anything to get yourself banned in Fortnite, but recently gotten an error that tells you that you are currently banned from the game? Don't worry just yet -- you may be getting the notification without an actual ban.

The Winter update for the game's Battle Royale mode is finally upon us, but during the game's December 14th maintenance, a number of players were met with an error message stating they were banned from the game for an indeterminate amount of time. If you're here, you're probably in the same boat.

The good news is that you are probably not currently banned from Fortnite, unless you really have been less than pleasant. It's more likely that you saw this notification in error, along with a handful of other players who tried to log in during maintenance hours. It seems there's an issue with Epic's error messages, which is causing false ban notifications (but not actual bans).

Players can receive the ban notification during maintenance hours, whether they are truly banned or not -- very annoying for a casual Fortnite player, but downright terrifying for a dedicated fan who has spent time and money on the game.

Epic Games has come out on the game's subreddit and stated they are going to audit their error messages to prevent this in the future. It's unfortunate so many players got a scare yesterday, but hopefully this means we won't be seeing false ban notifications in Fortnite.

Of course, none of this applies if you have actually done something that merits a real ban. In those cases, you need to take it up with Epic Games support. But those with squeaky clean gameplay records can breathe a sigh of relief this patch and the next if they get the banned message in error again.

Finding All Ten Of RE7: Not A Hero's Antique Coins Fri, 15 Dec 2017 11:19:41 -0500 ElConquistadork

Just like the original Resident Evil 7, its free DLC Not A Hero has a handful of Antique Coins hidden throughout the game. Ten of them, in fact. And these Coins can be used to purchase some permanent upgrades to Chris Redfield that you'll probably find very handy, especially if you're trying this DLC out at the higher difficulties.

You don't need all ten to afford the stabilizer and steroids that are locked up in the Central room, but if you're like us, you want to get every little item in this game.

These Coins are tiny and secreted away, but we found all ten, and we're just the sort of people to share that sort of information with our readers! We're generous that way. 

So let's get on with it!

Antique Coin #1

This is probably the first Coin you'll come across. It's located in the Central room that leads you to the red, blue, and green shutter doors. From its entrance, head right, and you'll find the coin on an oil drum next to a shipping container.

Antique Coin #2

You'll find this one in the room with the pulley system key puzzle (past the red shutter in the central room). From the entrance, hang right and you'll find it on top of a rucksack next to two oil drums.

Antique Coin #3

As you enter the blue shuttered hallway, there will be a room directly to your right. It's dark in these halls, and it helps to have your night vision upgrade, but even without it, you should be able to make out an Antique Coin in this room by a couple of destructible boxes and a paint can.

Antique Coin #4

You'll find this coin in the spore-filled hallways past the green shuttered door. Look for some items on a wooden desk, and then look left: the Coin should be on top of some plastic bags next to a bunch of paint cans.

Antique Coin #5

This coin is at the end of the hallway on top of an oil drum, just outside of the elevator you ride after the three power switches puzzle.

Antique Coin #6

You'll find the sixth Antique Coin at the dead end of a corridor on the left just before you make your way out of the final hallway area behind the green shuttered door. There will be a couple of breakable boxes, a bunch of different items inside, and a huge sack with the Coin on top.

Antique Coin #7

This coin is in the hallway just past the red shuttered door. Enter, and then keep an eye out for a barrel on the right. It shouldn't be far from the cell with the soldier who "gave" you the high-powered filter for your mask. Behind the barrel is the Coin.

Antique Coin #8

Just past the rail cart puzzle, you'll find yourself in a room with Lucas and his favorite clown. Do your best to turn away from its haunting, horrible eyes. Look left, and you should see a stack of crates, with the eighth Antique Coin stuck between them.

Antique Coin #9

You'll find the ninth coin past the ventilation room, in a small area with a ladder. Next to the ladder is an empty box, and inside of that box is ... you guessed it: an Antique Coin!

Antique Coin #10

The 10th and final Antique Coin can be found past the clown door in the room with the pulley puzzle from before. Get through the hallway, and turn right as soon as you enter the next room, and you should see a shutter door held halfway open. Crawl under the door, make your way to end of the tracks, and you'll find some items and an Antique Coin.


And that's how you find all 10 Antique Coins for Resident Evil 7: Not A Hero! Need any other points on how to get Chris Redfield through the funhouse of Lucas Baker alive? Let us know in the comments!

How to Unlock Winter Siege Weapons in Call of Duty: WWII Fri, 15 Dec 2017 11:05:48 -0500 Sergey_3847

If you're playing Call of Duty: WWII, you now have the chance to take part in the special Winter Siege event that will last until January 2, 2018. During the event, you will be able to unlock three new ranged weapons and two melee weapons.

There are several different ways to get these weapons, some of which are easier than others. But in any case, if you're struggling to find all five of them, then just follow this quick guide.

All Winter Siege Weapons in Call of Duty: WWII

In order to unlock all new weapons in Call of Duty: WWII, you can follow one of these steps:

  • In the Headquarters, you can complete a special order given to you by Major Howard. These orders are time-sensitive and rotate frequently, giving you options for different guns. If you complete these special orders, as a reward you will receive a base version of one new weapon.
  • If you want to unlock a modified version of a weapon, then go to Quartermaster and complete one of the Winter Siege collections by buying all the required weapons for each corresponding collection. As a reward, the Quartermaster will grant you the special variant of one new weapon. 
  • Lastly, you can simply unlock them from a special Winter Siege supply drop.
Gewehr 43

This semi-automatic rifle was featured previously in many other Call of Duty games, including Black Ops and World at War. Now you can also have it in Call of Duty: WWII if you complete the Chiller collection at Quartermaster.


Sten is an excellent SMG that can be obtained either through a Special SMG Order from Major Howard, which will have you complete 50 multiplayer matches, or through a Frosty collection at Quartermaster.


Also known as Breda M1930, this light machine gun is extremely accurate for its class. You can get one in Winter Siege by completing the Hand Warmer collection at Quartermaster.

Trench Knife and Ice Pick

The last two melee weapons are a knife and a pick. Nothing too fancy, but if you can complete the Screwed Up and Gold Digger collections, then you will have both of them.


That is all on how to unlock the new Winter Siege weapons, and if you need some other Call of Duty: WWII guides, then be sure to check them out below:

Resident Evil 7 End Of Zoe Unlockables: Effigy Locations Fri, 15 Dec 2017 10:59:20 -0500 Ty Arthur

The final Resident Evil 7 DLC packs have arrived, capping off the game with a post-campaign mission where one of the Bakers tries to save Zoe from infection.

End Of Zoe has you going toe to toe with swamp monsters, primarily using your fists and some good old-fashioned wrastlin' moves. While that seems ill-advised, luckily there are effigies scattered around the game that raise the power of your fists.

These are especially important if you are trying to unlock The Only Guns You Need achievement, which requires that you complete the DLC by only using fist attacks and no spears or shotgun blasts. Below we list the locations of all 18 unlockable effigies.

End Of Zoe Effigy Location 1

The first boxer effigy is found immediately after destroying the first yellow cross door (to break down this door, you first have to kill all the monsters in the area). Directly after breaking the door, turn to your left to see the effigy sitting on a barrel next to a light.

 Effigy #1

End Of Zoe Effigy Location 2

When you set frozen Zoe down on the couch (after escaping the flaming cabin with the boat), go back outside and turn left towards the swamp water. Walk down the watery path until you see a rocky incline leading up.

Don't go up the incline, but instead turn left again so you are in a big circular area of water. The effigy is located against the wall on a big pile of rocks. The area is out of view from the main path unless you actually walk slightly into the circle of water.

 Effigy #2

End Of Zoe Effigy Location 3

Inside the military base, you will come across some tents and a fenced area. Walk past the fenced section with the two boxes where you first find the wood spears, and go through a door.

Immediately up the stairs past the door is another barrel to your left. The effigy is on top of a pillow on the barrel (just before you jump down the broken floor segment to the lab).

 Effigy #3

End Of Zoe Effigy Location 4

Later in the swamp, there's a branching path where you can go through another cement door/fence section on your left or walk down a broken wood path on your right.

Turn around at the junction and you should see a bunch of pipes and a small shack. Go inside the shack to find the effigy on the wall next to the save point tape recorder.

Effigy #4

End Of Zoe Effigy Location 5

When you reach the rusty boat, head to the the far southwest section of the Paddle Boat 1F area of the map (when your objective is still to find the medicine from the synthesizer machine).

A side room in this area has a small hatch on the floor that lets you go underneath the room. Crawl through the duct until it turns, at which point the champion effigy will be sitting in the curved section of the corner.

 Effigy #5

End Of Zoe Effigy Location 6

In the room with the ladder leading up to the synthesizer computer (before you get the medicine and fight the mini-boss), look on the metal shelves to the right of the synthesizer. The next effigy is on the lower shelf in-between some propane tanks.

 Effigy #6

End Of Zoe Effigy Location 7

After the swamp creature steals Zoe from the couch, you end up chasing after her into the Quarantine Area 1 section of the map.

At the south end of this area is a house, and in front of that building you can see a wood platform floating in the water. Wade up to the platform to find the next effigy sitting in the center.

 Effigy #7

End Of Zoe Effigy Location 8

At the northwest side of the same Quarantine Area 1 map, look for a path with a door covered by a fence just before a wood bridge. Don't go through the door or over the bridge, but instead turn left and go into the watery area. The next champion effigy is inside the overturned fridge in the corner.

 Effigy #8

End Of Zoe Effigy Location 9

In the first part of the Quarantine Area 2 map (when you are walking over a rickety wood bridge towards a series of old buildings), look inside the corner of one of the first buildings to find the next boxer effigy.

 Effigy #9

End Of Zoe Effigy Location 10 and 11

Just shortly after the previous effigy (inside the large square segment on the map), there are more buildings and watery swamp areas below. From the catwalk outside a building you should see a raised platform in the water.

Jump down into the water and go around the other side of the platform to climb a yellow ladder and get the 10th and 11th effigies. The 11th is underneath a few wood boards covered in yellow tape just to the side.

 Effigy #10 and #11

End Of Zoe Effigy Location 12

Later in the same Quarantine Area 2 map, you will come across a broken segment of catwalk leading to the next building. Just before the broken section, look down in the corner to get effigy 12.

 Effigy #12

End Of Zoe Effigy Location 13

After grabbing the previous effigy, turn around so you are facing away from the buildings, and jump into the water. Just ahead you can find the next effigy sitting in a tree.

 Effigy #13

End Of Zoe Effigy Location 14

During the same objective to chase after the swamp creature, you will reach the Abandoned Church section of the map (although you won't have entered the church yet). When you cross a catwalk and go through a yellow cross door, to your left will be an outhouse. Go inside to find this effigy on top of a barrel and to the left of the save recorder.

 Effigy #14

End Of Zoe Effigy Location 15

Near the start of the cemetery you will walk between two stone crypts with a tree in front of you. Immediately turn to your right and look down on the ground to find this effigy on the back side of the crypt.

 Effigy #15

End Of Zoe Effigy Location 16

At the end of the cemetery, just after going through the yellow cross door but before entering the actual church building, take a look at the lamp post on your right to get the next effigy.

 Efffigy #16

End Of Zoe Effigy Location 17

In the living room of the Old House map when you are chasing after Jack, head through the door in the corner to reach another room where there's a giant hole in the floor. Turn right at the hole to see this effigy hanging on a door covered in metal bars.

 Effigy #17

End Of Zoe Effigy Location 18

For the final effigy, go through the entrance room of the Old House map to find a long wood bridge covered in fencing where a bunch of weird dolls are hanging. The effigy is hidden near the dolls on the fence section to your right.

Effigy 18

Now that you've got all 18 End Of Zoe effigies, get ready to punch an evil cannibal hillbilly right in the face (and everywhere else!) in the DLC's final boss fight.

Special thanks to YouTuber randomChievos for the screenshots. Need help beating any of the enemies or taking on the final boss? Check out our full End Of Zoe DLC walkthrough here.

ARK Aberration Guide: How to Tame a Rock Drake Fri, 15 Dec 2017 10:44:43 -0500 Autumn Fish

The Rock Drake is a crazy new creature in the Aberration expansion for ARK: Survival Evolved. It can climb, it can glide, and it can camouflage itself and its rider. With the craggy landscape of Aberration, this is the perfect all-around mount for getting around and staying safe.

However, this bad boy is not easy to tame. In fact, you can't even tame wild ones; you must instead steal a Rock Drake egg and hatch it, much like Wyverns in Scorched Earth, but with their own twist.

In this guide, we'll go over everything from finding a suitable Rock Drake egg to incubating and hatching it to raising and feeding the baby until it's ready to be saddled and ridden. It's a lengthy process, but it's well worth it. Let's dive in!

Rock Drake Egg Locations in ARK Aberration

Rock Drake eggs are found in a rather dangerous location on the map, so before you even attempt to snag one, you need to make sure you're prepared. Radiation is the main concern, which means you'll need a Hazard Suit in order to deal with the environment. That engram won't even unlock until you are around level 60, so be patient and bide your time rather than risking your life trying to snag an egg.

Once you're equipped with a Hazard Suit, head to around 56/57 on the map, and you'll find a ravine with glowing pink eggs scattered along the cliff walls. These are the Rock Drake eggs you're looking for. Simply grab an egg that's around the level you want and jet out of there before the angry momma Rock Drake finds out what you've done.

How to Incubate and Hatch a Rock Drake Egg in ARK Aberration

Once you and your Rock Drake egg are safely back at base, it's time to incubate it so it can hatch. Rather than requiring a warm environment to incubate in, however, Rock Drakes need a cooler environment. The best way to achieve this is to create a square of Air Conditioners all blasting cold air into a 2x2 space.

The egg will need some time to incubate between all those air conditioners, but the baby needs food when it hatches, so be sure to spend this time collecting it. Since babies can't eat solid meat, you'll need to hunt down something a little more special.

ARK: Survival Evolved Aberration Expansion Guide How to Tame a Rock Drake Egg Locations Hatching and Incubating

How to Raise a Baby Rock Drake in ARK Aberration

Baby Rock Drakes need a good helping of Nameless Venom in order to grow into adulthood. This is a rare drop found by killing the Nameless creatures that pop out of the ground and attack you. The amount you'll need varies depending on your server settings, but pick up about a dozen to be on the safe side. You can always go out and get more if you think you'll run out before the baby matures. Remember that it can be stored in the Preserving Bin but not in the Refridgerator.

Once the Rock Drake hatches, place some Nameless Venom in its inventory. If it refuses to eat initially, you can force feed it similarly to how you can force feed a baby Wyvern. Then, simply give it time, make sure it has plenty of room to grow, and keep it safe from harm as it slowly matures into adulthood.

Once it finally becomes an adult, you can slap a saddle on it and ride around the map on your new, terrifying Rock Drake. It can scale walls simply by walking up them, glide by leaping from cliff faces and high places, and cloak itself and its rider by pressing the crouch button.


What do you think of Aberration's Rock Drake? Is it going to become your go-to mount for the expansion? Let us know in the comments below!

For more tips on surviving among prehistoric and fantastic creatures, be sure to check out the rest of our ARK: Survival Evolved guides.

Solving the RE7: Not A Hero DLC Puzzles Thu, 14 Dec 2017 15:07:58 -0500 ElConquistadork

Resident Evil 7's latest DLC, Not A Hero, takes the survival horror of the original RE7 and adds in the action-packed feeling that more recent Resident Evil games were popular for. However, that doesn't mean they've thrown out the puzzles entirely! Here are the solutions to Not A Hero's biggest headscratchers.

The Pulley System

The first puzzle you run into comes past the red shutter door in the central room. You need a key to save one of your comrades, and you'll find it hooked to a crate full of mannequins (gotta love Lucas and his sense of ambiance). He's even added a handy label for your benefit!

But of course, nothing's that easy. The moment you attempt to take the key, it's pulled upward by a pulley system. Follow the cord holding it up, and you'll find a deconstructed crank. 

To find the pieces you need to put everything back together again, start by heading to the far back-right end of the room. You'll find a giant pile of rubble and a necessary gear. Pick that bad boy up.

From there, turn around and head toward that big green trailer in front and to the left of you. Next to that is a big cable spool, and the crank you need.

After that, it's just a matter of putting everything together on the pulley system itself and giving it a turn. Grab the key fast, though, because you're about to have one great big pile of ugly breathing down your throat!

We Three Power Switches

Once you've passed the Alpha Molded and several racks of dead bodies past the green shutter, you'll find yourself in a dark, dank hallway with three power switches that need to be turned on in the right order to progress.

You can fiddle with them and experiment if you want, but the truth is that the answer is just up the hallway. Take a left at the end of the hall and you'll see some arrows written on the wall (I don't know what they're painted in, and I'm not sure I want to know).

Those of you who have played any game before can take a wild guess as to what these arrows are meant to correspond to. Head back to the switches, and turn them in this order: Up, Down, Up. 

The Rail Car Puzzle

Eventually, you'll find yourself in a room filled snugly with four rail cars. In order to progress, you're going to want to push them in this order:

1. Start with the rail cart covered in yellow tape. You'll push it through a rickety log wall. Make sure to go ahead and fill the bloater back there full of holes before you move on, though.

2. Head toward the second cart that's covered in blue tape: the one facing a wall that appears to be made of iron. Push it against that wall.

3. Now you're heading toward the first cart covered in blue tape. You'll push that one into the hallway that you entered the room for (not a move for the claustrophobic, but just trust me on this one).

4. Finally, find that charming rail cart full of balloons and a handsome yet terrifying mannequin head. Push that through the log wall that's protecting even more balloons. Now head through there and claim your Clown Key.

The Room Of Laser-Explosive Wonder

You're going to be about 3/4 of the way through the DLC when you come upon the only living member of the original three soldiers that Umbrella Corps sent in before you. He's lying on the floor in a room filled with lasers coming from every direction. 

If you've played the original Resident Evil 7, you know the rules: 

First, don't walk through those lasers, or you'll see why I called it The Room Of Laser-Explosive Wonder and not The Room Of Laser-Cake and Pie Wonder.

Second, don't shoot at the damn things, or you'll find out why I called it ... well, you get the idea.

The key is to stay low and wind your way around the room by sticking to the walls as close as you can. 

When you get to the soldier, the temptation will be to go immediately to him, splash some water on his face, and recruit him in your mission to turn Lucas Baker into a body full of holes. Resist this urge, and continue past him to the wall right next to the door you entered from.

Behind a pile of crates, you'll find the power switch that controls the lasers. 

Turn this switch off, and you'll avoid Lucas attempting to blow you sky high when you go to wake up the unconscious soldier.


And those are the main puzzles you'll run into during Resident Evil 7's Not A Hero DLC.

Did we miss any? Were there any spots in particular that you needed help with that weren't mentioned here? Let us know in the comments below!

Hello Neighbor Act 2 Puzzle Walkthrough Thu, 14 Dec 2017 14:52:47 -0500 Ty Arthur

Each main act throughout stealth horror game Hello Neighbor has you trying to outwit the title villain and work through his house to uncover secrets, or even escape his vile clutches after being captured.

Below we cover everything you need to know to fully explore the house and escape in Hello Neighbor Act 2. With this guide, you can easily make it to the end, but make sure to get caught a few times so you don't miss out on the story cut-scenes.

Hello Neighbor Act 2 Walkthrough

Starting in the weird, fake room you discovered in the previous act, there's nothing immediately to pick up or throw, and the door won't unlock. Go peep through the keyhole and look right and left until you hear a sound letting you know something fell over.

Go look at the window where the boards fell over, and you should hear a click letting you know the door is now unlocked and can be opened. Head outside and grab the air duct grate in front of the red light so you can move through the crawl space. 

 Crawling through the ducts

From there, head up the ladder to find that the neighbor's house has changed quite a bit, and you are now locked in behind a giant fence. Off to your right in a broken section of a fence is a pipe with a red turn wheel.

Your first goal is to get the gauge on the wheel into the red by pulling levers on three other pipes around the area. The first one is found just by following the fence a bit further. 

 Turning the first pipe lever

Turn around and go back the other way in the yard to find the second lever on the long pipe that sticks up out of the ground and runs into the house. You can't reach it yet, though, because it's so high up in the air.

For now, head around to the other side of the house and look for a window leading into the kitchen. Smash the window with an object (like the binoculars or shoe) and then open the freezer to find the wrench.

 Stealing the wrench

You already know the drill on the wrench from the previous act. Use it to unscrew the makeshift fence that prevents you from accessing the ladder in the back yard that leads up towards the top of the house.

Up the ladder, walk forward across the roof (it looks like you should fall, but you can walk forward above the pipes). Crouch down at the end and slowly move forward to reach the second lever that was previously too high up to access.

Slowly move the reticle up and down near the red band until it expands and lets you know you can turn the lever (it's easy to fall here, so stay as far back as possible).

 Turning the second pipe lever

The third lever is actually inside the house. Based on where the neighbor is patrolling, getting to it may require a different route than I used, but the most direct way is to go around and enter the front door, then go through the door on your right. The pipe is clearly visible up against the wall next to the couch.

 Turning the third pipe lever

Head outside near the area where the pipe is jutting out of the ground, and break the single window facing the side fence (next to the pipes and opposite two other windows facing the back fence).

Drop a box in front of the window and jump inside to find an odd hallway room with a light switch, door, and a blocked-off area covered in junk. Go through the door and flip the switch on the giant boiler after all three levers have been turned.

 Break this window and throw down a box to get inside

After flipping the switch, go back to that first pipe with the glass gauge and the red wheel you found in the fence when you escaped the basement.

The wheel will be removed, and a bunch of gunk will be spraying out all over the ground. Pick up the red wheel off the ground in front of the pipe, as you will need it later.

 Grabbing the red wheel

With the wheel in hand, go back up the ladder and move across the roof. About halfway across the pipes you should see a red band segment that looks like it should have a lever, but doesn't. 

Getting on the actual pipe is sort of annoying due to the controls, and it takes a few tries. I recommend going forward until you see the pipe junction, then crouch, turn right, and slowly move forward until you fall onto the pipes.

Interact with the red band area while you have the wheel as your current item to screw the wheel in place. Turn the wheel after it's been set down (you should hear water gushing), then pick the wheel back up so you can repeat the process at another location.

 Placing the wheel

Grab two boxes and head back up the ladder. When you reach the top, directly to your left is an intersection where the fence meets the sloped roof. Drop one box on top of the other, and jump up on top of the fence.

You can crouch and slowly move forward to find the next place to drop the wheel, turn the wheel, and remove the wheel. Water will start gushing out of the pipe, which drains an area up above filled with water and -- no joke -- has a shark patrolling around.

 Using the wheel on top of the fence

After getting the wheel back, jump off the fence so you are still on the roof and enter the door. Head up the ladder and then go up all the makeshift stairs through another door.

Now you can walk through this area that used to be filled with water and had a a patrol shark. Don't use the wheel on the pipe clearly visible against the wall or it will refill the pool. Instead, go grab the shovel in the middle of the area on the red rug.


Head through the door on the opposite side of the room, and grab the gold key off the keyring on the wall. Unlock the door, and now you have an easier access point for getting around the area if you are being chased by the neighbor.

There's a hole in the center of the floor here -- go down the ladder inside the hole to gain access to a kid's bedroom with a dollhouse. Pull the chair off the door so you can get back in later. Exit the room and head down the staircase to get back into the main part of the house.

Look for a big pump device with a red pull lever, and follow its wires to a nearby door. Grab the key and unlock the door so you can use it as a shortcut later. Return to the pump and again place the wheel on so you can turn it, then pull the wheel back off. After turning the wheel, pull the red lever.

 Using the house pump

Head out the door you unlocked and through the next door to return to the yard. Head around to the side (the area with the ladder inside the fence leading up the roof) with the shovel in hand and look for the section where there's dirt instead of grass. Use the shovel to dig up a coffin, then grab the key with a pink bow found inside.

 Digging up the coffin

Remember the kid's room you dropped into from the roof? Go back in there and use the key on the dollhouse. Open the doors inside the tiny dollhouse and you should hear some noises letting you know things changed inside the neighbor's house as well. This unlocks access to the bathroom and a side room with a switch.

 Using the dollhouse doors

Now go back down to the yard and return to the room with the big boiler you turned on to first pump the water and get the broken wheel (if the area has reset after getting caught, you will need to break the window and set down a box again).

Set the wheel on the red band part of the pipe on the right side, and repeat the process yet again of turning and removing the wheel. After getting the wheel back, go to the front of the house and look for an open ladder to the left of the porch (this one isn't blocked by a fence).

Head up the ladder and walk across the roof to find yet another pipe segment where you can use the wheel (just before the white lattice section of the roof).

 We're getting an awful lot of use out of this wheel

Head back inside the house and go to the floor with the kid's room where the dollhouse is located. In the hallway outside the kid's room, go up the ladder and look across to see a red faucet. You need to crouch and jump down onto to the pipes to use the wheel again. This time, the faucet will turn on and flood the room.

After the room is flooded, return to the hallway outside the kid's room and open the door nearby. Flip the switch on the wall next to the gauge, which should be all the way over into red now that you have turned on all the pipes.

This will turn on the coils in the flooded room, freezing the water. Go back up the ladder and run across the frozen water to access the door.

 Crossing the frozen water

Inside the next room, grab the red key off the door. Go back down to the first floor and access the bathroom through the door in the kitchen. Grab the giant Lego guy holding a crowbar off the toilet.

Go all the way back up to the kid's room and set the Lego guy on the toilet in the dollhouse. Leave him there, and now you can run back down to the bathroom. Mysteriously, the Lego guy will be back on the toilet and the crowbar will be unlocked -- grab it out of the Lego guy's hand!

 What odd mysteries does this house hold?

With the crowbar in hand, head over to the front of the house and then go to the right side of the porch. Look for a segment of fence near the ground where you can use the crowbar to remove several black metal tacks. When the tacks are gone, crouch down and crawl out to initiate a cut-scene. 

 Using the crowbar on the fence

When you appear in the next segment, use the binoculars to look out the window until there's a knock at the door, then grab the postcard that pops through the mail slot to initiate another cut-scene and finish the act.

Looking for the Hello Neighbor Act 1 puzzle walkthrough instead? You can find that one over here, as well as getting info on the oddball changes implemented with Friendly Mode.

Did you find any other interesting secrets or methods for completing Hello Neighbor Act 2? Let us know in the comments!

How to Play the Miramar Map in PUBG Thu, 14 Dec 2017 10:16:23 -0500 Sergey_3847

The new desert map in PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds has been available for some time now, but it looks like getting onto the actual map is not as easy as it seems at first. There are a few technical reasons for this, so hopefully it will change in the future.

For now, you're in the hands of the RNG gods, and if you find yourself unable to connect to the new Miramar map, then follow our quick guide for tips on making this possible.

How to Play the Desert Map in PUBG

Step 1: Launch Test Server

Many new players may not be aware of the fact that the new PUBG map is currently only available on the game's test server. This means that you will not be able to try out the Miramar map in the original game.

In order to launch the test server, follow these steps:

  1. Go to your Steam Game Library.
  3. If you don't see it in your main library, then search for it in other categories.
  4. Install and launch the Test Server.

Now, you will have the chance to play on the Miramar map. However, you may not be able to get it right away since there are two maps available on the Test Server, including the old Erangel.

Since you can't choose which map to play yet, you will have to wait for it to appear randomly. But here's what you can do to increase your chances.

Step 2: Restart Your Game

The PUBG Test Server is currently heavily loaded with new players that are all trying to get onto the new map. This prompts players to restart their game and try again and again until they get to Miramar.

You can do the same, but be aware that this may take you up to 15-20 tries. If you're ready to do this, then you will surely get the new map.

On the other hand, you could try and play the game at night, when fewer players are connected. This will greatly increase your chances to play on Miramar without restarting too many times.


Hopefully, the developers will give players an option to choose which map to play in the near future. And if you're looking for other PUBG guides here at GameSkinny, then check them out below:

Destiny 2 Guide: How to Obtain the Perfect Paradox Shotgun Wed, 13 Dec 2017 17:02:44 -0500 Joshua Broadwell

Destiny 2's Curse of Osiris expansion just keeps on giving. Along with the original 10 Lost Prophecies that had players collecting various items and completing sub-quests, there is now a new Lost Prophecy called Another Verse to complete, and apart from being full of lore, it gives you one of the game's best weapons as well. Here's how to get it.

Accessing Another Verse

Before Brother Vance will offer you the Lost Prophecy Another Verse, you'll have to complete the first 10 Lost Prophecies as well (and you can check out our guide for how to do that, too). Once that's done, head back to the Lighthouse and speak to Brother Vance. In addition to Another Verse, you'll be given a new mission: Signal Light on Mercury. It sends you back to the Infinite Forest and starts unveiling some of the lore behind the game and Saint 14.

Item Collecting

Speak to Brother Vance again after completing Signal Light, and he tasks you with collecting six items: 2 Concentrated Radiolarian Culture, 2 Advanced Paradox Amplifiers, and 2 Fossilized Hermaion Blossoms (we've got you covered for how to find the blossoms, too).

Not Even the Darkness

After collecting the necessary items, Brother Vance gives you another mission: Not Even the Darkness. Here, you'll actually pursue Saint 14 and learn what happened to him.

Perfect Paradox Shotgun

Finally, after you complete Not Even the Darkness, Brother Vance allows you to forge the Perfect Paradox Shotgun. Here's a rundown of its stats:

  • Rounds per minute: 100
  • Impact: 65
  • Range: 39
  • Stability: 42
  • Reload Speed: 68
  • Handling: 49


Let us know in the comments if you plan on using the Perfect Paradox, and check out our other Destiny 2 guides as well!

FFXV Episode Ignis Guide: How to Access All Alternate Endings Wed, 13 Dec 2017 16:19:51 -0500 Autumn Fish

Episode Ignis is the latest DLC for Final Fantasy XV Season Pass owners and the last in a saga that follows Noctis' partners after they were all separated near the end of the main story. As the name implies, you play as Ignis in an attempt to save Noctis after he has fallen during the battle in Altissia.

As it happens, there are three different endings to see in the new episode, but which one you see entirely depends upon your decisions throughout the story.

The True Ending of FFXV Episode Ignis

Coincidentally, on your first playthrough of the episode, the only ending you'll be able to see is the true ending. When Ardyn offers you a choice, you Fight Back against him and stand your ground in order to protect Prince Noctis.

At this point, Ignis gains incredible power through the help of the Ring of the Lucii. Using this power, attack Ardyn until your energy is depleted and a cutscene plays, signaling the true ending of Ignis's story.

After the credits roll, not only does the game unlock a neat duel with Noctis, but it also unlocks the two Alternate Endings to the episode. Rather than accessing an old save and fighting Ravus again, you can continue right from the cutscene where Ardyn appears so you can immediately see the branching paths by selecting Extra Verse from the Episode Ignis menu.

FFXV Episode Ignis Guide How to Access All Alternate Endings Final Fantasy XV

The Two Alternate Endings of FFXV Episode Ignis

This time, when Ardyn makes his offer again, you'll have a second choice: Play Along. Down this path, you have the chance of seeing one of two different endings.

Here, you have another chance to fight Ardyn using the Ring of the Lucii, however, the Ring gives you a few choices during the fight. If you Give Up when the power of the Ring initially fades or lose to Ardyn, he'll kill Ignis, revealing all of his dastardly plans before the Game Over screen flashes. It's not, like, a real ending, but the extra scene is notable.

However, if you choose to Sacrifice Yourself to the Ring of the Lucii, you'll have the power to kill Ardyn so that Noctis can continue on to fulfill his destiny. It's not a canon ending to the episode, but it's a nice alternate ending that reveals a lot of backstory for Ardyn and is totally worth plaything through.


What did you think of Episode Ignis? Was it a fitting wrap up to the overarching story? Let us know in the comments section below!

For more tips on saving the Kingdom of Lucis, be sure to check out the rest of our Final Fantasy XV guides.

Middle-earth: Shadow Of War - Gravewalker Difficulty Guide Wed, 13 Dec 2017 15:21:36 -0500 Ty Arthur

If Shadow Of War has one constant complaint from players, it's that the difficulty is usually on the low end. That makes sense in the context of the story, however.

As a ring wraith of incredible power, Talion has few challenges that can't be utterly annihilated with his broad range of skills, and death is only a mild inconvenience that sometimes even leads to benefits.

Those who are tired of steamrolling every orc Captain out there are getting an early Christmas present! The Gravewalker difficulty has arrived to put you in your place, taking Shadow Of War and basically turning it into Dark Souls: Middle-earth Edition!

This new difficulty setting was just unleashed alongside the Outlaw Tribe DLC, although Gravewalker difficulty is available for everyone regardless of whether you picked up the season pass or just have the base game.

Shadow Of War Gravewalker Difficulty Changes

A host of changes to the base gameplay arrive with Gravewalker that make everything from strolling through Nurnen to sieging a fortress significantly more difficult.

The biggest takeaway is that Last Chance is turned off, meaning essentially that all grunts and Captains have the No Chance skill by default. However, you can still get one Last Chance by picking the Adamant upgrade to the Retaliation skill, which you will absolutely need.

Here is the complete list of difficulty and AI changes to Shadow Of War's Gravewalker mode:

  • The player gets no Last Chances
  • Slightly increased drain time 
  • Enemies are more perceptive, are able to spot a stealthy player from farther away, and are no longer surprised
  • Orcs gain more levels when they kill Talion
  • Orcs gain more levels when a Death Threat is sent
  • Orcs gain more levels when they become Maniacs due to Shaming
  • More Orc Captains are present roaming the world
  • Nemesis Missions have one turn duration instead of three turns
  • Worms are less frequent, have much better senses, and can drop bombs as they flee
  • All enemies deal more damage, particularly grunts
  • Players deal less damage to Captains with all weapons
  • Explosions deal more damage to Talion and slightly less to enemies
  • Captains adapt more quickly to player attacks
  • Enemies attack more quickly and are more likely to coordinate attacks
  • Enraged Orcs are harder to disrupt
  • Retreating enemies adapt to stealth attacks
  • Siege Beasts take less damage from their ammo packs exploding
  • Followers bleed out more quickly
  • Shortened duration of Dazed state triggered by fear and weaknesses
  • Poisoning a barrel or using Distract costs Focus

Shadow Of War Gravewalker Difficulty Survival Guide

With all those changes piling on at once, just getting from point A to point B becomes deadly, and that's before taking on any missions or defending a fortress.

Since everyone else is more dangerous and Talion is more squishy, there's a much bigger focus on using your followers as a buffer. Bring along a bodyguard, summon your graug or caragor, and take time to dominate enemies who are away from the main body of orcs.

 Having orcs on your side goes from "neat" to "required not to die."

Remaining undetected for as long as possible becomes critical, but you also need to modify your tactics overall for any combat situation. Due to increased drain time, it is no longer viable to drain and dominate enemies during a frenzied melee. Moving away from the horde is a must, but there's also a big problem there due to the game's engine.

Honestly, your biggest enemy is the camera or getting stuck rolling on a wall when you intend to climb up it and get to safety. The camera is going to cause your death more frequently than not countering on time, so you need to move melee combat into areas with better overall views and where you are certain you can leap up without getting stuck.

Personally, I accidentally evade in a direction I'm trying to run all the time due to how close the button setup is -- which also drains Focus -- so I recommend turning that skill off entirely unless it's critical to your combat style.

In the early stages of the game, green gems will save your life. In the mid to late game, don't even bother with them, because you will die in one to two hits anyway, so restoring health doesn't matter.

Anyone with a crossbow is going to annihilate you, especially if you stupidly do something to enrage them, because there's no way to dodge all those bolts simultaneously, so paying attention to a Captain's skills is absolutely required.

Always be on the ready for an ambush by a second Captain in absolutely any given situation just as you are about to gain the upper hand, and don't expect a Savior to appear as you die nearly as often as in the base game.

With those Shadow Of War Gravewalker difficulty tips and strategies in mind, its just a matter of trial and error and figuring out the tactics that work best for you during combat. Talion will still die -- repeatedly -- but eventually you can hit a groove where those deaths come less frequently if you stay on your guard, kill at range or from stealth whenever possible, and use a Captain's weaknesses against him.

 There's going to be a lot of this camera angle with Talion getting murdered

Still need help completing any other part of the game? Be sure to check out our full list of Shadow Of War guides right here.

ARK Aberration Guide: How to Tame a Bulbdog (and Why You Should) Wed, 13 Dec 2017 11:18:54 -0500 Autumn Fish

If you've spent time with the new Aberration expansion for ARK: Survival Evolved, you've probably seen more than a few Bulbdogs wandering around the mushroom forest already. They're cute and unseemly, but if you were to tame one of these beasts, you'd find it actually proves to be a strong personal companion for exploring the new map.

So how do you tame a Bulbdog of your own, and how exactly does it help you out in the new Aberration expansion? Let's dive in!

How to Tame a Bulbdog in ARK Aberration

Bulbdogs are passive tames, which means you must follow them around and feed them until they're friendly enough to follow you around in turn. To do this, you just put food in your last hotbar slot, and use it when the taming prompt shows up while looking at the creature.

These adorable angler-fish-dog-things primarily eat meat, but there are select kinds of plant matter they're willing to chow down on. They'll eat certain types of seeds, for example, but what they really love are Aquatic Mushrooms. Those are found simply by gathering at mushroom patches on the Aberration map.

You could choose to make the taming process easier by building a small structure around the creature, but it may be more hassle than it's worth unless there are dangerous creatures around. Alternatively, you could take a flying mount and drop it into a pen, but by the time you have something that can fly, you should ideally have one of these anyway. And why is that?

ARK Survival Evolved Aberration Expansion Guide How to Tame a Bulbdog

Why You Should Tame a Bulbdog in ARK Aberration

The Bulbdog may not be all that menacing, but its light-emitting bulb has interesting effects that help with traversing the new map. It needs a charge from creatures like Glowbugs in order to use the light, but it's well worth it when you're exploring the creepy Bioluminescence area.

The light fends off the Nameless, which spawn the Reaper King if they manage to swarm you. They will swarm you, too, if you don't bring a lit-up Bulbdog, so make sure you have one on your shoulder. After all, a Reaper King is really not something you want to deal with unprepared.

Outside of the Bioluminescence area, the light has the chance of attracting other small creatures. Overall, this unique Bulbdog is a handy creature to keep around. You'd be loath to be without one by your side on your journeys in Aberration.

For more tips on surviving the latest expansion and more, be sure to check out our ARK: Survival Evolved guides.

Hearthstone Dungeon Run Guide: Best Card Bundles and Abilities Wed, 13 Dec 2017 11:09:42 -0500 Sergey_3847

With the release of the new Kobolds & Catacombs card set, Hearthstone received a brand-new solo adventure: Dungeon Run. It requires players to play against eight different bosses and will reward them with a new card back if they manage to finish the run with all nine hero classes.

This new adventure has a lot to offer, including lots of new abilities and challenges. If you can't decide which card bundles, treasure cards, and passive abilities to choose for each class, then follow this guide for all the best possible combos.

Best Cards and Abilities Combos for Dungeon Run

In the course of the adventure, you will get to choose two passive abilities and two unique treasure cards, and after each boss, you will get to choose a new bundle of cards, which will be added to your current decklist.

In total, there are 14 passive abilities, 28 treasure cards, and 12 card bundles for each class. Your decisions will define whether your Dungeon Run will go smoothly or run into lots of obstacles. So how do you choose the best combinations of cards and abilities?

Best Druid Combos

The starting 10-card deck for Druid offers a midrange strategy with a few beasts and removals. However, you should opt for a different course: Aggro and Jade, or Stampede and Jade Fangs, as they are titled in the adventure. One of these card bundles will give you the most advantage on board.

If you decide to play with Jade Fangs, then the best passive ability to have is Battle Totem, which triggers all your battlecries twice. Since most Jade cards are based on battlecries, this will help you grow your board rather quickly. The best treasure card for Jade Fangs is Bag of Stuffing, which will help you draw all of your Jade Idols in one turn.

If you go for Stampede archetype, then choose either Captured Flag, which gives all your minions +1/+1, or Cloak of Invisibility, which makes them permanently stealthy. As for the treasure card, be sure to take Horn of Cenarius, which will recruit three minions for you.

Best Hunter Combos

Hunter has always strongly relied on beast synergies, so the best strategy is to either go aggro with Wee Beasts bundle or opt for a more powerful beast deck with Big Beasts.

The best passive abilities for Wee Beasts are Captured Flag for buffing and Crystal Gem, which will grant you an additional mana crystal for great tempo plays. The best treasure card in this case is obviously Horn of Cenarius.

Big Beasts is a relatively slower archetype, but potentially way more dangerous, especially in combination with an ability such as Scepter of Summoning, which makes all your big beasts cost 5 mana. But you can go even further and choose the Boots of Haste treasure card, which will make all your minions cost zero for one turn.

Best Mage Combos

There are lots of possible options to go with the Mage class, but these two bundles are especially effective: Magical Friends and Fire. The first one involves some of the best and most aggressive cards for the Mage class, such as Flamewaker and Archmage Antonidas, while the second one is all about destroying the enemy's board and face.

Both archetypes will greatly benefit from the Robe of the Magi ability, which gives all your spells +3 damage. Also, if you want to keep your Flamewaker and Antonidas alive for longer, then also choose Cloak of Invisibility.

The two best treasure cards for Mage are Archmage Staff, which will consistently provide you with spells every turn, and Bag of Coins, which will give your Antonidas enough fuel to produce more of those pesky Fireballs.

Alternatively, you could choose the Elementals package and never worry about your life total due to Frost Lich Jaina's ability.

Best Paladin Combos

Paladin is probably the best class to play through the Dungeon Run. It has so many good options that almost anything that you take will work. However, here are a few suggestions that might be the best bundles of all:

  • Divine Shield (helps keep your minions alive),
  • Helping Hand (buffs your minions in hand),
  • Silver Hand (token archetype with lots of synergies), and
  • Murlocs (the most powerful archetype).

All these bundles are rather aggressive, so the best passive abilities for Paladin would be Captured Flag and Justicar's Ring, if you decide to go for the Silver Hand bundle. It will grant you new hero power that will summon two tokens instead of one.

As for the treasure cards, Bag of Stuffing and Horn of Cenarius are again what you're looking for.

Best Priest Combos

The two most definitve archetypes for Priest are Dragon Priest, which is a highly efficient tribal deck, and Last Rites, which relies on all the available deathrattle synergies, including one of the most powerful cards in Hearthstone, such as N'Zoth.

For a Dragon bundle, you can take either Battle Totem or Captured Flag, depending on how aggressive you want to be. As for the Last Rites, you can go with Totem of the Dead, because it includes many important deathrattle cards, which will now trigger twice.

The two treasure cards you can easily go with are Dr. Boom's Boombox, if you've got the Totem of the Dead ability, and Wondrous Wand for your Dragon deck.

Best Rogue Combos

Rogue class can be extremely powerful when it has the right tools in hand. That's why the two best bundles you can choose from are Jade Lotus and Outlaws, with the latter one being the high-octane pirate bundle that is probably the fastest archetype of all.

No matter which of these two bundles you decide to play with, always take the Cloak of Invisibility ability. Making all your minions permanently stealthy will result in a long streak of fast wins.

Rogue can have a lot of trouble removing the enemy's board and staying alive, so choose the correct treasure cards, such as Wand of Disintegration that destroys all enemy minions, and The Candle, a powerful AOE that returns to your deck.

Best Shaman Combos

There are a couple of viable archetypes for Shaman class, such as Jade Lotus and Mechanized. The last one is especially exciting since it brings back all those overpowered mechs from the "Goblins vs Gnomes" era.

As usual, with these particular archetypes you want to have Captured Flag and Cloak of Invisibility. These will make sure that your minions will stay on board untouched and well buffed.

Additionally, such treasures as Bag of Stuffing and Boots of Haste will give you an unprecedented tempo in case some of the more dangerous bosses still find a way to clear your board.

Best Warlock Combos

It sometimes can be hard for Warlock to stay alive in Dungeon Run due to its hero power, but there are a few combos that will help you survive and win your matches.

In this case, consider taking the Dire Demons bundle, which includes Mal'Ganis, an extremely strong demon that makes your hero immune. In order for Mal'Ganis to stay alive, give it permanent stealth with the help of Cloak of Invisibility. You'll see that killing you will now be almost impossible.

The other option is a combination of the Taunt and Lifesteal bundles. However, both of these require some additional ramping with such abilities as Crystal Gem and Sceptre of Summoning.

If none of these appeal to you, then go for a typical aggressive zoo approach in the form of the Little Legion or Swarm bundles.

Best Warrior Combos

History shows that Warrior is most effective when it plays with Pirates and Weapons. Of course, you could go with a more control-oriented deck, but when you have the most aggressive combo in Hearthstone, control doesn't look that appealing anymore.

Grommash's Armguards is a perfect ability for Warrior, as it makes all your weapons cost only one mana. Imagine playing Arcanite Reaper or Gorehowl on turn one. Combine it with Portable Forge treasure for an extra legendary weapon, and always go face.

The Pirates package, just like any other aggro bundle, should be supported by Captured Flag and Horn of Cenarius.


You can try many other options for this Dungeon Run, and if you do, please let everybody know in the comments section below which combos worked the best for you.

If you're looking for other Kobolds and Catacombs guides for Hearthstone here at GameSkinny, then check them out below:

PUBG Xbox Controls Guide Wed, 13 Dec 2017 10:29:49 -0500 Joshua Broadwell

PUBG is finally out on Xbox One, but with the change from PC to console come some changes in how the controls work. Quick movements and accurate actions are paramount for success, and it pretty much goes without saying that aiming is among the most important things you'll be doing in PUBG. Some buttons will perform different functions when clicked or held too. But, complicated as it may sound, it's all fairly simple and intuitive, so if you're used to PC controls, you'll pick these up in no time.

Basic Controls in PUBG for Xbox

Much to the surprise of few, the left stick controls your movement, and if you click it, you'll be able to sprint. The right stick controls the camera.

Lettered Buttons

For interacting with the environment, you'll tap the X button. But, if you need to reload, you'll hold the X button down. Y is for equipping or switching weapons, and holding it down unequips a weapon. The A button jumps (and that's it), while pressing B lets you crouch, and holding B makes you go prone. 

The D-Pad

Pressing up on the D-pad equips a melee weapon, and pressing right equips or throws a throwable weapon. Left changes fire mode. Pressing down will change out a consumable item, while holding down uses it.


The Right Trigger is what you'll be using a lot, since it fires your weapon. Hold it down to chuck a grenade.

How to Aim Down Sights in PUBG

The Left Trigger is equally important, though.

To bring up your sights, just tap the left trigger on the controller. You don't have to hold it down to keep the sights up, either. They stay up until you tap the left trigger again.

Xbox PUBG Aiming Controls

Fortunately, the other aiming controls for the Xbox controller aren't difficult to pick up on either. Pressing up or down on the D-Pad increases or decreases zeroing, respectively, and pressing right will reset zeroing. Left changes your fire mode. The left stick is for moving, just like any other game, and the right stick lets you look around. Pressing either stick leans your character in that direction. Just as in normal control mode, pressing the Right Trigger fires your weapon, and if you hold it down, you'll toss a grenade.

How to Use a Scope

Using a scope goes hand-in-hand with aiming down sights. You'll use the left trigger just as if you were aiming down sights. But, you'll need to find a scope first and attach it to your chosen weapon. The easiest ways to find a scope are by exploring buildings or picking them up off of defeated players' bodies.

Map Controls

Press the view button to bring up or close your map (and B also closes it). You can zoom in or out by pressing up or down on the D-Pad, move the cursor with the right stick, and move the map by pressing the Right Bumper and moving the left stick. If you need to remove a marker, press Y.

Vehicle Controls

The Right Trigger accelerates, and the Left Trigger reverses. If you want a boost, press the Left Bumper, and if you need to change the camera, you'll use the Right Bumper. The left and right sticks are for movement and camera, as usual (but you can hold the left stick down to blow your horn, should you so choose).

The A button changes what seat you're in, and you can hold it down to select the driver's seat. Y activates the handbrake, and B has you exit the vehicle. X isn't used in this scheme.

Swimming Controls

The swimming control setup is fairly basic. Move with the left stick, and click it down to swim faster. Float by pressing A, dive with B, and interact with X.

Inventory Controls

The Xbox inventory controls are a bit more involved. You'll use the Right and Left Bumpers to move between columns in the inventory.The A button selects a weapon, then you'll find the slot where you want to place it, and press A again. X picks up items and ammo and puts them in your bag, and Y drops a selected item.

If you need to remove all attachments from a weapon, select that weapon and hold X. If you don't have room in the bag, select the weapon and hold Y to remove attachments and drop them on the ground.


Are you finding it difficult to get used to the XBox control scheme? Let us know in the comments, and be sure to check out our other PUBG guides!

Middle-earth: Shadow Of War Outlaw Tribe Brings New Gear And Mechanics Wed, 13 Dec 2017 10:11:23 -0500 Ty Arthur

When it comes to dominating an army of orcs and conquering Mordor, there was only one game this year on any gamer's wish list: Middle Earth: Shadow Of War!

Now, as most players have completed the four main story acts, a steady stream of extra post-game content has been released. Recent weeks brought us endless sieges after the 10-stage Shadow War grind is over in addition to updated rebellion mechanics and the gory, new Slaughter Tribe.

Before the actual story expansions start arriving next year, there's one more Shadow Of War DLC to download and do battle with: the bola-throwing Outlaw Tribe!

 Facing off against a new Outlaw Captain

Outlaw Tribe DLC Additions

Besides their updated aesthetics and a new list of possible orc names, the big change with the Outlaw Tribe is that Captains have a skill that lets them throw bolas, which lock an enemy in place.

Essentially, they serve the same purpose as a pinning shot from Talion's bow. Instead of having to blunder into a bear trap dropped by an orc with a special skill, now nearly any Outlaw captain can pin you in place with a well-placed bola toss.

Bolas will also be used in Pit Fights, either online or offline, so be sure to send a Captain into battle with a gang of archers or hunters to keep fighting at range while your orc is pinned.

 Bola Tribe Bonus

Besides new Legendary gear (covered in full below), several other gameplay additions have arrived in Shadow Of War with the Outlaws. These quests are very similar to the Slaughter tribe mechanics, with new mission spots appearing in each region after every siege.

The missions either have you face off against a specific Outlaw captain (who you should probably be dominating, unless you need Legendary gear), or put you in the middle of a battle between an Outlaw band and a different orc tribe. Either way, there's ton of experience and items to nab now with these additions:

Outlaw War Bands - Aid your ally and defeat your nemesis when facing off in new War Band quests, as Captains from the Outlaw tribe bring their own forces to battle.

Outlaw Showdowns - Face down specific Captains from the Outlaw tribe, with each showdown bringing unique challenges to complete.

Updated Fortress Themes - Fortresses can now embody the characteristics of the contemptuous Outlaw tribe, including themed monuments, outposts, and Overlord throne rooms. 

Purge - Captains from the Outlaw tribe prowl each region in groups, launching deadly ambushes in an attempt to cleanse their land of other Tribes.

Gravewalker Difficulty - Available for all players free of charge, even without the Outlaw expansion, this new difficulty mode makes the game much harder and allows no Last Chance tries during combat.

 New Outlaw Tribe Options

Outlaw Legendary Gear Set

If you fully complete every single Shadow Of War legendary gear set, there are now an astonishing 60 different pieces to acquire by opening tombs, completing online vendettas, and killing Legendary orcs of various tribes.

Each piece of Legendary Outlaw gear (collectively called the Blackguard set) will have a randomized upgrade challenge, with the bola weapon now featuring prominently in those challenges. 

The bonus for carrying multiple types of Outlaw gear far outlcasses all other sets, giving you a 1 in 4 chance to inflict any of the status effects with every single attack. These are the six new Legendary pieces now available with the Outlaw tribe DLC:

  • Blackguard Armor -- Kill a Legendary Outlaw Tank or Outlaw Destroyer
  • Blackguard Sword -- Kill a Legendary Outlaw Slayer
  • Blackguard Dagger -- Kill a Legendary Outlaw Assassin or Outlaw Berserker
  • Blackguard Bow -- Kill a Legendary Outlaw Marksman or Outlaw Tracker
  • Blackguard Cloak -- Kill a Legendary Outlaw Beastmaster
  • Blackguard Ringcraft -- Kill a Legendary Outlaw Commander or Outlaw Trickster

Two-Piece Bonus: 25% chance to inflict fire, poison, frost, or curse upon an enemy on a hit.

Four-Piece Bonus: Follower attacks have a 20% to inflict fire, poison, frost, or curse on enemies.

Needless to say, you should be working towards a four-piece set immediately since no orc is immune to all the status effects, so you and your army will be able to overcome any Captain immunities just with their regular attacks!

 Acquiring Outlaw Legendary Gear

Those are all the new Shadow Of War additions with the Outlaw tribe DLC you need to know about!

What's the coolest new Outlaw Legendary you've dominated so far? Let us know in the comments, and stay tuned for the Blade Of Galadriel and Desolation Of Mordor story DLC packs set to arrive in February and March 2018!

Need help with the rest of the game? Check out our full list of Shadow Of War guides here, covering everything from dominating orcs with Iron Will to completing the Bruz quests and opening the Ithilidin poem doors.

Resident Evil 7 End of Zoe DLC Walkthrough Tue, 12 Dec 2017 15:58:41 -0500 Ty Arthur

Ditching many of the action elements of previous Resident Evil games and switching to a first-person formula, Resident Evil 7 was a horror highlight this year. But the terror isn't over quite yet!

After the Banned Footage expansions revealed the events leading up to the Baker family becoming evil cannibal monsters, now End of Zoe wraps up some loose ends from the main storyline.

This time around, you get to play as a true-blue mountain man hillbilly, complete drunken drawl and all, and apparently one of the only members of the Baker family who currently isn't a terrible mutated thing.

The DLC assumes you saved Mia instead of Zoe during the main game's campaign. Of course, if you "saved" Zoe with the serum, she just immediately dies anyway, so this expansion only makes sense if the main character chose to save his wife instead. But what exactly has been going on with Zoe out there in the swamp? Get ready to find out!

 Legitimate question!

End of Zoe Gameplay Changes

While you can still use healing liquid, the main character is now also healed by eating grubs and centipedes, which can be found on the ground, in the broken parts of trees, or underneath rocks.

While you have a shotgun, your main weapon is the power of your awesome fists, and you get into some serious fisticuffs with powerful enemies, so get used to blocking against incoming swings before unleashing a barrage of hits.

Before going loud for a fist fight, you want to sneak up on enemies whenever possible, as you have a one-hit stealth takedown option now, ripping the monster's head clean off. It's a good thing you didn't have to fight this guy during the base game's story!

 Mmmm . . . grubs. I guess it beats what Marguerite had cooked up!

Areas are now gated off by doors with a yellow X symbol you can't pass through immediately. To get through, you need to explore the area and kill more enemies until the door becomes breakable.

So, how did the Bakers get through these areas before the virus was released? Honestly, I think they kept the same system and just had to beat people up before being allowed through the gates. Seems in line with this guy's ethos.

Finally, be sure to collect effigies to increase fist attack power. The first effigy is just to your left on a barrel immediately after destroying the first yellow cross. A full list of all 18 effigy locations is available here.

 Can't punch this one to bits quite yet.

End of Zoe Walkthrough

After breaking the first yellow cross, head into the shack to grab the serum off the dead soldier, who dissolves into gross black goo. Get ready to block and strike, as a tree enemy will spawn directly behind you in the hallway.

Head back to the starting shack, which is now on fire, and give the partial dosage to Zoe. After the soldier is pulled through the wall, pick up Zoe and go out the door. Run through the water to the boat to start the next section of the DLC.

Set Zoe on the couch inside the cabin and head through the steel door. Most of the enemies in this area can be taken down with stealth insta-kills if you follow behind them for awhile.

Look out for the new, fast creatures that skitter on the ground, and be sure to grab the wood spears sitting on top of a stack of boxes sitting outside one of the tents. You can throw these -- or use the shotgun -- at range to take out the skittery little guys.

 Grabbing spears

In the same area is another yellow cross to break after you've killed the enemies. Just past the cross is an effigy up the stairs, sitting on a pillow (on top of a barrel) to your left. Jump down the hole into a lab.

After leaving the laboratory room, get ready for gators to fill the watery part of any walkway. Always go slow in water, and take out the gators with spears before getting close or they will eat you.

Pick up all the wood spears and move into the next area, where you can again stealth kill most of the enemies to get through the yellow barriers.

 Too bad there's no time to skin and fry him!

Head up the yellow ladder next to a shack to access the top section of the rusted, old ship. If you head up the stairs to the broken segment of roof, a third effigy can be found on the ledge where all the metal is curled upwards.

Continue through the ship, crawling through vents and breaking yellow barriers as necessary, until you go up a ladder and find the synthesizer computer.

Before using the machine, make sure you have some healing items stored, as there's about to be a boss fight. Turn on the computer to get a full dose of the serum and immediately get ambushed by a big monster.

End of Zoe Mini Boss

This mini boss -- just a bigger version of normal enemies -- hits hard but is slow, so move in a circle around him while punching to avoid most attacks.

Be sure to block when he winds back for his series of four swings in a row that are difficult to dodge. After a couple of dozen punches, you'll engage in some hillbilly wrestling moves to take out the End of Zoe DLC sub boss for good.

Return to Zoe, where of course something else bad happens that has you chasing off after her yet again. You didn't think this was over already, did you? Hop in the boat and chase after the creature through the open gate to reach the next point of the DLC.

While traversing through the water, again move slowly and hit gators with spears before proceeding, or you will meet a watery grave. While moving through this area, check each of the buildings and raised wood platforms thoroughly to grab new spears.

There are also now bombs you can set on the ground to explode as enemies chase you. Stock up on these to use in the final boss fight, as they are more helpful there. Make sure to also break any boxes with yellow tape, as you can find more effigies in this area.

 Break these for goodies!

When you reach the graveyard, it's easy to get swarmed by enemies, so try to stealth kill whenever possible.

When you find the larger creatures that spit goo, lead them away into a different segment if several smaller enemies approach at the same time. Don't forget to use your shotgun or spears if the big enemies become too difficult to take down in a close confrontation.

Eventually you will be captured by Jack and then escape. After getting swarmed by enemies, run up the path to grab the robotic arm, which packs even more wallop in your left punch. 

End of Zoe Jack Boss Fight

From there, repeat all the same things you've already been doing to make your way through the final area to the boss fight. Make sure to grab any healing items you need in the medical tent before heading through the long, white tent into the final building.

When the fight starts, be on the lookout for mutated Jack to throw his arms up or grow a long black tendril, indicating a strong attack is coming down or from the front.

Charge your robotic arm for a few hits, moving around to his side, then step back and throw several spears to knock him down (be on the lookout for Jack to jump suddenly to the side to avoid spears).

While Jack is struggling to his feet after taking a few spears, throw one of the bombs you stockpiled before on the ground. When he falls after the bomb goes off, get in as many charged punches as you can.

Repeat the process until he falls to his knees, and you can knock his eye out with a powered punch to complete the End of Zoe DLC!

Congratulations on completing the latest RE7 DLC, and special thanks to RabidRetrospectGames for the screenshots. Need help with any other part of this return-to-form for the beloved horror franchise? Check out the rest of our Resident Evil 7 guides here.

GTA Online Guide: All New Doomsday Heist DLC Vehicles Tue, 12 Dec 2017 13:45:05 -0500 Sergey_3847

After the smuggling adventures of the previous content upgrade, GTA Online gets a whole new DLC with many new vehicles -- Doomsday Heist. The apocalyptic scenario of the new content will have you drive on the ground, fly high up in the air, and even submerge deep under the water.

Given all that, you will have to use a wide variety of transportation means to help you accomplish all the missions. Follow this guide for all the currently available vehicles in the Doomsday Heist DLC for GTA Online.


  • Type: Military helicopter
  • Based on: Boeing–Sikorsky RAH-66 Comanche
  • Crew: 4

This helicopter's name refers to the Russian word "shark," which signifies the predatory nature of the vehicle designed to attack and destroy. It carries a 0.5 caliber turret on board upgraded with dual guns, thermal and night vision cameras, and miniguns on wings.

HVY Avenger

  • Type: Tiltrotor military aircraft
  • Based on: Bell Boeing V-22 Osprey
  • Crew: 4

HVY Industries is a famous manufacturer of industrial and military type vehicles in the GTA universe. This heavy bird produced by HVY is capable of performing as a Gunrunning Mobile Operations Center, a Vehicle Workshop, or a Weapon Workshop.

Imponte Deluxo

  • Type: Sports car
  • Based on: DeLorean DMC-12
  • Crew: 2

This is a slightly modified version of the DeLorean flying car from the Back to the Future film series. It now includes retractable weapons and wings, which should help you traverse San Andreas in a faster, safer way.

TM-02 Khanjali

  • Type: Military armored vehicle
  • Based on: PL-01 Concept Tank
  • Crew: 3

This futuristic-looking tank is made for destroying other tanks. It uses a new stealthy type of armor and can be upgraded with a railgun cannon, which can shoot various types of projectiles.


  • Type: Amphibious sports car
  • Based on: Lotus Esprit/Wet Nellie
  • Crew: 2

Both the design and the name of this car refer to the James Bond movie The Spy Who Loved Me. It is a compact submersible vehicle that can ride equally well on the ground and under the water.


  • Type: Weaponized off-road car
  • Based on: HDT Storm SRTV
  • Crew: 6

This 4x4 truck is equipped with not one but two machine guns: one on the front and the other on the back of the vehicle. This is a heavy attack car, which definitely has to kill fast, since there are very few defense mechanisms incorporated.


  • Type: Armored truck
  • Based on: INKAS ARCV
  • Crew: 4

Standing for "Riot Control Vehicle," this 6-wheel armored truck is used by law enforcement. It has two guns stationed on its roof, as well as a scoop that can be used to break through car blocks.


  • Type: Artillery truck
  • Based on: MAZ-7310
  • Crew: 3

If you feel the need to take down a couple of jets hovering over your territory, then this 8x8 ballistic missile launcher truck will do the job. Probably the craziest vehicle to be included in GTA Online yet.


  • Type: Bomber plane
  • Based on: Avro Vulcan
  • Crew: 5

Here is a plane that can potentially destroy the Chernobog truck from the sky if needed by dropping a bomb on top of it. Additionally, it carries two turrets: one on top and one on the bottom.

Coil Raiden

  • Type: Electric luxury car
  • Based on: Tesla Model S
  • Crew: 2

The new Coil car is super quiet, as it is based on an all-electric dual motor that produces noiseless acceleration. A really cool car to have and ride across San Andreas without attracting too much unwanted attention.

Pfister Comet Safari

  • Type: Retro car
  • Based on: Porsche 911
  • Crew: 2

If you ever wanted to modify a classic Porsche-looking car with weapons and other gear, then Comet Safari is a perfect choice. However, these modifications are only available inside an Avenger or Mobile Operations Center.

Ocelot Pariah

  • Type: Sports car
  • Based on: Jaguar XK
  • Crew: 2

Pariah is a true sports car that has its acceleration and speed characteristics almost maxed out. A perfect heist car for those who like to run away from the cops and never get caught in the process.

Ubermacht SC1

  • Type: Hybrid sports car
  • Based on: BMW i8
  • Crew: 2

More expensive than Pariah, and just as fast and capable of withstanding insane pursuits. If you prefer the look of SC1 and are willing to pay extra cash, then go for it without hesitation.

Mammoth Thruster

  • Type: Jetpack
  • Based on: Rocket belt
  • Crew: 1

This is the first time players can use jetpacks in GTA Online, but it is not a new device in the game's universe, as it was first introduced in GTA: San Andreas. If you can handle its tricky controls, then be sure to get one for yourself.


That is all for the new vehicles introduced in the Doomsday Heist DLC. Check out some of our other GTA Online guides below:

Battlefield 1 Guide: What Is a Multi Kill? Tue, 12 Dec 2017 13:26:49 -0500 Jonathan Moore

If you've played Battlefield 1 for any length of time, you know that the game's medals and weapon assignments often task you with completing certain sets of challenges to unlock certain sets of rewards. These challenges can vary from scenario to scenario, but it seems that one perplexing challenge shows up for the Royal Order of the Imperial Crown medal and the Type 38 Arisaka from the Turning Tides expansion. It's the Get X Number of Multi Kills -- and it's got some players scratching their heads. 

And rightfully so. Battlefield 1 isn't entirely clear on what the term Multi Kill even means in regards to kills. Many players have killed multiple enemies at once, only to find their progress bars empty. So what gives? 

How to Get Multi Kills in Battlefield 1

Battlefield 1 defines a Multi Kill as killing four or more enemies at the same time or in very (very) close succession. You can get Multi Kills by taking out marauding tanks -- if you make sure they're full -- or throwing grenades and explosives into overflowing bunkers. If you're fast enough, you can shoot four or more enemies in rapid succession for a Multi Kill, although that's arguably the hardest way to make progress toward getting the Royal Order medal and the Type 38 Arisaka in Turning Tides

If you're insanely fast -- and lucky -- like the Battlefield 1 player below, you can even get a Multi Kill bonus from melee attacks: 

Of course, whether you're strictly going for Multi Kills in Battlefield 1 or not, getting more than a single kill at a time helps you quickly progress through other challenges, too. So be on the lookout for groups of enemies huddled together -- and blast 'em to oblivion. 

Stay tuned to GameSkinny for more Battlefield 1 tips and tricks. If you're looking for more tips and tricks, check out our Turning Tides Weapon Stats guide here! 

Battlefield 1 Guide: Turning Tides Weapon Stats List and Unlock Requirements Mon, 11 Dec 2017 18:32:32 -0500 Jonathan Moore

Battlefield 1's third DLC, Turning Tides, is now available for premium pass owners. Taking the Great War to the shores of Gallipoli and beyond, Turning Tides gives Battlefield 1 players their first taste of WWI's amphibious warfare across the Cape Helles and Achi Baba maps. 

Not only will players experience some of the most harrowing combat scenarios from that war and have the ability to pilot an L-Class Destroyer, they'll also gain access to myriad other additions, including eight new guns and three new melee weapons.

Turning Tides New Gun Stats and How to Unlock Them

When you begin Turning Tides, you won't immediately have access to all the new weapons in the game. To unlock them, you'll need to complete the DLC's brand-new Weapon Assignments. These are various challenges that you'll need to complete using weapons already in the game, such as the M1918 Storm or the M1907 SL Trench. 

Note: Some of Battlefield 1's newest weapons can only be unlocked by unlocking other new weapons in the game. For example, both the Farquhar-Hill Optical and Farquhar-Hill Storm rifles are new with Turning Tides. However, the Optical variant of the Farquhar can only be unlocked by completing Weapon Assignments with the Storm. 

Maschinenpistole M1912/P.16 Storm

Class: Assault

How to Unlock: Get 50 kills with the Automatico M1918 Storm and destroy five boats with AT Rocket Gun.

Gun Stats: 

  • Damage: 23
  • Accuracy: 16
  • Hip Fire: 53
  • Control: 14
  • Ammo: 16/160

M1917 Trench Carbine

Class: Assault

How to Unlock: Get 15 sidearm kills and five multi-kills. 

Gun Stats: 

  • Damage: 27
  • Accuracy: 48
  • Hip Fire: 80
  • Control: 90
  • Ammo: 41/123

Farquhar-Hill Optical

Class: Medic

How to Unlock: Get 15 headshots with Farquhar-Hill Storm and complete 20 squad orders.

Gun Stats: 

  • Damage: 45
  • Accuracy: 74
  • Hip Fire: 27
  • Control: 37
  • Ammo:  20/80

Farquhar-Hill Storm

Class: Medic

How to Unlock: Get 25 kills with the M1907 SL Trench and 10 revives in a single round.

Gun Stats: 

  • Damage: 45 
  • Accuracy: 56
  • Hip Fire: 27
  • Control: 65
  • Ammo: 20/80

M1917 MG Low Weight

Class: Support

How to Unlock: Get 25 kills with the BAR M1918 Trench and 250 vehicle damage with explosives. 

Gun Stats: 

  • Damage: 27
  • Accuracy: 75
  • Hip Fire: 25
  • Control: 60
  • Ammo: 250/500

M1917 MG Telescopic

Class: Support

How to Unlock: Get 50 kills with the M1917 MG Low Weight and 1,500 suppression points with any LMG.

Gun Stats: 

  • Damage: 27
  • Accuracy: 89
  • Hip Fire: 25
  • Control: 60
  • Ammo: 250/500

Type 38 Arisaka Infantry 

Class: Scout

How to Unlock: Get 25 Counter Sniping kills and three multi-kills as a sniper. 

Gun Stats: 

  • Damage: 100
  • Accuracy: 100
  • Hip Fire: 20
  • Control: 50
  • Ammo: 5/30

Carcano M91 Carbine

Class: Scout

How to Unlock: Get 25 kills with the Gewehr M.95 Carbine and destroy five explosives. 

Gun Stats: 

  • Damage: 75
  • Accuracy: 100
  • Hip Fire: 30
  • Control: 50 
  • Ammo: 6/36

Turning Tides Melee Weapon Stats and How to Unlock Them

The brutal nature of war means that you won't always be able to defeat your enemy at range. Sometimes, you'll have to grapple with him in hand-to-hand combat. That's where Turning Tides' three new melee weapons come into play. 

Their savage effectiveness will be just what you need if you run out of ammo or stumble across an enemy in close quarters. Here's everything you need to know about them before joining the fight. 

Naval Cutlass

Class: All

How to Unlock: Capture 20 flags while in a boat and perform 15 kills on swimming enemies. 

Weapon Stats: 

  • Damage: 40
  • Stability: 90

Grappling Hook

Class: All

How to Unlock: Collect all the puzzle pieces for this weapon. 

Weapon Stats: 

  • Damage: 60
  • Stability: 60

Ottoman Flanged Mace

Class: All

How to Unlock: Free gift to all players that own Turning Tides

Weapon Stats: 

  • Damage: 60
  • Stability: 60


And there you have it: All the stats and unlock requirements for the 11 new weapons in Battlefield 1 Turning Tides. From the Farquhar Hill rifle and the Carcano M91 Carbine, these weapons will make sure you're well prepared to take the battlefield in Turning Tides' new Cape Helles and Achi Baba maps. Stay tuned to GameSkinny for more Battlefield 1 guides. 

Fortnite 50v50 Battle Royale Survival Guide Mon, 11 Dec 2017 18:13:17 -0500 Ty Arthur

Multiplayer smash hit Fortnite just keeps churning out the game modes, going from PvE Storm Shield defense to 100 vs 1 Battle Royale mode and now onto a limited-time Fortnite 50 vs 50 epic showdown!

Some of the standard Fortnite Battle Royale survival tactics still apply in this team-based mode where two huge groups scattered across the map duke it out for resources and supremacy.

You still want to smash through walls to find golden chests, stay out of the open until you are in a large group, and so on. Other strategies need to be heavily modified when its no longer you as a lone wolf against the world, however.

For starters, unless you dropped a long distance from the rest of your team, there's far less reason to be a bush in 50 vs 50 than in standard Battle Royale, where learning the way of the bush is of utmost importance. Building structures also becomes more critical as teams work together to fortify a position.

Below we cover everything you need to know to make it through a Fortnite 50 v 50 match and be on the last team standing!

 Let's get started!

Planning and Drop Locations

Since your goal is no longer to outlast 90 or so other cannon-fodder players before getting into the killing, planning a strategy with your group can be the difference between going D.O.A. when you land and quickly building a militia that can steamroll any location.

Keep in mind that during the lobby segment when everyone else is running around pointlessly punching each other, you can talk to your four-man squad via voice chat. You can't talk to all 50 players, but this waiting area is an excellent place to pick a location ahead of time you want to swarm for weapons before the group starts building defenses.

As with normal Battle Royale mode, I'm a fan of Anarchy Acres and Loot Lake, since fewer people drop there immediately so there's a better chance of everyone coming away with a gun and some items.

Loot Lake also has clear line of site to anyone approaching, so until the storm overtakes that area, a four man group here can hold off an army. Any location can work well in this mode however, since your four-man group can work together to watch each other's backs while acquiring gear in the early game.

        Ooooooooooooh, Aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaah!

Teamwork Makes the Dream Work

After your initial small group lands and gets armed, your primary goal is to work toward the rest of your 50 person team. The bigger your group, the more unstoppable you will be during the match. A small group of 5-10 is never going to take out a 20-30 person mob, no matter how well armed they are or what direction they are coming from.

Converging on your larger team is a gamble, however, as you don't see who is on which team until they hit the ground and you come across them on the mini map.

Here, it's time to either go stealthy if you are alone, or work as a team if you have your squad of four grouped together. Be ready to throw up defenses on the fly and revive teammates. It's better to fall back and keep members alive than to rush into a battle you can't win against superior forces.

 Somebody went down? Throw up a wall and then get them back up!

Surviving And Terrain

Get in the habit of quickly switching to build mode and throwing up a wall or staircase segment as soon as you hear gunfire. Player health drops fast, and bandaging takes more time than it's worth while you are actively under fire. 

Rather than running to cover while taking fire, a better strategy is often to put yourself in a small maze of walls and force the enemy to come into the open to assault you.

When you've got a group, always take to the high ground. If none is readily available from buildings or hills, then just simply build your own. Nothing is stopping your team from building a giant staircase into a platform that lets you rain down death at the poor peons who can't reach you. With a single choke point, it's easy to mow down the competition even in large scale battles of 20 vs 20.

 Stairways to sniper nests are difficult to assail and easy to defend

Want to get in on the action? Check out our guide on how to start a 50 vs 50 match right here and jump into the fray through December 17. Don't forget daily challenges apply to 50 vs. 50 mode as well, so keep an eye on ways to rapidly increase your experience during a match.

With any luck, this mode will catch on and Epic will make it permanent! Have any other tips for surviving Fortnite's 50v50 mode? Let us know your best strategy!

How to Play 50v50 in Fortnite Battle Royale Mon, 11 Dec 2017 15:50:49 -0500 Sergey_3847

Fortnite Battle Royale has received a new limited-time event -- a 50v50 co-operative battle mode. You can play the event either in solo mode or with up to three friends. The event will last until December 17, so be sure to try it out as soon as possible. 

There are several special rules applied by Epic Games to this new mode, so before jumping right into it, prepare by reading this short guide on how to play the 50v50 event.

How to Start Playing 50v50

The 50v50 mode is only available in Battle Royale, so go to the BR lobby and select the 50v50 playlist. Wait for the matchmaking to begin, and then wait some more for all the players to join the game.

Once enough players have joined, the Battle Bus will get you flying over the map. You will not be able to see where the enemy players land, just as they will not be able to see where your team lands.

Things to Keep in Mind

Right after you touch the ground, the friendly fire will be automatically disabled, so you can't hit your teammates. However, if a squadmate wears a bush, it will be removed if you hit it.

You can also communicate through voice chat only with your squadmates. All friendly players will have green arrows above their heads, so this is is an easy way to identify them.

Reviving friendly teammates is available as well, so try to get together with as many friendly players as soon as possible. This will make your team far more resistant to enemy attacks.

How to Join as a Friend

At the launch phase of the event, the squad play was disabled due to server overloads. This meant that you could only play in solo mode. However, the issue has been fixed since then, so now you can easily join your buddies for a matchup in 50v50 mode.

All you need to do is go to the Battle Royale lobby and choose 50v50 under the Match Type. If the problem still persists, then try to restart the game. If restarting doesn't help either, then you can try to set the Party Privacy to Private.


Hopefully, this quick guide helped you join the epic 50v50 limited-time mode in Battle Royale. For all the other, latest Fornite info at GameSkinny, check out our guides below:

Hello Neighbor Friendly Mode Changes Mon, 11 Dec 2017 15:48:41 -0500 Ty Arthur

The full version of stealth puzzle game/breaking-and-entering simulator Hello Neighbor finally saw official release after a host of fun alpha releases polishing off the mechanics. 

Even with all that fan input over the last year, some new players have struggled to make it past the neighbor and successfully explore the interior of his mysterious abode.

There was hope for those who couldn't overcome the diabolical neighbor and his nefarious traps, as a patch was just released adding in a new toggle option titled Friendly Mode.

As with most of the game's mechanics, there's no description of what exactly this toggle changes or how Friendly Mode is different from a standard run through. Here's what one member of the development crew had to say about the new option:

Easy Mode ... or Not

If you were having problems constantly getting caught or even just making it into the house, you can toggle this option during an existing game and don't even have to restart.

Sadly, Hello Neighbor's Friendly Mode doesn't actually seem to do what the developers intended at this point! There's been no noticeable change in standard detection or chasing behavior.

In fact, in my run through, he seemed to get more aggressive, jumping through windows to reach me when he didn't normally do that before. He still throws pots or other objects, still chases, still drops bear traps or turns on cameras and lights, etc. In some cases, the neighbor seems to notice you through a wall even if you are sneaking and have closed everything behind you.

More than a few players are baffled by what exactly this option tweaks in the AI, with several Steam threads that can basically be boiled down to "What the hell does Friendly Mode mode even do?!?!?!?" now at the top of the discussions page.

 Now that I've got the basement key, he seems even more hyper-aware of my every move!

Hello Neighbor Friendly Mode AI Modifications

There was one verifiable change I was able to discover, and it seems to be more a bug than a new feature released on purpose.

Apparently, now the neighbor can get stuck doing calisthenics in odd locations where he wouldn't normally engage in that behavior. Yes, you can absolutely use this to your advantage if you've gotten frustrated trying to reach a certain item or room.

In the first act, for instance, I lured the neighbor out into the street and slightly away from the house. For some reason, he chased me down the street past the point in his yard where he doesn't normally run, and then engaged in his typical AI routines like he was in his living room, but never left.

I was able to complete the entire basement segment -- normally extremely challenging with the neighbor chasing you the whole time -- without him ever even returning to the house.

 He's seriously doing jumping jacks out in the street ... and never stops!

It seems like a pretty good bet that this is not the AI behavior change the developers had intended, taking it from "too hard" to "the neighbor literally doesn't even enter the house," so expect a patch changing this up in the near future.

Whenever a new version of Hello Neighbor's Friendly option arrives, or when there's an update from TinyBuild about the odd AI behavior situation, we'll update this article with additional info on the game's new mode.

Have you noticed any other changes with Friendly Mode? Let us know in the comments below!


For those who haven't managed to find all the secrets and reach the basement yet, be sure to check out our full guide to completing Hello Neighbor Act I and learn the ropes on how to break into the house undetected.

Fortnite Guide: How to Fix Waiting in Queue Sat, 09 Dec 2017 13:16:42 -0500 Joshua Broadwell

Epic Games' Fortnite has rapidly become one of the most popular games around thanks to constant updates and releases across PC and consoles, even eclipsing PUBG for some players. With all that popularity, it's reasonable to expect a few technical issues or inconveniences every now and again, and the queue seems to be one of them. It makes no distinction between backers and free-to-play users, causing long wait times and frustration among all. But there are ways around the queue -- and getting into matches faster.

Fortnite Queue Update Troubles

In the past few months, Fortnite has received a few major updates, including the most recent one, The Storm. Shortly after updating the game, players report issues entering matches and tend to get stuck in the queue for up to half an hour or more -- assuming it doesn't time out and start over again.

At the time of this writing, Epic Games is blaming The Storm update for keeping players in the queue for extended periods of time, citing problems with the Fortnite servers after the update. Typically, these queue issues are fixed in a short time after the problem comes to light. These problems don't affect everyone, though. Your best bet in these cases is keeping an eye on Epic Games' Twitter page for updates and just planning on longer wait times in general.

Swamped Fortnite Servers 

However, it's likely that you'll encounter the dreaded queue at some point or another in your time with the game. Why? It's just too popular and grew too fast, so servers are prone to getting overloaded from countless players across the globe seeking to enter a match.

However, there is a way around this particular problem. Fortnite's servers are at their busiest in the late afternoon, between 4 p.m. and 6 p.m., which makes sense, as that's when many people are coming home from work or school. Assuming you have the time in your schedule, you'll probably find shorter or non-existent queue times earlier in the afternoon or later at night--and definitely not during prime times on the weekend, like afternoons or early evenings. Even that will help you fix your waiting in queue problem. 

Try PvE

Another possible solution is trying a PvE game instead. Sure, it's not Battle Royal, but PvE is fun in it's own right. More importantly, some claim that wait times for those matches are shorter, even though it's a shared queue. Others vehemently disagree, though, so it's no guarantee, unfortunately.


As Epic Games comes to grips with its offspring's popularity, presumably the server problem will be ironed out, and wait times will decrease.

How do you avoid long queue times in Fortnite? Let us know in the comments, and be sure to check out our other Fortnite guides!

Hello Neighbor Guide: Act 1 Puzzle Walkthrough Fri, 08 Dec 2017 18:13:00 -0500 Ty Arthur

After hours of flipping switches, breaking windows, hiding in closets, and picking up every object known to man, you're probably more than a little stumped on how to complete Hello Neighbor's Act 1 segment.

If you are having trouble getting into the basement and figuring out how to proceed past all those stubbornly locked doors, we've got you covered with a step-by-step guide to the neighbor's security system.

Note that we're going for the most direct route to solve the main puzzles and not diving into all the various secrets for every achievement. If you want to fully experience the game, be sure to explore the whole house instead of heading straight for the basement!

Hello Neighbor Basic Controls

For those just jumping into the game and getting frustrated by the lack of explanation on the game's controls, there are a few basics to keep in mind. You can have up to four items in your inventory at once, with old items you pick up disappearing and going into previous inventory slots.

After the opening segment, press and hold E to pick up any object that makes the reticle become a larger circle, then hold the right mouse button to aim and release to throw. The longer you hold, the farther and harder it goes. If you only right click without holding, objects won't actually break windows. 

 Knocking over the neighbor with a coffee mug

Objects can also knock over the neighbor, so keep something like the bowling ball or even a cup in your inventory for situations where you can't hide. If you hold down the right click for a stronger throw, he'll be knocked off balance for a few seconds so you can get away.

Hiding under beds or inside cabinets only works if the neighbor didn't specifically see you enter the room, so you need to get ahead of him when he's chasing you. 

Hello Neighbor Act 1 House Exploration

Your goal at the beginning isn't to explore all the rooms in the house, but rather use boxes and get up on the roof where you can access the top floor.

Before heading to the neighbor's house, open the closet beneath the stairs in your house to get four boxes for free. Its easier to grab them here than to get the boxes in the neighbor's yard where he might see you through the window.

 Free boxes!

Because of how wonky the controls are and how easy it is for boxes to slide off the roof, I recommend breaking out the second floor window before you even go up there.

Just grab something like the ball or even the weird eye painting off the wall in your house and chuck it up at the window from near the fence. After that's done, make sure there are at least two boxes in your inventory and climb up the leaning yellow shelves to the left of the front door.

 Break this window!

Head to the top yellow shelf and drop two boxes on top of each other. Jump on the box tower, then turn left and jump onto the brown section of roof nearby.

From there, jump across to the roof/awning section above the porch. If you have trouble getting across, drop another box so you can jump from a higher vantage point.

From there, walk forward and jump across the white lattice to the brown awning in front of the window you broke previously. Inside the bedroom, throw a box (or any object in the room) at the painting of the flower next to the door to open a secret passageway.

 Who needs keys?

In the purple room, grab the gold key sitting next to the door and then unlock it so you can get through easier. To your right, look for a keyring on the wall and grab the red key. This one will let you open the trunk to the red car back down on the lawn.

Go back out the window in the bed room and head down to the car. Unlock the trunk to get the magnet, which lets you steal metal objects from a distance.

 Ain't no junk in this trunk!

With the magnet in hand, grab several boxes and head around to the back of the house near the area with the ladder (blocked by a shoddy fence completed with some boards).

Look for a small open window that's positioned up high enough that you can't quite reach. Set down a few boxes in front so you can jump up and see inside to the work shed area.

 Making your own path

I found it easiest to create a step ladder using a large box as a base and two tiers of small boxes to actually get up high enough.

You can't use the magnet to grab the wrench just yet, but you can pull the silver lock pick off the top left side of the shelves (near all the pots of glue).

After grabbing the pick, go inside the open window on the side of the house (the one with the black wire running inside) and open the door to your left. 

 Knicking the lock pick

In the hallway, you can now use the lock pick to open the door to the left of the staircase. That door leads to the shed where you stole the lock pick.

Now you can physically grab the wrench off the wall instead of using the magnet. Head back outside to the exact same place where you previously made the box tower and stole the lock pick. 

 The wrench is ours!

Use the wrench on the makeshift fence that is blocking access to the ladder right next to the shed window. Climb up the ladder to get to the roof and run across a wood plank until you can look down and see through a hole in the ceiling.

Jump down the hole to enter that room that was previously locked and couldn't be accessed. Now you can pick up the red key on the green table that was seen in the game's opening cinematic.

Head back downstairs to the main floor and you can now use the red key to unlock the basement. Huzzah, the first part of Act 1 is complete!

 Jumping through the roof

Hello Neighbor Act 1 Basement Guide

After running down the stairs, open the old timey washing machine up against the wall to reveal a secret passage into the next area.

Open the door to discover a rather disturbing room where a whole fake world has been created to fool someone (anybody else thinking of the opening segment of Prey?).

Pull one of the paintings of an open window off the wall to exit the fake room stage and access the rest of the basement.

 There's more than just dirty laundry in there!

There's a wall breaker you can turn off, but don't do it just quite yet. Instead, flip the nearby wall switch to open the grating to another room and gain access to very large area to explore. You are looking for a section with a red light bulb and a marionette near another grate.

Flip the switch to open the grate and you will see a large open room with a fence. Behind the fence is a generator and some sparking wires that can't be reached. Near the fence, pull the chair off the door and head into the next room.

To your right on the wall is a section of black bricks which you can break by throwing any object.

 If it seems suspicious, always try breaking it!

Through the broken wall you can now access the sparking lever and the generator, but don't do that yet since you don't want to get electrocuted.

With the wall broken and all the grates opened, go back to the beginning and flip the wall breaker you ignored earlier. This turns off the sparks so the switch can be safely used.

Now you can turn on the generator to power the final exit, which is back on the opposite side of the fence (in the room before the hallway before you broke the brick wall).

Flip the switch on the green lit exit door and get ready to run! After a chase you end up at a door covered in colored locks that you don't have keys for. All appears to be lost... 

 What the heck? I don't have any of those keys!

Although it seems like the end, this frantic chase to nowhere is actually just the beginning! Special thanks to YouTuber Razzbowski for a handful of the screenshots above.

Did you find any other ways to access the areas besides our method? Let us know in the comments below. Stay tuned as we cover the next act of the game where you try to break out of the house instead of sneak in, and things get even more crazy on the story front.

How to Get Red Star Rings in Sonic Forces (Stages 21-30) Fri, 08 Dec 2017 15:55:17 -0500 Sarah Elliman

Sonic Forces is the newest instalment into the Sonic franchise and features many mechanics and style choices that are similar to previous games. Your goal once again is to defeat Doctor Eggman and his forces throughout the levels of the game. Our goal is to help you find as many Red Star Rings in Sonic Forces as possible. If you need the previous stages than you can follow this link for the Red Star Rings for stages 1-10, or if you're looking for stages 11-20 than follow this link.

Stage Twenty-One: Chemical Plant Network Terminal
  • Ring One: You'll want to follow the rail path from the beginning until you get to a set of three rails that you need to grind. At this point, you want to jump quickly to the right and follow that rail. You'll need to grapple across and shoot through some rings. The first Red Star Ring will be on the left-hand side rail, but you'll need to jump quickly back to the right to avoid dying. 
  • Ring Two: This one comes very closely after the first. Slow yourself down on the rail you're now grinding and jump down to the rail below you. Turn right and the second ring will be on that path.
  • Ring Three: To find this Red Star Ring you will have to grind on some rails once again. The rails for this ring are immediately after the second while following the path forward. The ring will be on the far left side at the end of the left rail, but you will need to move back to the right rail after grabbing it.
  • Ring Four: You will eventually come to some enemies after a laser section (this will be after you enter the chemical plant) that you will have to move through. You can smash through the enemies which will bring you down to the next area with rotating platforms. The Red Star Ring is positioned above the rotating platforms in the corner.
  • Ring Five: You should soon hit a checkpoint and need to follow the natural course until you come to more rotating platforms. You'll want to sit on this set of platforms until a plume of water forces you down and you can grab the last ring.

Stage Twenty-Two: Death Egg Death Egg
  • Ring One: When you come to the blue dots leading upwards, wait for them to change to going across the gap between platforms instead of leading upwards.. Follow the path until you get to a set of springs and platforms and go up. Go to the left near the last platform and use the spring to boost you upwards to grab the first Red Star Ring.
  • Ring Two: Follow the natural path and keep heading upwards. You should once again see blue dots making a path upwards. Ensure you Boost up this before it changes to going across. From here you'll need to Boost across the ceiling path and grab the second ring.
  • Ring Three: Then go backward from that point, hitting the checkpoint where you should come to blue dots again. Follow it down when it is curved downwards. You should then hit another platform with another set of dots. Wait for it to curve downwards and follow the path, the third Red Star Ring is just below a floating platform.
  • Ring Four: Go backward and just after the checkpoint you've hit drop down between the platform and you should come to another checkpoint. Follow the path to the right and there will be a section where you must spring off multiple platforms, there will also be some springs that will throw your downwards as well. If you’re able to hit all the springs correctly when you reach the bottom platform, you’ll be able to grab this Red Star Ring.
  • Ring Five: This Red Star Ring you will be able to find after the third checkpoint. Follow the path and you should be taken on a moving platform. Near the end, the platform will drop enabling you to grab the last Red Star Ring. 

Stage Twenty-Three: Metropolis Metropolitan Highway
  • Ring One: As you approach an upwards incline that'll send you upwards to a bumper, drop down instead of continuing onto the upper level. After smashing through some enemies while following the natural path you will need to drop down to the lower levels and head to the left. There should be a chamber full of rings and the first Red Star Ring will be in the top right-hand corner.
  • Ring Two: Continue back to the left where there are springs that will take you back to the upper levels. Before hitting the springs the second ring will be underneath the first spring.
  • Ring Three:  After continuing on the path you will head for a free-fall section. When you start experiencing missiles firing at you from below you’ll need to move yourself in your fall to avoid getting hit. On your way down, you should be able to spot a Red Star Ring, if you go fast enough and avoid the missiles you should be able to grab it.
  • Ring Four: Once you have hit the checkpoint after falling you will encounter various enemies that you have to defeat. Once you have defeated the first set of enemies you should come across some floating in the air. You can use your Homing Attack to bridge the gap and the Red Star Ring should be in the center.
  • Ring Five: Just before hitting the final checkpoint before the end of the stage you’ll need to make your way downwards via moving platforms without getting hurt by the spikes on the side. You should see the ring in between the platforms as you are moving through this section.

Stage Twenty-Four: Metropolis Null Space
  • Ring One: After following the rails, you should get to a circular arena where enemies will ambush you. Once you have defeated them go grab the capsule and use the power to get over to the platform in front of you. This will be where you find the first Red Star Ring.
  • Ring Two: Head slightly right from this point until you hit a platform with a fence on one side. Drop off the side closest to the left and you'll be able to grind some rails again. Following this path, quickly jump to the left rail and you will get pushed into a bumper. This will then lead you to another platform where you can find the second ring.
  • Ring Three: Use the capsule on this platform and use your Homing Attack to bounce off enemies. You should come across three rings in the air, hit the right-hand side one and it'll carry you to the next platform. The third Red Star Ring will be here towards the back of this platform.
  • Ring Four: There will be a ramp next to the previous ring that will send you back on your path. Follow the natural path until you come to another set of rails to grind. This Red Star Ring will be in the middle rail, but you'll need to jump back quickly to the right to avoid falling.
  • Ring Five: You will then need to use your Homing Attack to get yourself onto the tower platform. There will be more enemies floating in the air, if you use the same attack it will lead you to the final ring for this stage.


Stage Twenty-Five: Eggman Empire Fortress Imperial Tower
  • Ring One: Follow the natural path until you are made to move downwards. Continue on the bottom path until you see a structure to climb up. You will then find an area with multiple capsules that will push you upwards. The last one will push you up into a column of rings, which is where you will find the first Red Star Ring. 
  • Ring Two: From there, go back down and climb up the structure to your right. You will then hit a ring that will send you to the left and into a checkpoint, keep following this path. You will soon meet a ledge with a group of enemies on it. Just above them is the second ring. Use the capsules to your left to boost you up to that area.
  • Ring Three: You can then use the higher up capsule to your left to boost you into the next Red Star Ring.
  • Ring Four: After you reach a checkpoint from climbing up the structures, you will see multiple capsules. You can boost off one and use your Homing Attack to continue pushing yourself into the air. You need to keep doing this until you come to some floating rings high up. This is where the fourth ring will be.
  • Ring Five: After following the path to the right you will come across another checkpoint. You'll be able to drop down to a path with a few enemies on it. From here you'll want to keep using your Homing Attack to boost you around the circumference of the tower. Keep heading to the right and you'll eventually come across the last Red Star Ring in this section.

Stage Twenty-Six: Eggman Empire Fortress Canyon
  • Ring One: After launching off a ramp you will see a group of enemies that you should be able to use your Homing Attack on. If you focus this attack on the group of enemies to the right, you’ll be able to pick up the ring that is floating in the air. 
  • Ring Two: After this, you will want to drop down into some red booster rings that will shoot you onto a rail. If you run to the left side of the path you will be able to run off a ramp and shoot upwards into the air. You will then be able to grab another Red Star Ring that will be floating in the air.
  • Ring Three: You will soon run into a bumper that will shoot you upwards and with your Homing Attack you will be able to attack the enemies that are floating above. Do this and work your way towards the right side of the level, you will see an enemy that you can use your Homing Attack on again. The Red Star Ring will be next to this enemy.
  • Ring Four: After this, you will need to drop down and pick up the capsule while running with your Boost ability. There will be a bumper ahead that will launch you upwards where you can use your Homing Attack on enemies who are floating in the air. Continue to do this to reach the Red Star Ring on the left side before moving onwards.
  • Ring Five: After this section, you will then need to launch off a ramp where you can use your homing attack on another set of enemies to grab the last Red Star Ring for this section.
Stage Twenty-Seven: VS Infinite.

This is another boss battle and the final one against Infinite. Consequently, there are no Red Star Rings in this section.

Stage Twenty-Eight: Eggman Empire Fortress Iron Fortress
  • Ring One: Following the natural path you will eventually reach a curved upwards incline that will take you to the next platform. Over to the left-hand side above a missile box is the first Red Star Ring.
  • Ring Two: You will then have to speed down some ramps where you should come to a section with floating cogs with rings on them. If you Boost on the first cog and wait until you are at the apex of your jump then release you will be able to reach the platform. The second ring will be on the top platform.
  • Ring Three: Continue on the path to the right from here. Soon you should come to another spinning cog after jumping over some small gaps. Once again, boost until you're at the apex of your jump and release. This will send you to the top platform where you can grab the third Red Star Ring.
  • Ring Four: Follow the path once again until just after the checkpoint. There will be a platform that will fall, stay on it until you can get to the bottom level. After this make your way to the right, avoiding the obstacles on the way and the fourth ring will be floating just above a platform. 
  • Ring Five: You will then need to keep heading upwards. At some point, you should come to a ramp. Don't go down the ramp, instead boost near the top and fly off to the right. You should hit a platform where you can grab the last Red Star Ring.

Stage Twenty-Nine: Eggman Empire Fortress Final Judgement
  • Ring One: As you are running forward you will need to dodge enemies who are continuing to fire lasers at you. Along the left side of this path the first Red Star Ring will be there for the taking.
  • Ring Two: You will then come across metal grinders that you have to dodge to avoid being hit. If you take the right path you will be able to find the second ring hidden behind the grinder.
  • Ring Three: After this, you will have to dodge around some tight corners. After your pass the corners you’ll need to move swiftly to the right to grab the third Red Star Ring.
  • Ring Four: You will then come to a ramp that will throw you forwards and you’ll have to grapple onto a rail. You need to continue to jump between rails to avoid getting hit by electricity, you will find the fourth Red Star Ring on the middle rail.
  • Ring Five: You want to stay on the middle rail and move upward onto a new platform. There will be more enemies and more rails to grind. On this set of rails, you’ll want to stick to the middle path where you will find the last Red Star Ring.
Stage Thirty: VS Death Egg Robot.

This is the final stage of the game and your last boss battle. There are no more Red Star Rings to collect at this point.


Was this helpful for you? Are you able to find more Red Star Rings now? Let us know in the comments.

The Legend of Zelda: Breath of the Wild Guide -- How to Access The Champions' Ballad DLC Fri, 08 Dec 2017 14:58:01 -0500 Joshua Broadwell

The 2017 Video Game Awards came with some upsets and surprises, but none quite so unexpected as the release of The Legend of Zelda: Breath of the Wild's second DLC pack: The Champions' Ballad. It contains a heap of new content, including a new dungeon and new shrines. But how do you get to it?

How to Access The Champions' Ballad DLC

You don't have to beat the game to unlock the new content. But you do need to free the four Divine Beasts. Once you've done that (assuming you've already bought the DLC and updated the game with it), you'll hear from Zelda. She directs you back to the Shrine of Resurrection, and you must reactivate the pillar where you first received the Sheikah Slate. Doing so opens up several new activities to complete.

The Champions' Ballad Shrines

The heart of the DLC is all about new Shrines and a brand-new weapon. You'll immediately gain access to the One-Hit Obliterator when you start The Champions' Ballad quest at the Shrine of Resurrection. The weapon does exactly what it says, but there's a catch: your health is reduced to one-quarter of a heart for the quest's duration.

The first set of four Shrines is scattered about the Great Plateau. To access them, you'll have to take out different monster mobs at each location first. Once you complete these Shrines (still with just a quarter of a heart), the Obliterator shoots four beams of light out to each Divine Beast. Head to a Beast, take out the enemy mobs, and complete the associated quest tasks, and then you'll be able to fight an Illusory version of that Beast's boss. In the process of completing these quests, you'll uncover the history of each Champion and their quests from the previous century, as well as more of Zelda's story.

New Items

Alongside the main Champions' Ballad quest, you'll get access to several item quests. These are all much shorter in length, but each leads to one of the new pieces of equipment.

  • Zant's Helmet
  • Ravio's Hood
  • Royal Guard's Uniform
  • Phantom Ganon's Armor
  • Lobster Top (from Wind Waker)

There's also a separate quest for the new Ancient Bridle and Saddle horse gear. The Ancient Bridle increases the number of spurs in your horse's stamina meter, while the Ancient Saddle makes it so your horse can hear your call from farther away.

Master Cycle Zero

One of the surprise features included in the new DLC is what some are calling the BotW Motorcycle, officially named the Master Cycle Zero. If you're hoping to get this early on, you're in for a bit of disappointment. It's only awarded to you once you've finished the Champions' Ballad quest itself.



Let us know what you think about the new DLC in the comments, and if you've yet to free the Divine Beasts, check out our other BoTW guides!

PUBG Guide: All Key Miramar Map Locations Fri, 08 Dec 2017 11:21:15 -0500 Sergey_3847

Bluehole Studios finally revealed the look of the next playable map in PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds -- Miramar. This new map is much different from the Erangel map and mostly consists of deserted landscapes instead of the typical forests and fields.

However, there will still be many settlements with a huge number of buildings, many of which are either under construction or abandoned. The map is currently available on the PC test server, so be sure to check it out as soon as possible.

If you're hearing about the Miramar map for the first time and would like to find out all the new details about its main locations, then follow the guide below for all the info you need.

All Key Miramar Map Locations in PUBG

El Pozo and Los Leones

The two biggest cities on the Miramar map are El Pozo and Los Leones. El Pozo is located in the northwestern part of the map. It's a massive industrial district that features a huge textile factory, hunting grounds, and a motorcycling track.

Los Leones can be found in the south-central region, which features many tall buildings, malls, and a massive City Center. This means that Los Leones will be a number one spot for looters and snipers who prefer to take position on the topmost spots.

Valle Del Mar and Del Toro Bridge

In the southwestern part of the map you can see two small islands that are connected to the mainland by the two bridges -- the only way out of the islands.

The Del Toro bridge in the western area connects to a gorgeous place -- Valle del Mar -- which features a school and a church. Players who will gain control of this area will own and control the bridge and the entire island.

San Martin and Monte Nuevo

The central part of the map hosts the town of San Martin -- a desolate location that will not be kind to careless players. The checkpoint at Hacienda del Patron will give you a decent overlook of the area, so use it before venturing in.

Monte Nuevo is located to the west of San Martin, but it looks almost the same, as if the war took place there. However, don't just pass by -- try to pillage the half-destroyed houses for some decent loot.

Chumacera and Pecado

Both locations can be found to the south of San Martin. Chumacera provides you with another great looting place, which is the abandoned textile factory. It will surely attract the most desperate players, but the risk is worth it for all that sweet loot.

And, if you want to try your skills on the arena, then be sure to visit Pecado. There you will have the chance to raid the biggest casino building in the entire map.

Puerto Paraiso and Impala

These are two shoreline settlements located to the southeast of Los Leones. They provide access to another two islands, which are much smaller than the one connected to the Del Toro bridge.

These two islands have no means of connection to the mainland other than traveling by boat, so there is a great possibility of some unusual action in this particular region.

Cruz Del Valle and Campo Militar

The two most eastern locations on the map are represented by several  settlements, such as El Azahar, Tierra Bronca, and Torre Anumada. Not much is known about these locations yet, so keep your eyes open for further information.

The military camp, on the other hand, is a potentially very lootable yet very dangerous location similar to Sosnovka military base in Erangel. 


That is all the info you need to know to be able to start playing in the new Miramar map. If you need any further help with the game, then be sure to check out all the latest PUBG guides here at GameSkinny:

Xenoblade Chronicles 2 Guide: Best Ways to Grind for Rare Blades Fri, 08 Dec 2017 11:14:41 -0500 Autumn Fish

Rare Blades in Xenoblade Chronicles 2 are truly awesome. Not only do they have full Affinity Charts and unique skills, but they also have their own quests and mini story segments. It's well worth seeking all of them out, but to do that, you're going to be dealing with a lot of RNG.

However, there are a few things you can do to make the process of searching for Rare Blades easier. You can start by increasing your Idea Levels and Luck to up the chance of getting Rare Blades in the first place. Then, you simply grind for the cores and open a bunch of them up. Once you've collected all of the Rare Blades, you can then take the time to transfer those that wound up on less-than-ideal Drivers onto the characters you want. (After all, it certainly wouldn't do for the Healer to be stuck with four Tank Blades.)

With these tips, you'll have all of the Rare Blades you could ever want before long. Let's dive in!

How to Raise Idea Levels in Xenoblade Chronicles 2

Idea Levels are split into four equal parts: Bravery, Truth, Compassion, and Justice. These stats are rather simple, though not well explained. On their own, they influence the elements the Blades you resonate with are most likely to receive.

  • Bravery - Influences your chance to receive Fire and Water Blades.
  • Truth - Influences your chance to receive Wind and Ice Blades.
  • Compassion - Influences your chance to receive Earth and Lightning Blades.
  • Justice - Influences your chance to receive Light and Dark Blades.

If any of these stats are higher than others -- or if you use Boosters to temporarily increase the stats -- then you're more likely to receive Blades of the same elements as those tied to the inflated stat. However, Idea Levels have another function.

The higher your total Idea Level is, the more likely you are to receive a Rare Blade. So by using Boosters, you have a slightly higher chance of receiving the Blades you want. If you have the drive, though, you could grind for Idea Points in order to raise your base levels for the best chances of receiving Rare Blades.

Xenoblade Chronicles 2 Rare Blades Guide How to Increase Chances with Idea Points Levels XC2

In order to earn Idea Points, you need to fill out Blade Affinity Charts. Each Blade gives different types of Idea Points, so pay attention to the icons shown on the Affinity Chart to figure out how to raise which stats. The best way to fill out Affinity Charts is to take a bunch of Common Blades and send them all on Merc Missions. When Blades come back from a mission, they earn Trust and have a chance of filling out some of the requirements from the Affinity Chart. Common Blades have easier requirements, letting you earn Idea Points more quickly than if you were to send Rare Blades out on the Missions.

Alternatively, you could just equip a bunch of Common Blades and run around beating stuff up, though who wants to do that when you could just complete side quests or grind for the Core Crystals while you wait for Merc Missions to get done?

Idea Levels aren't the only way to increase your chances of getting a Rare Blade, though.

How to Increase the Luck Stat

Luck also directly impacts your potential to resonate with a Rare Blade. It can be raised in a couple of different ways. Accessories are the easiest way to get a quick boost to your Luck, though they aren't always readily available. You may have to raise your Development Level with a few Titans before they'll start appearing in shops.

Of course, simply leveling up your Drivers will also increase your base Luck, so it might be a good idea to hold off on opening a bunch of Core Crystals until you're higher level. However, if you can't wait, at least check your Drivers' Affinity Charts to see if they don't have anything that increases Luck. If they do, save up their Skill Points until they can afford it.

With a higher chance of success laid out, you're ready to begin grinding for Core Crystals.

Xenoblade Chronicles 2 Rare Blades Guide Luck Accessories and Driver Affinity Chart XC2

How to Grind for Core Crystals in Xenoblade Chronicles 2

Depending on your level and how far you are in the game, there are a couple of different places you can go to farm Core Crystals. The method of farming Core Crystals is more or less the same across the board; the only variable here is which monster you want to farm them from.

So before you even think about which monsters you want to track down and farm for Cores, you need to make sure you're prepared. This means setting your party up so that you have the highest chances of seeing Core Crystal drops. Of course, having a Blade with the skill Treasure Sensor helps immensely, but it isn't strictly necessary.

What if I told you that you could increase your chances of finding Core Crystals by making use of a special combat mechanic? It sounds too good to be true, but it isn't! By completing a full Driver Combo in battle, you're far more likely to see Core Crystals drop. Heck, it even boosts the drop rate of Rare and Legendary Core Crystals, so there's really no excuse not to use Driver Combos while farming for them.

Of course, by full Driver Combo, I mean the whole shebang. You must Break the enemy's guard, Topple them, Launch them into the air, and Smash them back down before the bonus will apply. If you mess up at any point in the combo and fail to finish it before the enemy dies, then you don't get the boost.

After building a party that's capable of pulling off a full Driver Combo, find an enemy that's around your level and test it out a few times to get a feel for it. You wouldn't want to mess this up while farming, after all. Once you feel confident in your ability to see a Driver Combo through to the end, it's time to consider where you'll be farming.

Xenoblade Chronicles 2 Rare Blades Guide How to Grind or Farm for Legendary and Rare Core Crystals XC2


If you've yet to beat the game, you'll find that Tolen Krabbles in Mor Ardain drop a lot of Cores. However, the only way to find them is through Salvaging, so you're going to need a lot of Normal Cylinders. Additionally, you'll need to nuke your Salvaging ability to be sure that you get more monsters than chests. Make certain that any Blades with Salvaging Mastery are disengaged so that they don't skew your chances of finding the enemies you're looking for.

Once you're ready, Skip Travel to Kedeigh Gate in Alba Cavanich and take the elevator down. From there, head out the inspection area and go south towards the Salvage Point called Cargo Transpt. Zone. At the Salvage Point, use a Normal Cylinder and miss all of the button-prompts for the best chance of Tolen Krabbels showing up. When you run into enemies, just complete a full Driver Combo before killing them in order to get the boosted Core Crystal drop rate.

These enemies may die before you can get off a full Driver Combo, though. If that's the case, head back to the Argentum Trade Guild and downgrade your weapons with Core Chips before trying again. The Rare Blades you'll get from all the Cores they'll drop are more than worth the investment.


If you've beaten the game, then chances are you're powerful enough to go after enemies that drop Legendary Core Crystals. While Rare Cores have a higher chance of being Rare Blades than Common Cores, Legendary Cores have an even better chance than that, even if they're still not guaranteed Rare Blades.

Legendary Core Crystals are dropped by Superbosses. A Superboss is essentially an endgame unique enemy with powerful stats and abilities. You'll need to be relatively strong in order to beat them, but if you manage it, you'll be rewarded handsomely.

Xenoblade Chronicles 2 Rare Blades Guide Farming Legendary Core Crystals from Superbosses XC2

If you're able to pull off a full Driver Combo and kill a Superboss, you'll receive a bunch of Legendary Core Crystals. What's better is that you don't need to waste your money on Salvaging Cylinders to fight them, either. Since all unique enemies can be respawned simply by interacting with their tombstone, you can fight a Superboss you're confident at over and over again until you get all the Cores you need.

Once you've maximized your chances and collected enough Cores, it's time to start opening them en masse. However, when opening Core Crystals, you're not likely to get your Rare Blades on the Drivers you want them to resonate with. In that case, you'll need to figure out how to move Rare Blades to the Driver you want them on.

How to Move Rare Blades Between Drivers in Xenoblade Chronicles 2

There are two ways to go about moving Rare Blades between Drivers. The first and simplest way is to use a limited and rare item called an Overdrive Protocol. You earn these by opening up specific Treasure Troves and maxing out your Drivers' Affinity Charts. Once you expend them, however, there's no way to get them back, so think carefully before using one.

In order to use an Overdrive Protocol, just go to the Manage Blades menu, find the Blade you want to move, and select Use Overdrive. Once you confirm which Driver you want the Blade to go to, it'll use an Overdrive Protocol, and the Blade will be immediately usable by the new Driver.

If you're out of Overdrive Protocols, however, you're going to have to transfer Blades in a bit of a more tedious fashion. The only way to transfer Blades at that point is to Release the Rare Blade you want to transfer and open Cores on the Driver you want them on until they pop up again.

Xenoblade Chronicles 2 Rare Blades Guide How to Transfer Blades Without Overdrive Protocols XC2

Since only one version of each Rare Blade can be present at a time in any given save file, it makes finding released Rare Blades again much simpler. I suggest waiting to use this method of transferring Rare Blades until you've found them all. If you have all of the Rare Blades and only Release them one at a time, then the next Rare Blade you open from a Core will always be the one you released.

Alternatively, if you're not as antsy as me, you could release all of the Blades meant for a specific Driver and only open Cores on that character until you've found them all again.


Now that you know how to obtain all of the Rare Blades in the game, do you have any plans for your party? Which Drivers and Blades are you thinking of rolling with? Sound off in the comments below!

For more tips and tricks for getting by in Alrest, be sure to check out our other Xenoblade Chronicles 2 guides. Here are a few to get you started: 

Destiny 2 Guide: How to Get Fossilized Hermaion Blossoms Thu, 07 Dec 2017 18:36:18 -0500 Joshua Broadwell

Despite some criticism for its brevity, Destiny 2's Curse of Osiris expansion provides plenty of reasons for players to come back for more. One of the ways it does this is through the Lost Prophecy quests that grant you access to some of the game's best weapons (and you can check out those quests in our Lost Prophecies Verses guide). But one particular item required for some of these is causing a bit of puzzlement among players: the Fossilized Hermaion Blossom. Never fear! We've put together this handy guide to help get you started item farming.

What Is a Fossilized Hermaion Blossom in Destiny 2?

Fossilized Hermaion Blossoms are one of three items needed for Lost Prophecy offerings, with the other two being Concentrated Radiolarian Culture and the Advanced Paradox Amplifier. These are all used at the Infinite Forge with Brother Vance after completing Osiris' main campaign. Once you have the necessary items required for fulfilling one of the Lost Prophesy Verses and complete the offering, you're rewarded with a special weapon. Special in the sense that its damage level is automatically higher than what you're using at the time.

Great! Now, How Do I Get Hermaion Blossoms?

You can obtain one Hermaion Blossom by playing either Nightfall Skies, Trials of the Nine Matches, or Heroic Strikes. But item drop rewards are random, so there's no guarantee you'll obtain a Fossilized Hermaion Blossom at any given point. If you want to complete all the Verses or obtain specific weapons, you'll be grinding for a while.

You Mentioned Weapons and Hermaion Blossoms?

Fossilized Hermaion Blossoms are required for Verses 5 and 7-10, usually one or two alongside another item. But Verse 10 is one of the more rewarding -- and difficult -- to complete. It requires 3 Fossilized Hermaion Blossoms alone and rewards you with Future Safe 10. Future Safe 10 is a sword and one of the more balanced weapons, whose perks, such as Jagged Edge and Hungry Edge, make it well suited for attacking.

Future Safe 10 Stats:

  • Speed: 46
  • Impact: 62
  • Range: 46
  • Efficiency: 55
  • Defense: 46


Do you plan on hunting down some Fossilized Hermaion Blossoms and adding the Future Safe 10 to your arsenal? Let us know in the comments, and be sure to check out our other Destiny 2 guides! Here are a few to get you started: 

Gift Guide: Most Adorable Gaming Plushies Thu, 07 Dec 2017 15:09:53 -0500 Lauren Harris

Legend of Zelda 8-inch Plush 

Price: Link: $11.19; Zelda: $14.39


Buy it on: ThinkGeek


We all love heroes, so why not have options? Cuddle with Link, the Hero of Time, and join him to save the princess. Or enjoy sweet princess Zelda and sail the seas. The choice is yours, but the best gifts always come better in twos. 




I hope this this guide has given you many ideas for the best gift for whomever enjoys good games, whether they're old classics or new and exciting adventure games. There’s always room for a cuddly plushy to make its way into the hearts of many gamers. Be sure to pick up an adorable plush today. It’s the best companion anyone could have.

Horizon: Zero Dawn Aloy 6-inch Plush

Price: $12.99


Buy it on: ThinkGeek


Bring Aloy home complete with the Nora Brave outfit and her Focus. She is the perfect gift for your desk. Keep Aloy by your side as she owns her new title as the Seeker. Both of you can join the tribe and stick together, even if it’s just through a long hug. 







Final Fantasy VII Cloud Strife Mini Plush

Price: $18.95


Buy it on: Walmart


This 6-inch plush takes you back to the classic Final Fantasy series. You can save Midgar in style with his SOLDIER outfit and trusted Buster Sword. He’s a great accessory to your gaming collection and the best present for Final Fantasy fans everywhere.

Mario 8-inch Plush

Price: $10.39


Buy it on: GameStop


Nintendo's famous mascot Mario is the best gift for the holidays. Let Mario cheer you on when playing your favorite game; he's the best couch buddy around. This Super Mario Bros star will always be the center of attention wherever you take him.

Plush Mega Man

Price: $19.99


Buy it on: Game Over Videogames


Mega Man is the perfect desk buddy. Take him everywhere, or just enjoy his cute snuggles at home. This plushy is 8 inches and can fit in your bag or next to your heart. You and Mega Man can finally defeat Dr. Wily together, because who wouldn't want Mega Man as a new friend?



Pokémon Snorlax Large Plush

Price: $24.99


Buy it on: ThinkGeek


Who's ready for a comfy, long nap? We sure are. With this large Snorlax pillow you can do just that. You'll never want to use the Poké Flute again. So, enjoy your nap with the king of sleeping.

Kirby Large Plush

Price: $31.99


Buy it on: ThinkGeek


This cuddly, stuffed plushy is perfect for a good night’s sleep. Kirby can help you drift into dreamland. This adorable plushy is best on your nice couch or in your video game cave. Kirby also provides hugs and snuggles. Let Kirby’s sweet, soft polyester material help you through your troubles.


Looking for a good gaming plush? These are some of the best gaming plushies out there. There are over a thousand to choose from, but we’ve narrowed it down to just a few of the best ones we think you should consider. Let’s look at some of the best gaming plushies out there. 

Destiny 2: How to Get the Crimson Hand Cannon Thu, 07 Dec 2017 14:59:08 -0500 Ty Arthur

When the campaign is over and the serious raiding begins, Destiny 2 is all about the quest for more powerful gear to increase your overall Light level. Forget character level, because it's the gear that makes the Guardian.

Thankfully, the freshly released Curse Of Osiris expansion has several new additions to the growing list of exotic weapons available to those who are willing to put in the effort to get new engrams.

Besides the devastatingly powerful Prometheus Lens exotic trace rifle (which is causing more than a few problems in PvP), now you can also potentially get your hands on the triple-burst Crimson Hand Cannon exotic -- if you are on a lucky streak!

How to Get the Crimson Hand Cannon

This isn't an answer anyone wants, but sadly it's the truth: there's no surefire way to get the Crimson Hand Cannon. It doesn't drop reliably in any one location, it's not in a locked container like the Lighthouse regional chest, and it isn't ever a reward for a quest. I wish I could tell you to go to location X and kill Y number of Vex to grab it, but I can't.

It's totally up to random chance whether you get the Crimson as you grind for exotic engrams over time. At the moment, just playing more and keeping your fingers crossed is your best hope.

Don't forget, though, that after the impending Destiny 2 December 12th patch, it will be possible to get engrams that decrypt into exotics you haven't acquired yet through Xur. That should make for much less of a grind in the RNG hell that is Destiny 2 at the moment, and it should put more players on an even footing as exotics will be less difficult to acquire.

 Crimson Hand Cannon Lore

Destiny 2 Crimson Hand Cannon Stats

So after all that grinding for exotic engrams (or random luck and getting it immediately, you lucky son of ...), what's all the fuss about with this dinky, little pistol?

Although it doesn't fire a continuous beam of ever more-damaging energy like the Prometheus Lens, and it certainly isn't the biggest gun on the block, the Crimson Hand Cannon is still a beast of a weapon with the following stats and traits:

  • 310 attack
  • High Impact
  • Extremely High Stability 
  • High Range
  • High Reload Speed
  • Low Handling
  • Rounds Per Minute - 386
  • Magazine - 24
  • Smallbore Barrel
  • Accurized Rounds
  • Heavy Grip 
  • Banned Weapon Intrinsic Ability (3-round burst)
  • Cruel Remedy Trait

Most of the traits listed above just increase the stability, impact, and so on, but it's those bottom two that are particularly interesting (and by interesting, I mean "devastating to anything standing in front of you").

According to Vanguard policy, the weapon does not exist and features the "Banned" ability that lets it fire off in a three-round burst with each squeeze of the trigger for massive damage.

Each kill you rack up (and you will rack them up quickly) also heals you thanks to Cruel Remedy, which frankly will seem a little unfair to anyone on the other side of the equation. If you get precision kills, the magazine also refills for free ammo.

 Crimson Hand Cannon Stats

Have you managed to randomly get the Crimson Hand Cannon yet, or are you still grinding away and praying to the RNG gods above? Let us know when you manage to snag one because you officially have our envy!

Ready to tackle the other Curse Of Osiris challenges after nabbing the Crimson? Check out our other guides for this world-expanding DLC:

Destiny 2 Lighthouse Chest Puzzle Guide Thu, 07 Dec 2017 12:15:54 -0500 Ty Arthur

The Curse Of Osiris DLC for Destiny 2 is jam packed with new content for those who devoured the game in its first few months of release, featuring more than a few secrets to unlock if you look hard enough.

One of those curiosities is a region chest locked behind a barrier of light that can't be broken no matter how hard you try. There's a secret to bringing down that impenetrable barrier if you can figure out a puzzle.

Essentially, your Guardian will be throwing a series of switches in the proper order, only in this case, your goal is picking up books instead of actually hitting switches. Hit all five books in the order required, and that luscious loot is all yours!

Unlocking The Destiny 2 Lighthouse Region Chest

This blocked regional chest is found in the area of the Lighthouse where Brother Vance is standing by all of his books on prophecy. The chest is located behind a force field underneath the stone catwalk to the left of the room's entrance.

Book 1 - Compelling Book

To get the puzzle started, interact with the Compelling Book found just to the left of Brother Vance on the stone countertop. It's sitting to the right of a rolled-up scroll and is clearly marked by a glowing symbol of Osiris.

 Book 1 Location

Book 2 - Marked Book

From the first book, turn around and go past Brother Vance. In the direction Brother Vance is facing, keep going forward until you hit the room's wall. This book is on the second shelf on that wall, just above a red and orange device.

If you are instead coming in from the room's main entrance, the second book is found by turning right and going along the wall until you hit this bookshelf between two burning torches.

 Book 2 Location

Book 3 - Aged Book

From the second book, turn around so you are facing the interior of the room and then turn left. Go across the stairs to the other section of the room, and you can find the third book on the lower bookshelf next to a burning torch. If you are instead coming in the room from the outside, it's just to your left (and near the drop-off point to find the force field).

 Book 3 Location

Book 4 - Curious Book

From the third book, turn and go back the way you came across the stairs. Keep going forward until you see the large stone column on your left and the bookcases on your right. Just past that point, turn to face left, and you should see this book sitting on a table.

 Book 4 Location

Book 5 - Significant Book

From the fourth book's position, turn around yet again and go all the way back towards where you found the third book. Keep going until you walk past the forge with the 12-pointed star on the wall. Just past the star are a bunch of candles on the wall. Jump up onto the bookshelf next to those candles to find this fifth and final book up on a higher ledge.

 Book 5 Location

Even though you've hit all the switches, you aren't quite done yet with the process, as you still have to decrypt the firewall by interacting with a conflux (the glowing pillar of light). The conflux is found just a bit beyond the table where the fourth book was sitting.

 Conflux Location

After using the conflux, the field of light should now be gone, and you can claim your reward (special thanks to YouTuber Esoterickk for the screenshots).

Note that the barrier may already be down if someone else in the room completed the puzzle, and you can even help others complete it if they've started but haven't finished the book sequence.

 Opening the Lighthouse chest

Now that you've got your special Lighthouse regional chest, ready to tackle the other Curse Of Osiris challenges? Check out our other Destiny 2 guides:

Knives Out Guide: How to Be the Last Man Standing Thu, 07 Dec 2017 11:59:01 -0500 Stephanie Tang

The Battle Royale genre has exploded in gaming recently, thanks in some part to the popularity of The Hunger Games and the hype surrounding the H1Z1 project, but a lot moreso due to the startling smash hit that is PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds, inspired by the 2000 Japanese Battle Royale book/movie sensation that started it all.

Enter Knives Outone of four separate PUBG mobile clones by Chinese publisher NetEase Games, one of the most financially successful game companies in the world. Knives Out, available on Android and iOS, is the second-biggest hit of the publisher's mass injection of PUBG clones into the market, second only to Rules of Survival.


Both games are interesting in that they currently offer premium game content free to play on mobile devices but currently have no real stage set for serious in-app purchases, which is the only way these games really make their money. (The coin currency and reward system is currently in place only for a few aesthetic items.)

It seems like NetEase is more concerned with the timing of the matter -- flood the marketplace and snatch up the player base first, before worrying about the best way to monetize. Considering that Tencent is working on at least two official mobile versions of PUBG in partnership with PUBG Corporation, this probably isn't a bad idea.

If you're going to play either Rules of Survival or Knives Out, the best time to do it is now!

Here are some things to keep in mind if you're gunning to be the 1% in this battle to outrun, outgun, and outlive.

Remember your platform

You're playing on mobile. Regardless of whether you're on your phone or your iPad, the fact remains that you're playing a skill-based game that relies on aim, concentration, and precision -- a little more than you'd need to play your average game of Candy Crush.

If you're in it for the long haul, make sure you've got the time to put in the effort. There's no stop-and-go on these matches, so your regular morning commute may not be the place to play.

  • Keep an AC outlet or portable phone charger handy, especially if you're on an older device or getting low on battery. A game like Knives Out will guzzle that battery life like nobody's business, and the games can get pretty long.
  • Make sure you have a consistent signal because there is no offline or even partially offline mode for playing this game as there is in, say, FarmVille. If you're on a commute like mine, you'll barrel in and out of spotty data zones that may just be enough to kill you.
  • Restart the game every few matches just to clear up your cache and keep things running as smoothly as you can. Remember, your hardware isn't optimized for gameplay the way your PC or your console is and may take some coddling to get things playing right.
  • Customize your controls. Some things that are highly intuitive when playing on console or keyboard and mouse come a little harder when using virtual controls, mostly because you don't have real buttons to work with. Needing to move, turn, aim, and shoot all at once gets difficult if all you've got are two thumbs.

    This game is pretty good with helping you with controls, giving you the option of a left-hand shoot button as well as a right-hand shoot. You should take a look at the settings anyhow, which give you the option of making the combinations a little easier on you (e.g., the option to move, aim, shoot versus move, aim+shoot automatically).

What you'll need

You'd think that the most important thing in this game is to get a good weapon in your hands and ammo to top it up with. And that's true -- you're not going to make it very far if you go about it unarmed.

But what you're really going to need if you want to make it to the very end are these three things:

  • Helmet
  • Body Armor
  • Backpack

They'll be especially helpful in giving you an edge on your opponents. There's going to be a lot of waiting and a lot of moving around in this game, and there will be plenty of opportunities for your enemies to see you before you see them.

Give yourself enough time

This is especially important when it comes to moving; you can run, jump, crouch-walk, and go prone. As you can imagine, you'll be a lot less visible if you're not sprinting around (made easier by the fact that if you hold run for a while, it will auto-lock sprint for you), but this means that you'll move a lot slower.

  • Don't run in high-traffic areas and/or near a group of buildings. Listen around you first for the sounds of footsteps or the chatter of gunfire, and try to hug the walls and stay crouched while you walk. It's slow moving, so give yourself enough time to move this slowly towards the safe zone. You'll be given a lead time warning right through the center of the screen when that zone will shrink.
  • Use your minimap. Always refer to it so that you have a clear idea of where you are, where everything is (and therefore where others are likely to be), and how you are going to get from Point A to Point B. It will also show you whether or not you are getting close to danger zones.

Know what you want to pick up

I am a pack rat at heart, so games like this are hard on the "But what if I find x-y-z?" part of my anxious soul. I got over it.

After all, the point is that you have to be eminently, viciously practical to get anywhere in this game ... and for a large part of it, doing well is simply staying out of sight while the first half get brutally murdered by getting too close to the action too soon.

But even with a backpack, you are a walking bundle of finite carrying capacity. It's important to pick up what you need.

  • Flashy clothes are probably a bad idea. As evidenced by the turkey hat I'm wearing in the above screenshot, I don't always listen to my own advice. (Take heart in the fact that I swapped it out for a black baseball cap well before the end.) Now, if you choose to swap your clothes out for some funky stuff just lying around, well, it might not hurt your chances of winning all that much if you're good at staying sneaky. Just know you're a more noticeable target if someone spots a waving orange and red coxcomb bobbing about in a window.
  • Don't bother picking up ammo for a gun you don't have. If you're carrying a shotgun, there's no point in picking up 9mm ammo. If you've already got two really good guns, don't bother eyeing any more that you've found (you can only carry two). Prioritize which are more to your taste, but I would suggest that you're going to want to err towards guns that will allow you to spray and pray a little more than precision (this applies more towards handguns than it does sniper rifles, mostly due to the context in how you use the two).
  • Listen! If you're going into a building to look for loot, there's always a chance that there's someone else that wants to do exactly the same thing. Always try and close the door behind you, either to lure other players into a house you've already looted (and sit back and watch) or, if you're inside, to give you a sound indication if someone is coming in after you. Listen for both gunfire and footsteps.


Play it safe and you'll make it through to the very end. Then prepare for the big firefight. Good luck and have fun!

NARUTO X BORUTO NINJA VOLTAGE Guide: Complete Reroll Guide for PC Thu, 07 Dec 2017 10:54:57 -0500 Craig Snyder

NARUTO X BORUTO NINJA VOLTAGE came from Japan to North America recently, and it's already a massive success, with over a million downloads in the Play Store. It's a Naruto game like no other, and it's filled with addicting features like multiplayer and battle rankings.

Like many gacha/banner-centric games of this kind, players are given a set number of free rolls (or pulls) at the start of their journey. Some players start off with basic RNG from these pulls, and others get incredibly lucky and get rare pulls that are going to catapult them to a massive advantage at the start of the game. In this guide, I'm going to teach you how to make use of an Android emulator to reroll as many times as you want so you can get that advantage.

Download the Nox Android Emulator

After being unsuccessful with both Bluestacks and MEmu, I finally gave Nox a try, and after a little tweaking, it worked like a charm. Nox is free and doesn't come bundled with any shady software. You can download it here for Windows. The Mac version is available here.

If you already have Nox installed, you must uninstall it before upgrading to the newest version. Don't upgrade from within the Nox client itself, just uninstall the program entirely, download (or later) from the website, and install it fresh.


By default, the Play Store is set inside of the Google folder on your Android homescreen within Nox. Search for NARUTO X BORUTO NINJA VOLTAGE in the Play Store. The correct one will be the app with at least a million downloads.

Install it, but don't open the game yet. Before you proceed any further, you need to go into Nox's settings (the gear icon in the top-right of the app) and disable the Root functionality.

If you don't do so, you'll see the following screen each time you start the game:

If you got ahead of yourself and did get to this screen before disabling root access in Nox, simply leave the app (as it forces you to) and then complete this necessary step. The game should be fine when you relaunch it.

Open NARUTO X BORUTO NINJA VOLTAGE and Complete the Tutorial

It's important to understand that, for the purpose of this guide, tutorial completion is at the screen where you are able to input your name. Do not go beyond it.

Getting to this screen will require you to do a little bit of fighting and to click through dozens of prompts, but eventually you'll get there.

This is the exact screen that you want to come to a stop at. Do not proceed any further.

Start of the Reroll Cycle

This is the point of the guide that you'll be coming back to over and over depending on how many times you want to reroll.

Open the Multi-Instance Manager in Nox

In Nox, click the Home button. From there, on the right-hand menu bar, go to the Multi-Instance Manager.

Clicking on the boxed-in pencil icon that you see above will allow you to rename your Nox instance to something identifying (as I did, naming mine "Naruto Base"). It's optional, but I recommend it. Your next step is to close this instance, done by clicking the filled-in square icon to the right of the "Launched" text. After, you'll see an icon appear to the right that allows you to back up your instance. Do this.

Backing up will take a few minutes. When complete, you want to copy your instance by clicking the second button in the row of four.

Like backing up, this will take some time. When complete, click the first button in the row of four beside your new instance (the bottom one). This will bring up a new instance of Nox separate from your original.

Click the NARUTO X BORUTO NINJA VOLTAGE app icon on your home screen. Start the game and you'll see that you're immediately taken to the screen just before the input prompt.

You can now proceed through the prompt to input your name and go ahead and do your 14 rolls.

Unhappy with the Pulls?

Being that this reroll process is so incredibly fast, you have the luxury of being very greedy with your rolls. If you dislike your banner pulls, you just want to go Home, open the Multi-Instance Manager again, and delete your copied instance. From there, go back up to the heading above this one, the start of the reroll cycle, and redo it.

For "hardcore rerollers," another strategy is to create several copied instances. I've heard of people going up to six without it harming their CPU/GPU usage levels, but you'll have to make a determination based on how hard you want to work your machine. Create as many instances as you want, and then you can run them all at the same time. When you're done, just delete the instances you no longer want.

When you finally do get the pulls you want, keep that instance. Linking the account being used on that instance to your Facebook will effectively allow you to "save" your data and then log in to it from other devices.


Rerolling your banner pulls for NARUTO X BORUTO NINJA VOLTAGE is incredibly fast, and if you're someone who's going to be playing the game long-term, then I highly recommend getting the best possible start by doing this. Remember, you don't have to play NARUTO X BORUTO NINJA VOLTAGE from your PC if you do this. Accessing the game through Nox just makes the rerolling process extremely quick and simple compared to using a phone or tablet.

Fan of the Naruto game or anime series? Check out the following articles:

Xenoblade Chronicles 2 Guide: How to Find and Use the Beastly Core Crystal Thu, 07 Dec 2017 10:23:26 -0500 Joshua Broadwell

One of the major new features in Xenoblade Chronicles 2 is the inclusion of Blades, artificial life forms that bond with human Drivers and aid them in battle. Each main character has at least one set Blade obtained in the main story, and there are additional Blades players find as they explore the massive world of Alrest. Some of these are necessary to fully explore the world, while others provide a boost in combat and help expand relationships between characters. The Beastly Core Crystal does all of these, and it's easier to find than you might think.

What Is the Beastly Core Crystal?

The Beastly Core Crystal is a type of Rare core crystal. Rare crystals yield Rare Blades, each of which possesses a unique personality, appearance, and ability, whereas common crystals give you standard, run-of-the-mill Blades.

Many Rare crystals are only found randomly, but some of them are obtained through side quests or normal story progression. The Beastly Core Crystal is an example of the latter, so you don't have to go out of your way or trust to luck to find it. The element of chance that makes it rather difficult to acquire many Rare Blades also makes those that are easily obtainable like this one even more welcome and useful, especially early on, when you're still building your team.

How Do I Find It?

In Chapter 3, the party meets Vandham the mercenary in the Kingdom of Uraya. As part of the plot, he takes the party on a mercenary mission, and in the process, Rex and Co. discover a dead Titan and a giant monster, the Elder Arachno. Naturally, the monster has to go.

How to Beat the Elder Arachno

The Elder Arachno is one of the more difficult bosses in the early game. The first order of business is to make sure the party is close to the Elder Arachno's level, around level 22. If you're having trouble leveling your party up, side quests will be the most helpful. Take on some quests that reward you with experience, sleep at an inn, allocate the bonus experience points, and you'll be well on the way to a stronger party a heckuva lot faster than grinding through combat.

During the actual battle, Tora will be the most useful party member, so make sure to keep her alive. Arts inflicting Break are also going to be important over the course of combat. But, in general, if your party members' levels are high enough, and you keep Tora in good shape, you'll take down the Elder Arachno in no time.

What Do I Do With It Now?

You'll automatically be rewarded with the Beastly Core Crystal after the fight. But, you can't do anything with it for the remainder of the chapter. Once Chapter 4 begins, however, you can immediately unlock the crystal's power and bond the Earth-Blade Wulfric with Rex, Nia, or Zeke, his ideal Drivers.

Here's a rundown of what Wulfric has to offer:

Field Skills:

  • Superstrength: Used to lift or break things
  • Earth Mastery: An Earth Blade's power
  • Focus: Ablility to control one's power

Battle Skills:

  • Power Unleashed: When Affinity is maxed, increases damage by 60%
  • Critical Strike: Increases critical damage by 10%

Blade Arts

  • Critical Up: Increases critical hit rate
  • Arts Plus: Increases power of next Driver Art used


  • Brutal Lance: Erratic spin attack
  • Termination Blast: Fires absorbed energy in a single blast
  • Hellhound: A powerful fly-and-drop attack
  • Apocalypse: Jabs an enemy multiple times before firing a laser blast.


Are you planning on making Wulfric part of your team? Let us know in the comments, and be sure to check out our other Xenoblade Chronicles 2 guides!

Destiny 2 Curse Of Osiris Lost Prophecy Verses Guide Wed, 06 Dec 2017 16:03:40 -0500 Ty Arthur

The unbearable months-long wait is over as Destiny 2 finally gets a major expansion with new content in Curse Of Osiris, which means it's time to jump back into the game!

Players can now find devastating new exotics like the Prometheus Lens tracer rifle and get an overdue bump on the character and light level caps.

Of course there's also new side missions that result in unique Legendary gear. These new weapons are only available after you grind some specific offering components to complete a set of verses in the Lost Prophecies.

Starting Destiny 2 Lost Prophecies

After completing the main Curse Of Osiris campaign, talk to Brother Vance at the Lighthouse to get started on completing the Lost Prophecies (some players have reported Vance won't actually give them the Lost Prophecy info until after completing a Heroic Adventure first).

Look through his inventory of verses in the Lost Prophecies and pick one you want to finish (these don't all have to be done in order from 1 to 11). Once the verse is in your inventory, take a look at it to see the specific requirements for the quest.

To finish off a verse and get your new Legendary weapon, you have to get specific offerings and use them in your inventory to create a Prophecy Tablet. Each offering item is usable and will be consumed when you activate it.

Once that's done, take the Tablet back to Brother Vance and choose the option to transmute it. With that transmuted Tablet in hand, head over to the forge (the device connected to the 11 pointed star on the wall in the Lighthouse).

Interact with the forge to get your weapon reward, and then look at the star to see which verses you've completed and which are still incomplete.


 Finding a verse's offering requirements

Lost Prophecy Verse Offering Requirements

Offerings to complete any given Lost Prophecy verse are acquired in different ways, like engaging in Strikes, Public Events, and Adventures, and most can be found on Mercury. To see the specifics for each verse, choose the Details option while hovering over the verse in your inventory.

The Details screen tells you specifics like "acquired from public event chests" or "acquired from Heroic Adventures on Mercury" and so on. Essentially, you are looking for random drops at places you'd already be going. 

Below we list out every weapon and verse combo discovered so far, along with what offerings you need to use in your inventory to get the Tablet. Have you completed any of the verses we didn't get to yet? Let us know in the comments, and we'll get this list updated!

Prophecy Weapon Offerings
 Verse 1  Garden Progeny 1 (Scout Rifle) Concentrated Radiolarian Culture
 Verse 2  The Conqueror 2 (SMG) Concentrated Radiolarian Culture x2
Advanced Paradox Amplifier
 Verse 3  Jack, Queen King 3 (Hand Cannon Concentrated Radiolarian Culture
Advanced Paradox Amplifier x2
 Verse 4  Machine Dei 4 (Pulse Rifle) Concentrated Radiolarian Culture x3
 Verse 5  Traveler's Judgment 5 (Sidearm) Advanced Paradox Amplifier x3
Fossilized Hermaion Blossom
 Verse 6  Sol Pariah 6 (SMG) Concentrated Radiolarian Culture x2
Advanced Paradox Amplifier x2
 Verse 7  West of Sunfall 7 (Hand Cannon) Advanced Paradox Amplifier
Fossilized Hermaion Blossom x2
 Verse 8  Infinite Paths 8 (Pulse Rifle) Advanced Paradox Amplifier x2
Fossilized Hermaion Blossom x2
 Verse 9  Null Calamity 9 (Auto Rifle) Concentrated Radiolarian Culture x2
Advanced Paradox Amplifier x2
Hermaion Blossom x2
 Verse 10  Future Safe 10 (Sword) Fossilized Hermaion Blossom x3
 Verse 11  Perfect Paradox Legends Lost quest


Good luck finding all the offerings and grabbing every weapon! Special thanks go out to YouTuber Rikudou for the Lost Prophecy screenshots.

Now that you're on the quest to finish all the verses, you might be looking for help on the rest of the game and its expansion. From raids to exotic weapon lists and even vendor locations, our full list of Destiny 2 walkthroughs can be found right here. Here are a few guides to get you started: 

Destiny 2 Guide: Prometheus Lens Exotic Trace Rifle Wed, 06 Dec 2017 13:07:03 -0500 Ty Arthur

The first major game expansion, Curse Of Osiris, has officially landed for Destiny 2, bringing in the ability to finally explore Mercury along with a host of gameplay tweaks long sought by the fan base.

In addition to an increase in the weirdly low-starting Destiny 2 level cap come new areas, new enemies, and more importantly: new exotic gear to distinguish your character!

Remember the Coldheart pre-order bonus tracer rifle from way back at launch? Now there's finally another major exotic in that category, and it's absolutely killer.

If you're lucky, you may just land the Prometheus Lens exotic trace rifle, which is currently outclassing all other weapons due to its odd firing mechanism. With its high base level requirement, you actually have a reason to work towards the new level cap as well!

Destiny 2 Prometheus Lens Stats

If the roll of the dice in the exotic RNG hell lands in your favor and you unlock this rare trace rifle, here are the base stats for the devastatingly powerful Prometheus Lens:

  • 320 attack
  • Requires Level 22
  • Extremely High Range
  • Extremely Low Impact
  • High Stability
  • Low Handling
  • Rounds Per Minute – 1,000
  • Magazine – 77
  • Prismatic Inferno Ability
  • Kills with this weapon return a fraction of the ammo used to the magazine

You might have noticed something rather odd in the stats on the Round Per Minute category. One major difference from your average rifle is that the Prometheus Lens fires a continuous beam in whatever direction you are facing instead of launching individual bullets, giving it a jaw-dropping 1,000 rating.

Obviously the Prometheus Lens exotic rifle chews through ammo extremely quickly since it fires a steady beam, but here's the kicker -- getting kills actually refills the ammo. That's already an awesome little perk, but it gets even better.

The Prismatic Inferno ability kicks this thing into overdrive, upping the damage the longer the Prometheus beam is fired. What this means is if you are aiming well and have a target-rich environment, you will be firing a long time, and everything will be dead.

The rifle excels against large numbers of weak opponents, but because of its long range, it can pretty much devastate anything if you manage to hit it for more than a second or two.

 Prometheus Lens Stats

While those abilities and high damage are great for the average mission, it also means the Prometheus Lens tracer rifle is absolutely dominating in Destiny 2 PvP right now, perhaps to an unfair degree.

Reddit and various Destiny forums are absolutely ablaze on how unbalancing the weapon can be against other players with a ludicrously low kill time. You can expect a patch in the future to nerf the weapon as the angry hordes rise up against Bungie's lack of foresight on this exotic.

Of course, whether you actually manage to get the Prometheus Lens or not is currently up to the fickle hand of fate, as it's totally random (although the odds obviously increase as you get more exotic engrams).

With changes coming later this month to balance out the chances of getting high-end equipment, it seems a good bet Xur will eventually sell this amazing tracer rifle.

 "Get me one, I don't care how you do it" about sums it up.

Special thanks to YouTuber CyberChaos for the screenshots above. Have you managed to get your hands on the Prometheus Lens exotic trace rifle yet, and has it become your go-to weapon of choice? Let us know in the comments!

Still need help with the rest of this ever-expanding sci-fi shooter? Be sure to check out even more Destiny 2 guides right here, and stay tuned as we cover every aspect of the Curse Of Osiris DLC that you need to know about. Here are some guides to get you started: 

Rules of Survival Guide: How to Troubleshoot Bad Game Performance Wed, 06 Dec 2017 10:36:49 -0500 Stephanie Tang

If you're a fan of the Battle Royale genre ... well, millions of players are right there with you. Popularized by the smash hit that is PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds, the ripple effect throughout the FPS genre has been enormous.

Poised to cash in on this Guinness World Record-breaking game phenomenon is Chinese publisher NetEase Games with an impressive four mobile PUBG copycats, all free to play and (at least for right now) all void of game-altering in-app purchases.

It looks like the premise that all players must start on completely common ground has thrown a bit of a wrench in the traditional mobile market because NetEase seems a lot more interested in building a player base now and worrying about really getting down to making money later.

If you want to bring the fun of PUBG away from the PC, mobile is definitely a pretty fun and easy way to go, especially right now. As on PC, however, you will find yourself facing inequalities in hardware performance between you and other players.

You can't always help the phone you're playing on, and if that's your bottleneck, upgrading is a pretty expensive, and extensive, way to fix your problem. Before you run out and drop big money on a new iPad, check out some of these common, can't hurt to try, fixes for poor game performance.

  •  Restart the game app. This is particularly important if you've already been playing it for a while, and it's probably one of the easiest fixes. Doing so clears up your cache and should help your graphics run a little smoother after every few games.
  • Quit out of all your other apps. Contrary to popular belief, it won't actually help your battery life much to close out your apps if you're running low on juice, but it is supposed to help a little with the RAM situation.
  • Turn down the graphics quality. In a perfect world, it'd be nice to play the game looking its very possible best. If you're not playing on a top-of-the-line device though, you're going to run into some hard limits (usually in the form of bad lagging), and sometimes you'll have to sacrifice the game looking pretty to it running well. Do this by accessing the settings (bottom-right corner, it's small) and checking off Power Saving as outlined below. By default, you are set to Balance.

  • Update the game. This will come up particularly if you've had it open/suspended for a while or even if you're experiencing some unexpected game downtime. Updates roll out fairly often, so you could be running behind on game version, and/or the servers might be down for maintenance. Even if you have your phone set to automatically update apps, check it out on the Apple App store or on Google Play accordingly. You never know when permissions might change and you're going to need to manually update.

It's important to note that sometimes it isn't the hardware that's the problem behind poor gaming experience. As a once chronic sufferer of spotty data connection, I'm well aware of how often slight connection drops look like bad game performance. So make sure it's not!

  • If possible, play on a strong WiFi connection. This is the best case situation that you can work with, of course, which means that you can't always do it. But it can be a really easy way to determine whether or not your connection is causing you more trouble than it's worth when you're on the road. I've tried to play games on 3G. You can do it. Barely. But when a few seconds of downtime and lag is all it takes . . .

If you're already working with the best connection that you're going to get, there are still a few things you can do that can help make your game a little more manageable to play.

  • Check that you're on the right server. It's probably unlikely that you're on the wrong server ... first of all because there really aren't that many in this game, and also because the game tends to default you to the right one (that is, in the region closest to you). It's also just good practice to check, because the game will let you know whether or not the server is full or busy as well, and that can have an effect on gameplay (this will affect all players on the server pretty equally, which won't be as bad, but it still won't be pleasant).

As your absolute last resort, if your connection is really kicking the crap out of your gameplay, you can choose to turn off voice chat in your settings.

If you're running into other problems not covered above (I, for example, couldn't even access the game for a few days because of constant crashing out on load screen), you can try to contact the developer through the store page. Who knows, your feedback might help them fix the game.

(I've also seen a fair amount of responses from people leaving poor star reviews on the game, but these tend to be canned responses that don't actually address helping you in any way.)

Hope this gives you a few ideas on improving game performance! If you're looking for tips on actual gameplay, check out these articles for tips on how to play to win and where to land to get some good guns.

Battlefront 2 Guide: How to Fix Missing Last Jedi Challenges Glitch Tue, 05 Dec 2017 18:43:03 -0500 Jonathan Moore

Battlefront 2's latest update brought a lot of changes to the game regarding progression and the acquisition of credits, effectively lowering the amount of time players had to invest in the game. And today, fresh on the heels of that 1.04 update, EA released part of the game's first season update -- content centering around Episode VIII: The Last Jedi

Choosing your side, the Last Jedi Challenges see you fight with your compatriots in either the Resistance (supporting Finn) or the First Order (supporting Captain Phasma). Season One will have weekly and seasonal challenges to complete, all of which reward you with credits, crafting parts, experience, and few other goodies along the way.

Currently, the Season One Last Jedi Challenges are:

  • The Resistance -- Blast Them All (Defeat 50 enemies as each Trooper class) and Blast It! (Play 5 rounds of the Blast match type). 

  • The First Order -- Eradicate the Scum (Defeat 50 enemies with each Trooper class).  

Upon winning the final battle, players on the winning faction will win an Epic Booster Crate with, presumably, high-level Star Cards and more. Players who are part of the losing faction will also receive rewards, but the value of those rewards will be lower than those on the winning side.

But if you've already booted up the game during this first season, you may have noticed that your first Last Jedi Challenges might not be showing up in the game's Career Menu. 

How to Get Past The Last Jedi Challenges Glitch

You can take the fight to the enemy and win for your faction if you don't know what challenges you have to complete to do so -- or find that your timed challenges read 0:00 in the time slot. 

However, it's an easy fix: simply restart Battlefront 2, go back into the Career Menu, select Last Jedi challenges, and each of the two available challenges should appear -- with the correct time remaining, too!  

That's all there is to it! If you're looking for other tips, tricks, and strategies for BF2, make sure to check out our other Battlefront 2 guides! Here are a few to get you started: 

Header image: DylanRocket

Black Mirror (2017) Walkthrough: Chapter 2 Tue, 05 Dec 2017 17:39:28 -0500 QuintLyn

Welcome to the second chapter of the Black Mirror walkthrough. This guide picks up where Chapter 1 left off and has been organized in order from least spoilery to "Oh my god, why did you tell me that?". We try not to tell you every bit of story in the detailed walkthrough below, but keep in mind that venturing into that area does put you at risk. Consequently, we'll look at drawing piece locations first, then puzzle hints, and finally the walkthrough... 

As with the previous Black Mirror chapter, explore everything you can. Failing to do so can keep you from progressing in the chapter. You may want to even go back and check to make sure you have the drawing pieces mentioned in the previous chapter's walkthrough. Why? Because when going through this section of the game, it seemed some pieces that had already been located were back in their spots.

But now that we're ready, let's jump in. 

Drawing Piece Locations -- Black Mirror, Chapter 2

Set 6

You can find this drawing piece set in the dining room in the windows at the end of the room, next to a plant. 

Set 7

You can find this drawing piece set in the trophy room on a table to the left of the fire. You'll be able to pick it up when you examine the fireplace.

Set 8

This drawing piece set can be found the garden, just outside the dining room doors. Head right toward the car and you'll come across it on the ground.

Set 9

This drawing piece set can be found in the graveyard. After cleaning your aunt's grave, walk up past the tree. The pieces will be on the ground in between two graves.

Spoiler Free Puzzle Hints for Black Mirror, Chapter 2

There aren't really any puzzles to solve in this chapter. Just make sure you explore everywhere and click on anything that gives you the option to. Missing one item can halt the story's progress until you get it. 

Detailed Walkthrough -- Black Mirror, Chapter 2


When Chapter 2 beings, it's morning and you wake up in your bedroom. The maid,  Ailsa Crannan, is there. Talk to her and she'll give you a bit more information about your father's relationship to the house -- although not a lot. She also informs you that Andrew would like to see you in the library after breakfast.

When she leaves, you go into the bathroom and there's a short quick-time event during which you'll need to keep your pointer in the center of a circle while holding down the button. This will "calm" you down. Then just click on each of the dialog prompts before going back to the bedroom. Your quest log and diary have been updated. You'll also notice that several items have been removed from your inventory. 

Dining Room

There's nothing to do in your room for now, so just head out and you'll get a cutscene with Angus and Ailsa in the dining room. After Angus finishes giving Elsa orders, he asks you to sit down to breakfast. Eat everything and then click on the napkin to finish breakfast. 

Once you're done, you can explore the dining room a bit more. Inspect the doors to the garden and you'll be reminded that you should earn Ailsa's trust before doing anything else. Before going to look for her, explore the rest of the room. At the far end of the room is a set of windows. In one of their sills, you'll find another set of drawing pieces. 

There's nothing else to do in here right now, so head to the opposite end of the room and go through the door into the trophy room.

Trophy Room

Here, you'll see Lady Margaret smoking a pipe. Before sitting down to talk to her, explore the room. You'll find a few things of interest. Examine the fireplace and you'll find a silver earring. Pick it up and then look to the table on the left. There, you can pick up the next set of drawing pieces.

Once you have those, go talk to Lady Margaret before exiting the room via the doors up the short flight of stairs. You'll find yourself back in the foyer. Look around before heading to the library to look for Andrew.


Andrew's not there, but he did leave you a note. There's also a paper on another table labled "Mallory". Since there's nothing else to do here, go to the kitchen to talk to Ailsa.


You'll find Ailsa cleaning out the dumbwaiter. Talk to her and you'll find out she's scared of all kinds of things. You'll also have the opportunity to give her back the earring you found. Go through all the dialog options and you'll be able to offer your help with the cellar spiders.

Once you're done talking to Ailsa, you can either head to another room in the house or head to the cellar door and prompt her to follow you. Since you're already here, you might as well go that way.


Follow Ailsa to the dumbwaiter in the cellar. There, you'll see the spider webs she's talking about. Inspect them, and you'll decide to look for something that will help with their removal. Pick up the candle to the right of the dumbwaiter and begin looking around.

If you follow the path down to the wall, you'll find a shelf with a small bottle "raw spirit" -- or really potent, cheap liquor -- on it that you can take. Do a quick circuit around the cellar before returning to Ailsa and you'll learn a bit more about the family. Once you're back at the dumbwaiter, select the "burn" option and watch the magic...

Until your cousin, Edward "Eddy" Molarie, shows up. Talk to him a bit and once you're done you'll be popped into a cutscene with Ailsa in the kitchen. She has something to tell you. But apparently, it's going to have to wait a bit longer. 

Once you're done in the kitchen, head back out into the foyer and check the phone to the right of the steps. You'll discover it's working. Enter the door next to you and go straight across the hallway into the sitting room.

Sitting Room

There's no one to talk to in here, which gives you a bit of an opportunity to poke around without being seen. Go across the room to the green chair by the window and you'll have a few things you can interact with: a Victrola with a collection of recordings.

At the other end of the room, on the fireplace mantle, you'll find a photo. Take it, and look it over. Inspect the back and you'll have a short vision with another quick-time action. Just click the mouse button until the circle is complete.

Leave the sitting room and head down the hall to pass through the dining room on the way to the trophy room where you'll talk to Lady Margaret again.

Trophy Room -- Photo Questions

All you have to talk to Margaret about here is the photo you just found. She gives you a few answers but it's apparent she's being shifty about it. Inspect the fireplace again and look to the right at the table next to Lady Margaret. Examine the picture there and then head back to the dining room and click on the doors leading to the garden. You can finally go outside.


Take the first path to the right, toward the car and you'll come across some more drawing pieces on the ground. Grab those and turn left toward the greenhouse where you'll run into the gardener trying to fix a door. Talk to him for a bit then follow the path up to the family graveyard.

To the right of the path, you'll see headstones covered by brambles. There are only a few you can inspect, but make sure you go far enough to the right to spot the one shaped tile a spire top and give it a look. Try to remove the plants and you'll discover you need something to cut through them with. Head back to the gardener and ask to borrow some of his tools. Take the bolt cutters and head back to the graves.

Clean off the spire grave and then dig around a bit to find another piece to the castle model.

While still near the graves, go up past the tree and stand in between two headstones. You'll find another set of drawing pieces there. From there you can head to the mausoleum. But before you do, head back to the gardener for a minute and ask him about your aunt. Then return to the mausoleum. Open the doors and go in.


Once inside, go forward and turn left, walking across the boards to the scrolls on pedestals. Read them in the order prompted and you'll hear a noise. Walk back across the boards to the right, until you see a bubble floating in the air. Touch it and you'll be underwater. Go back to the door you came in and touch the plant next to it. Then walk back to the center of the room and touch the ghostly fish.

You'll see a ghostly woman with an urn falling from above. Move closer and investigate her. Just don't stand too close for too long. Before stepping to the left and climbing the scaffolding there. You'll get another chance to examine the woman mid-fall.

Walk up to the wall and climb it as well. Walk to the right to stand next to ghost Edward and examine him. Again. Don't stand too close. Both of these ghosts are deadly. Do this successfully and you'll get another cutscene where you end being saved by your father's old psychiatrist, Dr. Leah Faber. 

After she introduces herself the scene will cut and you'll find yourself back in the kitchen talking to her. During the talk, you hear a scream from the cellar and rush down to find Eddy and the body of the maid, Ailsa.

Thus ends Chapter 2 and begins Chapter 3.

Be sure to check out our other Black Mirror guides and walkthroughs here.  

How to Prepare Yourself for Monster Hunter: World if You're a Newcomer Tue, 05 Dec 2017 16:56:20 -0500 StraightEdge434


Experience the Hunt for Yourself


There's a reason why the quote "Experience is the best teacher" carries so much value and meaning. The only way for you to really prepare for Monster Hunter: World is to expose yourself to the franchise, and play any of the older games to experience hunting ferocious beasts firsthand. 


If you happen to have older consoles like a PSP, 3DS, or WiiU, pick any of the Monster Hunter games and give them a try. If you don't have any, watch gameplay videos on YouTube to better understand the game concepts and mechanics. Watch weapon tutorials, explanations on various things, the hunts, and so much more to enrich your understanding of this franchise. 


Also, a playable demo is coming out on December 9, exclusively on the PS4. So if you are a proud owner of the Sony console, be sure to try out the demo to not only experience Monster Hunter itself, but the game that you'll most likely be playing in January. 




If you are a veteran player, what other advice and tips would you give to newcomers? Be sure to share your advice and stories down in the comment section. 


Prepare to Grind


Veteran players will know what I'm talking about when I say things like, "rubies," "mantles," and "plates." There is an urban legend in Monster Hunter that states that the game knows when you are trying to obtain very rare materials and will do everything it can to make sure you don't get those materials. Of course, that is all false simply because the aspect of RNG is present. 


From mid to late game, you *will* come across weapons and armor that you'll either have to craft or upgrade in order to obtain, and that they will require extremely rare monster parts. The drop rate of those items is about 1-2%, so... get ready and prepare to fight the same monster over and over again.


Those rare items can come in various forms such as carves, shiny drops, or as rewards at the end of the quest. It's very important that you don't feel discouraged if you aren't able to get the monster part at first. Keep going because eventually, you are guaranteed to obtain it one way or another! Not giving up and keeping your head up high is important, because the last thing you want to do is give up and have all that time go to complete waste.  


Be Mindful of Time


One thing that really makes Monster Hunter unique is that the game incorporates a timer in all of its quests. The traditional time for you to complete a quest has always been 50 minutes, with some being 35 minutes (real life time).


According to Monster Hunter lore, being a monster hunter is a competitive career, and the Guild (which is basically the quest giver) tests its hunters to see if they are the right fit for the job. This also explains why quests become more and more difficult while the time limit remains the same.


Now, that doesn't mean that you should panic right away and say to yourself, "I'll never complete tougher quests if I'm rushing against the clock..." If you come prepared, know what you're doing, and have the experience (which you eventually will from playing the game), you'll definitely be able to complete those quests. 


Besides, as you get closer and closer to the time limit, the feeling of adrenaline takes over your body as you try to deliver the final blow, and then brag to your friends how you took down a very tough monster all by yourself! Nothing can beat that feeling. 


Eat Before the Hunt


Before you depart on a quest, remember to always eat a meal. Depending on which ingredients you select, you will receive permanent buffs to your character (until you faint from an attack), as well as unlock special abilities that will aid you during the hunt. For example, by selecting meat with vegetables, you'll receive a small health and attack boost, but if you select fish with vegetables, you'll get a large stamina boost. With numerous ingredients to choose from, the combinations are limitless!


Depending on the quest, certain meal combos will be better than others. If you're embarking on a gathering quest, you'll probably want to go for a meal that gives you extra stamina or anything else in relation. But if it's a hunting quest, it's better to go for a meal that gives you an attack and defense buff.


A new addition to the game is the ability to eat at the start of the quest, at the campsite. If you forgot to eat back at the town, you won't have to worry since you can do just that at the start! You can also change your weapons and gear at the campsite too, something you couldn't do in previous titles.


Monsters and Their Parts


In Monster Hunter, it's possible to break a monster's body parts. If you keep attacking a certain body part for a period of time, you are going to either sever or break it, which in return, will give you various advantages later on.


For instance, the majority of the wyverns in Monster Hunter flail their tails trying to hit you. If you manage to slice the tail off, you will gain an advantage since the range of the tail's attack will be greatly reduced. Plus, you will also be able to carve the tail for an additional/bonus reward. 


Breaking a body part also increases your chances of getting a reward associated with that part. If you are in need of a horn in order to craft a weapon that pertains to that monster, be sure to break the actual horn during the hunt. If you are unable to, there is a chance that you'll still get the part as a reward, but it will not be as high as the probability of you getting it if you break it. 


Some traditional body parts that are breakable are: tails, horns, faces, claws/talons on the front legs, any sort of spikes, and wings. Keep that in mind during your hunts if you wish to either make the hunt a bit easier for yourself, or if you need a specific body part for a weapon or armor upgrade. 




Monster Hunter offers many ways for you to take down beasts of various sizes. Fourteen different weapons exist, each catering to almost any particular playstyle, whether you are a defensive player, a player who likes to support team members, or even a player who wants to get in as many hits as possible and defeat the adversary in a timely fashion. Here are some examples of the weapons and which playstyles they mostly cater to:

Defensive/Tanky Playstyle

Your ideal weapons choice could be the Lance, Charge Blade, Gunlance, and even the Greatsword. All four have defensive capabilities with the first three choices having enormous shields to withstand attacks, and the Greatsword being an enormous blade that can also be used as a shield. Playing cautiously is sometimes a good thing, and if you're that type of player, you are certain to find a fitting weapon.

Action Playstyle

If you live and breath action and like to stay on top of the enemy like white on rice, your ideal weapons could be the Longsword, Dual Blades, or Hammer. Those weapons sacrifice defense for offense, and pay off with their power and DPS.


For instance, the Dual Blades are the fastest hitting weapons in the franchise, but are small in size, meaning you must stay close to the monster to hit it. The same can be said of the Hammer: though powerful, it has a small reach due to its size (PRO TIP: If you decide to ever pick up the Hammer, *always* attack the monster's head. You'll be dealing KO damage all the time, meaning that you'll be able to knock out the monster, immobilizing it, thus giving you and your teammates free hits without any sort of retaliation!)

Healer/Support Playstyle

Nothing screams "support" like the Hunting Horn. Depending on which Hunting Horn you use, you can play various melodies that will give you and your allies boosts like attack up, defense up, earplugs (protects from monster roars), heal, and many more buffs. Adding to all that, the Hunting Horn itself is also a blunt weapon, which means that it can also deal KO damage like the Hammer! So, not only are you buffing your allies, but you are also contributing to the hunt by fighting the monster.


Ultimately, whichever weapon you decide to use is primarily up to you. With 14 different weapons to choose from, you are guaranteed to find your ideal choice and stick with it. Test out all of the weapons, and whichever ones you find most comfortable, use them and see how well you do! But don't just stick with one weapon since some monsters will probably require you to switch your playstyle.


If you wish to know a bit more about every weapon in detail, check out this guide


Set for an international release on January 26, 2018, Monster Hunter: World promises to deliver the best possible hunting experience to date with its hunts, graphics, revamped mechanics, and other new additions.


Coming out for the PS4 and Xbox One -- as well as PC at some point -- the franchise has shifted from Nintendo consoles (particularly the WiiU and the 3DS), meaning that the game (as well as the possibility of future titles) will run on more powerful systems, as well as attract a wider variety of audiences since it will be accessible to more people. 


When the game was revealed during Sony's 2017 E3 conference, a lot of people were intrigued, particularly those who never played a Monster Hunter title before. Whether they never heard of the franchise or did not have a console to play the games on, the announcement sparked curiosity, intrigue, and excitement.


Monster Hunter isn't a complex game: kill or capture monsters, get their carves and items, use the carves to craft weapons and armor, and repeat all the way until the end of the game. However, there are more things to this game than you might imagine. As an experienced veteran player who played every single western Monster Hunter title, as well as a few Eastern ones, this guide offers insight that also hopes to inform and educate newcomers about the franchise, and what they need to know and prepare for when the Monster Hunter: World hits shelves in January of next year. 

How to Play Survivor Royale on PC Tue, 05 Dec 2017 15:38:43 -0500 Ty Arthur

Filling up the mobile Battle Royale market with multiple iterations in different territories, Survivor Royale is NetEase's major new U.S. contender, bringing the very-familiar PUBG and Fortnite formula on your tablet.

Not everyone is crazy about the tablet user interface, however, so for those who prefer something with more control via a keyboard and mouse setup, it is possible to get the free-to-play Survivor Royale up and running on PC.

Playing Survivor Royale On PC

It might be odd to think that players would want to take a mobile version of a Battle Royale game and put it back on PC (why not just play PUBG instead?), but there are some big upsides to switching from a phone screen to your computer monitor.

The main advantage is the ability to use your preferred keyboard bindings, which gives you a huge boost over the imprecise tablet touch controls that make it hard to line up and fire a shot.

Just running around with the touch screen can be frustrating, and driving any vehicles is a major headache. You can generally get around faster and pick up loot more efficiently in Survivor Royale on a PC setup.

Setup An Android Emulator

Unfortunately, you can't just download the app to your PC and run it as an executable file like any other game, as mobile apps aren't designed to run in Windows.

First up, you need an Android emulator installed on your computer. If you've ever used a Super NES emulator like ZSNES to play Chrono Trigger or had a dual boot OS computer, you already know essentially what's going on.

There's no shortage of Android emulator options: Andy, AMIDuoS, ARChon, Android Studio, Nox, Greymotion, and many more are all readily available to download. The trick is to find one that has the layout and options you prefer.

Personally, I'm using Bluestacks to run Survivor Royale on PC, which can be downloaded for free right here.

 Installing BlueStacks

Although it does have ads on the loading screen, what I dig about Bluestacks is that it lets you sign into your Google account and download apps directly from the interface. This is really helpful for the total emulator beginner, since you don't have to waste time searching for individual app APK files from dodgy websites laden with malware.

Just search "Battle Royale" in the upper-right screen and go through the standard installation process like you would on your tablet. The downside to using an emulator like this is that it will register your PC as a new Android device on your Google account.

This can be an annoyance if you regularly install games through the Google Play store on your computer, as now you have to make sure to open the drop-down menu and choose your tablet instead of your PC for future downloads.

After downloading the app, tab over to My Apps and choose Survivor Royale. Just as with the normal mobile edition, you have to download the extra 521 MB file for the full game.

Bind Keys To Your Preferences

Now that you've got the game up and running, you need to get used to using tablet or phone buttons on the PC screen. The typical Home and Back buttons are located at the bottom left, with the "shake screen" button at the bottom right. 

You can also map your keyboard keys to the touch screen buttons by clicking the keyboard icon at the lower-right while Survivor Royale is running. Just click and drag any button to the appropriate location, such as mapping the movement icons to the WASD keys.

 Opening the keyboard controls UI

Troubleshooting Survivor Royale On PC

Frequently with games like Survivor Royale, where you have to connect to a server for multiplayer sessions, the app will crash your first time using BlueStacks on PC. Just completely close and then re-open the emulator to re-start the engine and connect to the server again.

If it crashes every single time you connect, that means it's time to try out a different emulator, as some Android emulators don't play well with certain PC setups -- depending on your OS and specs.


That's all you need to know to get Survivor Royale up and running in Windows! Wondering how to survive the 100-player matches and come out #1? Check out our Survivor Royale beginner's guide to staying alive right here!

Destiny 2 Guide to Curse of Osiris' New Level Cap Tue, 05 Dec 2017 15:24:29 -0500 Ty Arthur

Forget Christmas morning or pitching your tent for the midnight showing of The Last Jedi, what Destiny 2 fans have been waiting for all year is now here -- the first major content expansion for Bungie's shared-world shooter, Curse Of Osiris

Unfortunately, it landed with a rocky start, bringing along a whole lot of pre-load nonsense that ravenous players had to sift through. 

However, now that all that silliness is over, you can finally jump into the expansion and explore new areas like Mercury. It's not just extra locations, loot, and enemies arriving with this long-awaited DLC, however. Players have been clamoring for increases to the oddly low-level XP cap and equipment power level cap since the game's initial launch -- and the developers finally listened!

 Ready to meet up with Sagira and kill a couple of
thousand Vex while chasing after Osiris?

Destiny 2's New Level Cap in Curse of Osiris

Starting out at a paltry level 20, the character level cap has blessedly been increased today as Curse Of Osiris officially launches. Everyone who spent any serious time playing the base game reached that almost immediately and has been eagerly awaiting more.

It's not a huge increase, but the Destiny 2 level cap has now been bumped to 25, offering more progression opportunities for those who devoured the first 20 levels in a week or so.

Of course, hitting max level didn't mean you were done progressing, as the real metric for your character's effectiveness (and readiness for those hard end-game raids) is your total power level determined by your gear.

Originally capped at 305, you can now increase your total Destiny 2 light power level 335 (if you use Legendary mods).

What's On The Horizon For Destiny 2

The newly-increased maximum power level can be hard to reach due to the random nature of loot, with big changes reportedly coming in the near future to make equipment acquisition more reliable in the end game.

While quite a few tweaks to the game arrived with the Destiny 2 1.11 patch and the Curse Of Osiris DLC today, there are several anticipated updates that won't arrive until later in the month.

For instance, tweaks to the chest lock-out system and changes to faction leaders selling gear for Legendary shards (and selling more gear if you've redeemed more engrams) won't actually arrive until the 12th. Although there's no date set in stone yet, the coming months are also slated to see a ranked Crucible playlist, private Crucible matches, and protection from exotic duplicates.

What patch changes are you most looking forward to, and have you been trying out the new Curse Of Osiris content yet? Let us know in the comments below! While you're at it, make sure to check out our other Destiny 2 guides. Here area few to get you started: 

How to Start The Surge's A Walk In The Park DLC Tue, 05 Dec 2017 15:17:43 -0500 Ty Arthur

Released earlier this year from Deck13, The Surge was absolutely brutal, taking a robotic junkyard setting with a hard sci-fi bent and mixing it with the playstyle made popular by Dark Souls series.

While the base game was rather short, there's plenty more content arriving! The Surge's latest expansion, A Walk In The Park, goes off the beaten path and offers a segment of the game world you may not have been expecting to explore.

Previous games have taught us that amusement parks can be deadly places -- just ask Funcom's psychological horror exploration The Park or take a trip through Fallout 4's Nuka World DLC.

That grand tradition continues with A Walk In The Park, an expansion for The Surge that was very much named with a wink and a nudge. Instead of the typical dark factory floor or bombed-out junkyard settings, this time around, you and your exo rig are headed to Creo World, an amusement park for employees.

 Well, they got that right: you won't forget your time at the park!

Accessing A Walk In The Park During The Surge

As with the rest of the game, it would appear things have gone haywire at Creo World, with anything robotic getting zombified and going all homicidal. So how exactly do you get into the theme park gone horribly wrong to take roller coaster rides of death and duke it out with mascots in hilarious suits?

The DLC area isn't just an option to pick in the main menu. Instead, you have two different areas to access at two different points in the game. You can do this either on your first run through of the story or in New Game+ mode after starting over.

To access the first part of Creo World, fully complete the first level, Abandoned Production. Yes, this includes taking down the first boss P.A.X. in the junkyard. So if you haven't done that yet, then it's time to git gud already -- because everything after that point is even harder.

In the second mission, Main Production, play through the area until you start seeing the Creo World ads all over the walls and then come across Irina on the main path. After meeting Irina, you can jump on the train to access the bulk of A Walk In The Park's new setting.

If this is your first playthrough of the game, you will be prompted to leave Creo World after completing the first segment of the DLC. If you are on New Game+ instead, you can play both parts simultaneously without having to leave the park.

 Taking the Maglev train to Creo World

For the second part of A Walk In The Park (during your first playthrough of the base game instead of New Game+ mode), you have to play through the story until reaching the Research And Development level.

Shortly after accessing the area, a drone will tell you to go right down a corner, offering immediate access to the second section of Creo World. From this entrance point, you can get to both the first and second parts of the DLC (without having to return to Main Production to get to the first area).

 Research And Development

That's everything you need to know to get started with The Surge's A Walk In The Park DLC! Are you still playing The Surge, and what new enemies and upgrades are you looking forward to interacting within this zany expansion? Let us know in the comments!

If you're just getting back into the action and haven't played in awhile, be sure to check out our full list of The Surge guides right here, covering everything from the weapons list to beating those devastatingly hard bosses!

Fortnite Guide: Stats Not Updating Fix Tue, 05 Dec 2017 13:24:50 -0500 Ty Arthur

While the zany (and ultra fun) Fortnite will probably end up on more than a few year-end best of lists, let's not forget that the third-person shooter is still in beta and isn't a fully functional game yet.

It's easy to lose track of that fact with how much new content gets added regularly, from Battle Royale mode to whole-new game mechanics slated to land later this very week.

As a game still in the equivalent of early access, there are obviously some bugs to get worked out -- and those are getting more noticeable as literally millions of new players across all three major platforms have jumped on lately.

Fortnite Stats Bug

The biggest problem affecting players since early December has been a curious lack of stat updates in your character profile. If you win a Battle Royale match or take down a whole horde of husks, none of that ever shows up anywhere. Leaderboards and even storm shield defenses have been affected as the bug strikes players on PC, PS4, and Xbox One.

Besides killing your bragging rights and removing that sense of progression that keeps people coming back to online games, the Fortnite stats not updating bug has caused major headaches for sites like Storm Shield One that collect and display stats on all players in the game.

Here was the official announcement from the Epic crew about stats going offline due to some other problem that needed addressing:

 Hopefully that's true about it not happening again in the future?

There's been a rather annoying back and forth over the last few days, with updates making it seem like things were working . . . even though they weren't quite yet.

We've seen announcements of stats going back up at the various Fortnite social media locations, only to then get something like this a few hours later:

      Quit getting our hopes up just to dash them again!

The good news is that there's no actual troubleshooting or game reinstalling you need to do to fix the Fortnite stats bug at this point. As of this morning, the bug has now been officially resolved.

The brief message below was just posted at the official Epic forums straight from the developers. There's a catch to the long overdue fix, though -- while new stats are in fact being added, the old ones aren't updated at this point.

That means that any wins you got over the last few days still aren't going to show up for a while.

 Huzzah, let the masses rejoice!

Getting Old Fortnite Stats Updated

Old stats that were accrued during the outage are being "back filled," meaning all your various wins and other stats will be uploaded . . . sometime. When exactly is this happening?

Yeah, that's anybody's guess at this point. It's a good bet it won't all be at once, as data is probably added back in waves for different segments of players.

This exact same stats problem did happen once before, much earlier in the beta. For those of us who have been playing all along and remember that dark time, it took about three weeks for everyone to get all their stats added back in properly.

At this point, all you can do is keep playing and be patient (or more likely throw a fit in the forums -- but that's your call). Your wins will show back up sometime along the way, so keep checking back!


Ready to jump back into the action, defending storm shields or taking on 99 other players in the shrinking map? Check out our full list of Fortnite guides here covering every aspect of the base game and the Battle Royale mode!

Is Super Mario Odyssey 2 Player? Yes, and Here's How It Works Tue, 05 Dec 2017 13:08:16 -0500 Dpaige1991

A few weeks ago, Nintendo launched Super Mario Odyssey, an ambitious open-world game set in one of the gaming community's most beloved worlds. And given the unparalleled quality of the experience, it's no wonder that the game has had a wildly successful release.

What's more, Super Mario Odyssey supports local co-operative play, allowing two people to play the game together on the couch!

In the video, the Nintendo Treehouse team shows off Super Mario Odyssey's co-op mode, demonstrating that the first player controls Mario as normal, but the second player is able to control Cappy as an autonomous character.

If you are playing as Mario, you can run, jump, and explore the world as you usually would in single player. As Cappy, you can help Mario out by looking out for enemies and other hazards, interacting with the environment, and gathering items -- the Cappy player can even do this while Mario is possessing someone (or something)!

Co-operative play in Super Mario Odyssey broadens an already awesome experience, and it's an experience that you can share.


With the holidays coming up, Super Mario Odyssey makes for a great gift for a friend or loved one -- a gift that both of you can enjoy playing together!

If you're interested in some of our other Super Mario Odyssey content, you can find it here.

Cobalt WASD Guide: Mastering Combat Controls Tue, 05 Dec 2017 11:49:50 -0500 Sergey_3847

Cobalt WASD is a multiplayer spin-off to the acclaimed platformer Cobalt. It has only one mode: 4v4 cooperative online combat, which requires not only focus and precision but also a solid knowledge of keyboard and mouse controls.

Before venturing into the world of fast shooting, jumping, and running, take a look at the control scheme featured in Cobalt WASD. This guide will also provide you with a few essential tips and give you a sense of what to expect from this cool little game.

Mastering Controls in Cobalt WASD

Jumping and Ducking

These two types of moves are the most important for you to master if you want to efficiently aim and dodge the enemy team's bullets.

  • Press Space twice for a double jump with a roll. This will allow you to overcome higher obstacles.
  • If you hit the wall, press Space at the wall to roll upwards.
  • In order to move faster, use ducking while moving down slopes for a sliding effect.
  • If you want to fall faster, then use ducking while in the air.
Quick Melee Damage

You will have access to a whole variety of firearms and grenades in Cobalt WASD, but don't neglect melee damage, as it grants you five times more volts (an in-game currency) for killing an enemy.

In order to effectively use melee damage, get used to triggering the mouse wheel when you get close enough to the enemy player.

Mastering Grenades

Grenades can be super effective if used correctly:

  • Use the F button for a quick grenade, but don't forget to aim first with your mouse.
  • When you release the button, the grenade will follow the crosshair.
  • You can add more speed to your grenade if you move and throw at the same time.
Using Equipment

In the game's shop you can purchase one of the four available equipments in the game, which can significantly boost your gameplay:

  • Hook: attaches to walls and pulls you towards them.
  • Dash: boosts you in any direction you like, stunning enemies you hit along the way.
  • Jet: gives you an ability to fly around.
  • Shield: protects your body from damage.

Your equipment can be activated by pressing the Shift button.


With the help of these beginner tips, you can confidently move around any map in Cobalt WASD and destroy your enemies in the blink of an eye.

Come back soon for more Cobalt WASD guides at GameSkinny!

Battlerite: Raigon Loadout and Battlerites Guide Tue, 05 Dec 2017 11:41:58 -0500 Brandon Janeway

We are still facing the change of the loadout system in Battlerite, and it is affecting everyone's playstyle. To help those who still don't know what to do with the change, we have broken down Raigon's battlerites for you and provided our suggested build, all to make sure you can lead this prince to domination. 


Overflowing Power

Your next Sword Slash after landing Heavenly Strike sends forth a Slicing Wind, dealing 10 damage and restoring 14 health. This is a survival battlerite. 

This ability makes Raigion more viable and tanky, while also dealing some damage. A decent combo for Raigon is also going from Heavenly Strike in to a Sword Slash, which makes this skill very useful. 

Aerial Strike

Seismic Shock can be recast to leap and strike the airborne target, dealing 10 damage and increasing air duration by 0.5s. This is a mixed battlerite. 

This skill is useful in certain conditions where you know you are going to have to go up against airborne targets. It is not the most useful in dealing with a standard match, but if you are concerned about air combat, it is a useful addition.


Move at 100% speed during Parry, and end with a Spinning Slash that hits twice, dealing 6 damage and inflicting a Stun that lasts 0.25s. This is a control battlerite.

This is a decent skill for anyone who wants to make use of Parry. Parry can be difficult to land and requires some skill, which means this is not the best all-around skill or a skill for new users of Raigon. 

Royal Descent

Heavenly Strike deals an additional 6 damage to enemies struck. This is an offense battlerite.

If you want to get some easy damage out, this is an essential skill. Heavenly Strike is one of his main abilities, and it is used often, so this is a must to increase DPS. If you do not want a build around Heavenly Strike, this skill can be avoided. 

Headlong Rush

The dash length of Retribution is increased by 30%. This is a mobility battlerite. 

In order to make Raigon more mobile, this skill will need to be used. Regardless of your build, it is a good skill to add some mobility and make sure that Raigon can get his target or get you out of a sticky situation.


Each deflected attack grants you 1 weapon charge and 3 health. This is a survival battlerite.

This is another ability that is useful in keeping Raigon alive and providing some good utility. Being able to get both health and weapon charges is useful and will make you a lot more viable in a match.


When Parry ends, heal yourself and nearby allies for 8. This is a support battlerite.

This is a useful skill for anyone wanting some support utility to Raigon. This is also another skill that relies on Parry and therefore depends on which skills you want to focus on. There are other skills that can offer some healing that are more useful for Raigon. 

Dragon Mastery

Landing Dragon Palm allows you to recast it for 1.5s. This is a control battlerite.

For those who want an aggressive build, Dragon Mastery may be a nice investment. It does not guarantee that damage or utility, though, and requires you to land the ability more than once, so it is somewhat advanced.

Shock Wave

Seismic Shock deals 4 bonus damage, and cooldown is reduced by 1s. This is an offense battlerite.

Some nice splash damage is never a bad thing, which is what this will provide players. It is for those seeking a more aggressive build for Raigon and who want to prioritize DPS. 

Sword Dance

Sword Slash hits reduces the cooldown of Parry by 1s. This is a survival battlerite.

This is a nice ability for those who are making use of all of Raigon's abilities. Since it is also not an ability that guarantees damage or utility, it is more for advanced players who can utilize Raigon's skills. 

Hawk Dive

Heavenly Strike inflicts a 1.6s Fading Snare. This is a control battlerite. 

Hawk Dive is a nice battlerite to offer some control abilities and make Raigon more diverse in combat. It can be useful for a sticky situation and has the possibility of making Raigon more viable overall.


Maximum Energy is increased by 25%, and Retribution grants 6% bonus energy. This is a utility battlerite. 

Increasing your maximum energy is never a bad thing, so an ability to increase maximum energy can be a nice addition. It is also very beginner-friendly, as it is a guaranteed benefit.

The Tiger and the Dragon

Wrath of the Tiger end with a Heavenly Strike. This is an offense battlerite.

This ability is a good way to make the most use of your ultimate ability. Leading with Wrath of the Tiger and then getting a Heavenly Strike in can be a game changer. 

The Power of the Blade

Every unique target struck grants you 10 health. This is a survival battlerite. 

This ability is nice to make sure you are more survivable. It requires you to hit unique targets, which may not be the best option given the situation, so it is dependent on how confident the player is. 

Standard Build

This build consists of: Headlong Rush, Overflowing Power, Duelist, Resolve, and Royal Decent. 

This is an all-around build for any match you find yourself in, and it can be tailored for specific situations. This build is also reliant on Heavenly Strike and Sword Slash. It's a good mix of damage and utility to give Raigon survivability. 

Hope this build brings you domination in your next match. Let us know in the comments who you are using in Battlerite. 

Survivor Royale: Complete Beginner's Guide to Staying Alive Mon, 04 Dec 2017 15:45:09 -0500 Ty Arthur

The lauded PUBG might not even be in full release yet, but it's already spawned an entire genre of games in less than a year. From the Battle Royale Mode in Fortnite hitting 20 million players to a horde of imitators now in development or quickly landing on mobile devices, 100 players battling to the death is the new wave of multiplayer gaming.

Besides NetEase's other mobile entries, Rules Of Survival and Knives Out, now there's also Survivor Royalewhich is intensely similar to the developer's other two titles. They've got some major market saturation going on -- maybe we'll have anti-trust hearings to break up Battle Royale monopolies one day in this brave new world of technology?

If you've played PUBG, Fortnite, or Rules Of Survival, you should already know what to do for the most part. There are some elements in this particular iteration of the Battle Royale formula you want to know about ahead of time, however, if you plan to be the #1 hero survivor at the end of the match

 Hmm . . . something about this feels familiar . . .

Jump Point/Learning The Map

Since this is basically PUBG mobile edition, of course your first decision is where to deploy from the helicopter over the island. Usually the best course of action is to launch away from other players and not clump up on the same loot area.

Dropping in the same spot as 20 other players is a good way to get killed immediately, with only a small chance of coming out the survivor with all the loot. Even if that happens, someone who launched later on and hoofed it back to the beginning will probably just snipe you anyway. Why work harder when you can work smarter?

While on the map, there are a few gameplay elements you need to know about in the change to a mobile rendition. For instance, you can vault over broken stone walls with the jump button at the middle-right end of the screen, but typically you have to be right up on the wall and can't jump from a distance while still clearing the full height.

Likewise, you've got to get right next to a building's door before the "Open" button appears on the right side of the screen. If you are off even slightly, it won't show up, leaving a bottleneck where you can get gunned down while trying to escape. Heading inside buildings is where you'll find the bulk of your loot, whether that's a helmet or an AK-47 and some energy drinks. Always be on the lookout for ammo on floors! It's scarce, and you don't want to get caught bringing your fists to a gun fight.

As would be expected from a Battle Royale game, poison gas reduces the map size significantly every few minutes to force surviving players together. The gas is less punishing than you'd think, though, so it's not out of the question to stay in the gas for a bit and snipe those players fleeing the shrinking map while taking small amounts of damage.

As with any Battle Royale game, always plan your healing and inventory management ahead of time. Opening up the backpack leaves you open to attack, and it takes 2.5 seconds of terrible vulnerability to use an energy drink or bandage. Be in cover and away from the firefights before using any items!

 The #1 cause of death is sitting still!

Weapon Knowledge

Before jumping into a match, take some time to familiarize yourself with the roster of potential guns to pick up in the weapon screen. Recoil is particularly nasty in this game, especially on automatic weapons like the various SMGs, so with most guns you want to fire short, focused bursts.

Since the goal is to kill everyone else, taking out enemies from afar is usually the best way to go unless you get caught out in the open by another scavenger. Even non-sniper rifle weapons can be used to snipe from afar with the zoom feature on the right side of your tablet.

Sitting in a second-story room looking out a window with an SMG can actually be one of the best ways to rack up kills. Be sure to equip better scopes you find in any scavenge area for even deadlier capabilities!

In terms of area effect weapons, every player starts with a single grenade, but it's unwieldy and inaccurate. There's no particular aiming the angle of a grenade, and it just goes off a short distance in whatever direction you are facing.

The grenade can be incredibly useful if you see people getting into a car, however, and downright deadly if you follow someone and throw it in a building just as they are entering the door. Likewise, the grenade is useful for flushing a sniper out of a room in a house.

Combat Mad Max Style

Guns are all well and good, but don't discount vehicles if you find some fuel! There are plenty of different vehicles scattered around the map, especially in areas with several houses in a dead end.

Yes, you can run over other players, so it's worthwhile to drive between populated areas instead of running on foot unless you are specifically trying to stay stealthy.

If you are in Squad mode and working with other players, cars are your best friend. Choose to ride instead of drive, then tap the button on the right side to lean out the car and pull out your primary gun. A caravan of vehicles working together and spraying bullets is hard to take down by lone wolves running across open terrain. Just keep in mind that the vehicle handling is atrocious -- give yourself plenty of room for turns!

 Battle Royale: Fury Road!

Those are all the basics you need to know to live through a round of Survivor Royale and be the last hero remaining alive. What's your best kill count, and do you have any other Battle Royale survival tips and tricks we didn't mention? Let us know in the comments below!

Black Mirror (2017) Walkthrough: Prologue And Chapter 1 Mon, 04 Dec 2017 15:31:48 -0500 QuintLyn

KING Art's Black Mirror is a re-imagining of the original point-and-click mystery horror series. It takes place in a manor in Scotland filled with shifty people and a family mystery that you must uncover. To help you uncover the truth about the family, we've compiled a guide complete with item locations, puzzle hints, and even a full walkthrough.

As we know most of you don't want to spoil the story, we've organized this guide in a way that allows you to get help without doing that. For those who would rather have a full walkthrough, that's here as well. We just put it at the bottom. The least spoilery thing (drawing piece locations) can be found at the top. These are followed by puzzle hints and help that do not just give you the answer. Finally, the walkthrough offers the quickest way to get through the chapter and provides all the answers to the puzzle. We avoided relaying the entire story, but there are spoilers in that section.

Drawing Piece Locations

Set 1

When in your bedroom, investigate the chest on the left side of the desk. You'll find them nestled inside.

Set 2

Upstairs. The pieces are on a table to the left of the clock just as you exit your room.

Set 3

Upstairs, there is a hallway near the portrait of your grandfather Edward. Follow it all the way to the end and look on the floor.

Set 4

When you are zoomed in on the desktop in the library, you'll find the pieces on the left side near some bottles and other items.

Piece 5

These can be found in the top right-hand drawer of the desk in the Master Study.


Spoiler-Free Puzzle Hints

Desk Puzzles

One -- Lock Code

To solve the lock code, you'll need to do some basic math using a clue found in one of the desk drawers. There are two simple problems. The first is basic addition where the answer must equal 5. 

There are three possible solutions for this:




Solving this puzzle will give you the first and third digits. The second problem asks you to solve for 2 through subtraction. The answers here cannot be the same as the ones used in the previous problem, so you'll need to use a bit of trial and error to get the right answer.

Two -- Snake Stripes

This one's pretty basic, and most of it's laid out right there in front of you. You have two buttons next to each other: black and white. You have a snake with a black-and-white striped pattern. You just need to be observant.

 Master Study Door Lock

You won't be able to open this until you find the proper key. This key can be manipulated. Take a look at the keyhole in the master study door, and then adjust the key to make it fit.

Master Study Dial

This puzzle is much easier than it seems. You'll find two sets of clues nearby. The first is a drawing of the dial with some numbers in it. Running from inner dial to outer: 1, 5, and 2. The other piece to the puzzle can be found on the same bookcase as the dial. There's no math involved here. Just basic logic.

Detailed Walkthrough


You'll find yourself running from some unknown entity. This whole section is on rails, so just follow the road until you get to the cutscene, where you'll be given the first chance to interact with something.

Simply click the circle to interact, and watch the rest of the scene before moving on. Keep going until you run across a ghost. Touch her for another cut.

Once the scene is over, begin your run again -- into the circle of stones. Here you'll find an altar. Walk up to it and take the item from the ground. Here you'll get a third cutscene before being allowed to interact directly with the stone. Once you've examined it, pick up the lantern you'd set on it. One last scene will play before the game's first chapter begins.

Chapter 1

The Car Ride

Before getting started, you'll have to roll through another short cutscene that outlines the game's backstory. You're sitting in a car, on your way to the old family home in Scotland. It is here that you will find your first clues. 

Take a look around the car before interacting with anything. There are a few options, but as soon as you interact with the items in the chest next to you, you will arrive at your destination and be forced to move on.

The first clue you are given sits on top of the chest. It's a note with a few random words on it. If you flip it over (by clicking on it with the mouse and dragging), you'll find a code as well. Put the paper away and you'll be given the option to open the chest. 

Inside the chest is a replica of a castle turret. Inspect this, and then put it away as well. Doing so will bring the car ride to an end -- at the Black House driveway.


Here you'll be greeted by the family lawyer, one Andrew Harrison. He'll hurry you inside and introduce you to the family matriarch -- your grandmother, Lady Margaret. You'll ask her a few questions, and she'll give you a few smug answers before leaving you in the hands of her butler Angus and wandering off. 

Before Angus can direct you to your room, Andrew will inquire as to proof of your identity. When you go to hand him the papers, you'll drop the turret you found earlier. You can either lie or tell the truth when he asks you about it. Angus seems to be familiar with it but doesn't say anything.

Once you're done with Andrew, follow Angus up the stairs. At the top, you'll come face to face with a portrait of your grandfather Edward. Take a closer look at it before following Angus around to the right. About midway down the hallway, you'll spot a set of double doors. Inspect them, and Angus will inform you it's the "Master Study" and that you'll be able to check it out tomorrow. 

Continue to follow Angus to your room. Before getting there, you can comment on the peeling wallpaper if you like. Otherwise, just get to your door and wait for Angus to open it. While you wait, you'll hear a noise and look around, spotting something in the distance before being startled by the clock next to you. Once in the room, Angus will advise you to not wander about at night -- advice you obviously don't plan to take.

Your Room

Take a look around your room. You can inspect the fireplace and a painting above it. Examining the painting will let you take an even closer look. Click both points and you'll spot something familiar.

Wander over to the bed and open your luggage. Inspect the documents and picture before taking the matches hidden behind the telegram. You can also try to go to bed, but the game will insist you keep going. Instead, head over to the desk. 

On the left side of the desk is a small chest. Open it and take the first pieces of a drawing. (You'll be collecting these). Then select the "Light" option on the candle. Keep in mind this will only be available if you already have the matches. 

Once you have your lit candle, you're ready to explore. Head out the door into the hallway.

Upstairs Landing And Hallways

Out in the hallway, turn left into the alcove with the clock in it. You can take a closer look at the clock and will also be able to grab the next set of drawing pieces off the table next to it. 

From here, you can either head straight or go right. The landing goes in a big circle, so either is fine. You will want to inspect all the inlets and hallways while you're here. 

If you go straight from your bedroom door, you'll encounter a dumb waiter. Make a note of it for later. From there, turn right and make your way around the landing. You'll pass the upstairs entrance to the library and the stairs to the attic before reaching the next inlet, where you can examine one of the doors.

Continue down the hallway, and you'll run into your grandfather's portrait again. Inspect it again to learn more about him. Once you're done with the painting, head straight down the hallway next to it -- all the way to the end -- to find more drawing pieces.

Go back to the library doors and enter.


In the library, you'll see Andrew looking over some papers. You can do something to attract his attention or simply listen in on him. If you choose to eavesdrop and do it long enough, he'll notice you. 

Since you're on the landing, go ahead and make the circuit before heading downstairs. You'll find a few books to examine -- Lovecraft, Poe, and the like -- and you'll also find a roll-top desk. You won't be able to do much more than look at it now, but when you do that, your quest log will update.

Head down to talk to Andrew and you'll learn a bit more about your family history. When the conversation is over and he leaves, take a peek at the papers on his desk. You can also explore the rest of the library, but there's nothing else to do there at the moment. Exit by the downstairs entrance and return to the foyer. 


When you enter the foyer, follow the wall to your character's right until you come to some French doors. Go through them and follow the hallway to the kitchen, where you'll find a creepy, old, blind guy by the name of Rory. This is the house gardener. Talk to him for a bit. He'll finish eating and leave.

Explore the kitchen to find a couple of useful items. The first is a piece of wire located in a drawer at the end of the island. The second is a hatchet sitting on top of the island. Take them and return to the desk in the library.

Library Desk

Back at the desk, you'll now have options for opening the desk. If you grabbed the wire, use it. This will allow you to obtain the "No Scratches" achievement. (You'll need to hold down the mouse button with this option.) Now that the desk is open, you can take a closer look.

Open the top drawer on the right and you'll get another clue, which you will need to solve the next puzzle. The second drawer contains a letter. The third is locked. 

On the left side of the desk, you'll find more drawing pieces. To the left of them is a panel that can be investigated, but you'll have to figure out the combination in order to get into it. Luckily, it's written there for you . . . in runes. This is where the clue you just found comes in. It's a basic math puzzle. The way to solve this is in the story-spoiler-free puzzle solutions available earlier in this post. Or, you can just look at the image here:

Once you have this solved, the panel below the lock will open. Take the key inside and make a note of the white and black stripes on the snake. You'll need these for the next puzzle.

Back out of the exam mode by one step so you can see the desk drawers. Unlock the third one, and one of the snake heads will open. To open the next snake head, you'll need to inspect the left side of the desk. Stay zoomed in and simply move all the way over. Remember those stripes I mentioned? This is where you'll use them. 

On the end of the desk is a snake with a black-and-white striped pattern and two buttons: one black and one white. Just press the buttons in the order dictated by the stripes on the snake -- remembering the ones on the inside of the desk as well. This would be:


Finally, to finish opening the desk, you'll need to look at the right side. Again, there's a snake design. But in this case, all you need to do is press the button on its head.

This will unlock the third snake head and reveal the items locked behind them: another letter and a key. If you play with the key, you'll see that the teeth on the end can be rotated . . . making it useful for different kinds of locks.

Exit out of examine mode, and a little boy will startle you. He'll apologize and run into the hallway. Unfortunately, he disappears. Don't worry about him right now. Instead, walk around the landing to the Master Study door.

Master Study

Now that you have the key, you'll see you have the option to unlock the door. However, it won't be as easy as simply putting the key in the lock. Remember that the teeth at the end can be moved. Click the unlock option, and take a closer look at the lock hole.

For the key to fit this hole, you'll need to rotate the inner tooth. In the inventory, click the tooth twice, and it'll be straight up from the rest. Now exit back out and unlock the door.

Once in the study, take a look at the desk. As with the other desk, you'll need to move the camera around a good bit once you're in investigation mode. There will be drawers to open that contain more clues as to what the family is like.

The third drawer on the left will have a hidden compartment containing a few sheets of paper. One has a clue as to how to solve the next puzzle. The top drawer on the right has more pieces of the drawing.

Leave the desk and head over to the book case on the left. There you'll see a dial with runes. This is where the clue comes in. Luckily, this one's a bit more simple than the last rune puzzle. There's no math involved. Instead, take a look at the left side of the bookcase. There you will find five runes. The numbers on the clue you just found correspond with the runes on the side of the case. You'll be able to look at them more closely by moving the camera while zoomed in. Rotate the dials until all three correct runes are aligned at the top, keeping in mind that the runes on the side of the case are ordered 1-5 from top to bottom. Once the dial is set right, you'll get another cut scene and find yourself looking at a miniature version of the house. 

Look closely at the house, and you'll see a spot where something is missing. Click to use this spot, and you'll get a series of cutscenes that end with you falling down the stairs. When you wake up, it's the next day and the start of Chapter 2.


Make sure to check out our other Black Mirror guides and walkthroughs here

Pocket Mine 3 Beginner's Tips Guide Mon, 04 Dec 2017 15:02:39 -0500 spacechaser

Pocket Mine 3 is here, and so is GameSkinny! Whether you're a returning fan or new to the series, we'll help you get started on your mining adventure. Here are a few tips to keep in mind while you mine.

1. Upgrade your cards and gear.


When you first start playing, it's easy to forget that your items can be upgraded! Luckily, the game makes sure to remind you when your cards (which give you bonuses when you go into mines) are ready to be upgraded. As the game progresses, those cards can make or break a level! 

As for your gear, if you have an item (especially legendary or epic items) that you really like, try to upgrade it to its max level. The higher level it is, the better its stats, and the better you'll do in the mines.

2. Complete Achievements to earn more gems.

If you find yourself low on gems, head to the Achievements tab and take a look to see what you've completed. Try to keep some of the easier ones in mind when you enter the mines! Gems are useful for giving you another card slot to use when going into a mine and also for giving you a bonus pickaxe in case yours breaks prematurely.

3. Don't just tap wildly while mining.

Pocket Mine isn't one of those "tap to win" games -- you have to be strategic! Save your hits for when you absolutely need them. Likewise, always keep an eye out for combos you can make by stringing bombs, worms, explosive gas, and drills! The fewer unnecessary hits you make, the more you'll have left for when you really need them.

4. Create different loadouts.

A returning feature to the game, loadouts are a great way to vary your gameplay and to adapt to different situations. You unlock loadouts after acquiring a playable character card, and it's a great way to create different builds depending on those characters!

5. Gather artifacts to complete exhibits in the museum.

Artifacts are found inside chests in the mines, and collecting a whole set can get you some fabulous prizes. As a reward for completing exhibits, you get card packs that sometimes contain rare or exotic cards! This is a great way to increase your card arsenal and thus increase your chances of winning in the mines!

These are just a few tips to help you get started in Pocket Mine 3, but of course, what matters most is that you keep trying! The more you play, the more you'll figure out what builds work for you.

Xenoblade Chronicles 2 Beginner's Guide: Tips for New Drivers Mon, 04 Dec 2017 14:24:29 -0500 Autumn Fish

The Cloud Sea of Alrest is a dangerous place, and you'll need all the help you can get if you hope to survive Xenoblade Chronicles 2. You may already have aptitude as a Blade Driver, but on the Titans of Alrest, you'll find yourself challenged by more than just your enemies.

As is par for the course for vast JRPGs, there are several systems to grapple with while learning the ropes. Thankfully you're introduced to many of these systems rather slowly, but it's not hard to overlook or forget them in the rush to get to the meat of the game.

Because of that, we've put together a few tips on all the things you should keep in mind while just starting out in Alrest. Let's dive in!

Fine Tune the Difficulty in Xenoblade Chronicles 2 to Your Preference

There's been a slight change in how Experience (EXP) is handled overall. While you still gain direct EXP for defeating enemies, Quest Experience doesn't apply right away. Instead, the Quest EXP you accumulate all goes into a pool of Bonus Experience that can be cashed in when you rest at an Inn.

The best part is, when you rest at the Inn, you get to choose how many levels to give your Drivers based on the pool of Bonus Experience they've accumulated. You may even choose not to level them at all. Ultimately, how quickly you level is completely up to you, so you no longer have to worry about making the game too easy because you wanted to complete all of the side quests.

Check the Quest Log for Tips When You Get Stuck

Gone are the days where we scour GameFAQs for help on every other sidequest in Xenoblade. The Quest Log in this entry is actually estimable and quite excellent at showing you all the information you need to know.

Improved Quest Log and Sliding Difficulty Xenoblade Chronicles 2 Beginner's Guide Tips

You can pull up your active quest objective at any time in the overworld simply by pressing ZR. With that pop-up open, pressing the Y button lets you dive straight into the Quest Log so you can see more detailed information on the quest. Combine all that with the new compass and solid map interface, and you have a Quest Log that's actually a joy to use.

So whenever you find yourself stuck, just open up the new-and-improved Quest Log. You'll be surprised how much information can be found in there.

Distribute Blade Core Crystals Evenly Across All Available Drivers

Core Crystals are items that Drivers open in order to resonate with new Blades. In order to keep your options in combat as open as possible, it's important to distribute these Core Crystals evenly across all of your available Drivers, lest you run into an issue where one Driver has too few Blades to swap between while others have more than they can handle. Remember, variety is the spice of life!

Remember to Actively Work on Blade Affinity Charts

Aside from Core Chips and Aux Cores, filling out Affinity Charts is one of the main ways you can upgrade your Blades. Rather than using Skill Points to upgrade these charts like Drivers do, you need to build Trust to unlock new upgrade tiers and complete side objectives to activate the bonuses.

It's important to check the Affinity Charts often to keep track of what side objectives you need to complete in order to power up your Blades. Many of these objectives are pretty straightforward, but some of them don't make much sense.

Blade Affinity Chart Core Crystals Xenoblade Chronicles 2 Beginner's Guide Tips

The ones I found to be particularly confusing included the use of a skill that I hadn't heard of. None of your Arts go by the name of the skill, after all, so I was left wondering how to use it for many hours. Later on, however, I found the objective slowly completing whenever I would use certain stages of my special attack.

So, when confused about how to complete an Affinity Chart objective, it's a good idea to just continue playing with that Blade. Ultimately, the objective should eventually complete itself through normal gameplay.

Raise the Development Level of Towns to Access Upgraded Shops

If you raise the Dev Level of different towns, their shop inventories will expand to offer greater variety and better deals. In order to raise your Dev Level, you need to chat up the citizens, complete side quests, and purchase deeds to the shops in town.

Don't think buying the deeds to shops is a waste of money, either. Even if it didn't contribute to the Dev Level, you still earn amazing passive abilities for owning these deeds. There are just so many benefits to upgrading towns that you seriously have no reason not to.

Return to Previous Areas When the Cloud Tide Shifts

The Cloud Sea goes through periods of High Tide and Low Tide in Alrest. Unlike the tides in the real world, however, the Cloud Tide isn't exactly affected by the time of day, so your fate is left up to the Titan you're riding upon. When the Tide does shift, however, it's a good idea to go back to old areas in order to see if you can't discover any cool secrets.

Development Level Cloud Sea Tides Long Rest Xenoblade Chronicles 2 Beginner's Guide Tips

You can manually affect the Tide if you wish, but it's a little more complicated than fiddling with the Time options in the menu. In order to shift the Tide, you'll have to find an Inn to stay at that offers Long Rests. When you awaken, the Cloud Tide will have shifted.

Don't Be Afraid to Avoid Strong Enemies

Anyone familiar with Xenoblade is also familiar with disproportionately strong enemies littering beginner areas. If you're new to the series, you should know that you're by no means expected to take down every enemy that stands between you and your objective.

Sometimes you'll find a strong enemy right in the middle of your path. No matter where it's found, however, don't be afraid to run away and return once your party is more prepared. You may even choose to simply walk around it.


Take your time learning how each game system works, and Alrest is sure to reward you. For help figuring out the combat system or the secrets of the Cloud Sea, be sure to check back with GameSkinny for more Xenoblade Chronicles 2 guides

Here are a few to get you started: 

Xenoblade Chronicles 2 Combat Guide: Excel at Blade Combos, Driver Combos, and Chain Attacks Mon, 04 Dec 2017 12:48:14 -0500 Autumn Fish

The combat system in Xenoblade Chronicles 2 gets pretty engrossing once you understand all of its bells and whistles. The problem is, while the tutorial may spread out the introduction of many of these mechanics to make it easier to digest, it doesn't do a great job of demonstrating what it's talking about.

It took quite a bit of trial and error, but now that I have a solid grasp on the combat system, I fully intend to share it with you. Whether you're confused about elemental Blade Combos or trying to figure out how to maximize the potential of your Chain Attack, you're bound to find the answers you're looking for here. It really does make the experience that much better.

Let's dive in!

The Basics of Combat in Xenoblade Chronicles 2

Before you can truly master the techniques that deal megatons of damage, you first need a solid grasp on the basics of combat. This section details the revamped Auto Attack, using Driver Arts, Attack Canceling, building up your Special, and switching Blades. If you already feel confident with the basics of combat, feel free to skip on to the next section, but remember to always keep these in mind.

Unlike past entries, your Auto Attack actually halts completely when you move, only starting again once you've planted your feet firmly in one position. While this may not seem like too big of a deal at a glance, you'd be surprised how much the Auto Attack plays into the combat system overall.

For starters, every hit of your Auto Attack slowly builds up the gauge on your Driver Arts. Once the gauge on an Art is full, its icon lights up, and the Art becomes usable by pressing the corresponding face button. Using the Art depletes its energy, requiring you to charge it back up again with Auto Attacks.

However, if you just use Arts as soon as they become available, not only are you making poor strategic decisions, but you're also missing out on dealing a lot more damage. By using an Art at the end of one of your Auto Attacks, you perform what's called an Attack Cancel, indicated by a ring that appears in the middle of the screen when you succeed.

Combat System Basics XC2 Xenoblade Chronicles 2 Guide

By Attack Canceling into an Art, it becomes more powerful. The further you are into an Auto Attack chain, the better the result. This means that timing your Attack Cancels on the last hit of an Auto Attack chain is ideal for maximizing your potential.

As if the extra damage wasn't enough of an incentive to Attack Cancel everything, it also serves to build your Special Attack gauge much faster than it would otherwise. Using only Arts, you can build the Special gauge up through three levels of power, each with its own animations and Quick-Time Events (QTEs).

Once at the third Special level, you can reach a fourth by having maximum Combat Affinity with your equipped Blade, indicated by a golden resonance line. You achieve high Combat Affinity with your Blade by simply standing near them and not switching them out for awhile.

When you go to finally use your Special, consider Attack Canceling with it too for a bit of extra damage. You can even Attack Cancel when you go to switch Blades via the D-Pad so that they arrive in battle with their abilities ready to go.

With the fundamentals down, we can finally move on to the fun stuff. By utilizing elemental Blade Combos, Driver Combos, Fusion Combos, Elemental Orbs, and Chain Attacks in just the right way, you can pull off techniques that deal truly delightful amounts of damage.

How to Complete Elemental Blade Combos in Xenoblade Chronicles 2

A Blade Combo begins when you unleash a Special Attack of any level on an enemy. A timer with an element attached to it appears on the top-right of the enemy's health bar alongside a rather confusing pyramid of elemental icons and effects that pops up in the top-right corner of the screen.

How to Complete Elemental Blade Combos XC2 Xenoblade Chronicles 2 Combat Guide

Both the countdown timer and the flashing elemental icon represent the element of the Special you just used. On the right side of the currently flashing icon are two different elemental icons. These icons represent different branches that you can go down to reach the end of the Blade Combo.

In order to continue the Blade Combo, you need to switch to a Blade of either of the two elements in the column directly to the right of the starting icon, and unleash their Special after it's been built up to level 2 or higher. If it's not at least level 2, it won't advance the Blade Combo, and you'll lose precious time. You have until the timer depletes to continue the combo or it will fail, and you'll have to start over.

Once in the second stage of the Blade Combo, you'll notice that half of the four elemental icons that were originally available in the final column are now entirely inaccessible. That's because when you decided which of the two elements you'd use to continue the combo, you also locked yourself down a branching path. If you're stuck without a Blade that can finish the combo, then you're out of luck, so it's important to plan ahead and choose a path that you can complete.

To finish the Blade Combo, repeat what you did to continue it by switching to a Blade that matches one of the two elements left in the column directly to the right of the blinking icon and unleashing their Special after it's been built up to level 3 or higher.

Note that if computer-controlled Drivers in your party have Blades equipped that can continue an active Blade Combo, they will automatically switch to that Blade, and the ability to activate their Special via ZL or ZR is locked until it reaches a level that can successfully advance the combo. You can figure out what level their Special is currently at by counting the number of dots circling their character portrait.

Elemental Orb XC2 Xenoblade Chronicles 2 Combat Guide

Once you finish a Blade Combo, an Elemental Orb appears to circle around the enemy and seal its potential to perform certain types of attacks. The potential you seal is determined by whatever move you finished the combo off with, while the element of the last move determines which Elemental Orb appears. You can continue to surround the enemy with additional Elemental Orbs to seal more abilities and increase your Chain Attack potential so long as you're using different elements. Trying to make an Elemental Orb of the same element as one already in play will just result in the old one getting replaced.

With the knowledge of how to complete a Blade Combo under your belt, you can take Driver Combos and Chain Attacks to a whole new level.

Driver Combos and Fusion Combos in Xenoblade Chronicles 2

Anyone familiar with the series will immediately recognize Driver Combos. These Driver Combos are essentially strings of attacks that juggle enemies, leaving them unable to attack or defend themselves.

Some of your Arts inflict additional status effects -- such as Break or Topple -- when used at the right time. If the proper order of operations isn't followed, however, the status isn't inflicted, and the Driver Combo won't properly advance. 

The order goes Break, Topple, Launch, then Smash. A Break can be activated at any time to start a new Driver Combo and must be followed up with Topple, then Launch, then finished with Smash

When Break is activated, a timer pops up on the top-left side of the enemy's health bar that slowly counts down the time you have left to continue the Driver Combo before it breaks. The Topple and Launch timers count down progressively faster than the first, though, so make sure all of the necessary Arts you need are ready.

Driver Combos and Fusion Combos XC2 Xenoblade Chronicles 2 Combat Guide

If you time a Driver Combo so that the timer for Break, Topple, Launch is active when you finish a Blade Combo, you perform what's known as a Fusion Combo. A Fusion Combo's finishing Special deals loads of damage, so make sure you look out for these opportunities.

Now that you know how to perform Driver Combos and Fusion Combos, we can talk about maximizing your damage potential through Chain Attacks.

Maximize Your Chain Attack's Potential in Xenoblade Chronicles 2

You won't be able to use Chain Attacks until they're introduced to you in the game, but you'll quickly find that they are devastating when executed just right. Once all three bars of the Party Gauge are full, you can activate a Chain Attack by pressing the + button.

With this technique, every Driver in the party gets a chance to unleash a Special with any of their equipped Blades. Additionally, this is the point where you burst down any Elemental Orbs you set up with Blade Combos. If you manage to burst Elemental Orbs, you earn extra Chain Attack rounds and can even unleash mind-numbing amounts of damage with a Full Burst if you destroy enough orbs.

In order to burst an Elemental Orb, you simply need to attack it with a Special of the opposite element during a Chain Attack. Opposing elements are as follows:

  • Fire vs. Water -- During Chain Attacks, Fire Specials burst Water Orbs, and Water Specials burst Fire Orbs.
  • Wind vs. Ice -- During Chain Attacks, Wind Specials burst Ice Orbs, and Ice Specials burst Wind Orbs.
  • Earth vs Lightning -- During Chain Attacks, Earth Specials burst Lightning Orbs, and Lightning Specials burst Earth Orbs.
  • Light vs. Dark -- During Chain Attacks, Light Specials burst Dark Orbs, and Dark Specials burst Light Orbs.

Chain Attacks and Burst Elemental Orbs XC2 Xenoblade Chronicles 2 Guide

Creating Elemental Orbs with Blade Combos and Fusion Combos and bursting them all during a Chain Attack is the key to dealing maximum damage in combat. It's a lot of setup, but the frightening amount of damage you'll deal in the end is well worth it.


Now that you have the combat system down, how do you like it? Is it fun to build up and maximize your damage potential, or does it still feel like a slog? Let us know in the comments below!

For more tips on your journey to Elysium, check out our other Xenoblade Chronicles 2 guides. Here are a few to get you started: 

Lineage 2 Revolution -- How to (Kinda) Turn Off Auto Questing Thu, 30 Nov 2017 20:38:43 -0500 Ashley Gill

There is absolutely no one saying Lineage 2: Revolution's leveling is meant to be auto quested into oblivion, but it's a boring mechanic for long-time MMO players who want to pay attention to the game and their character from start to finish.

There is no actual way to "turn off" auto questing, though you can avoid doing it if you choose to. But you're not playing the game for the leveling questing -- PvP content such as castle sieges and any of the arenas is purely player-controlled.

One might argue that players never get a chance to learn their class via leveling because it's all automatic, and that is the case to some degree. Without manually controlling your class even once for dozens of levels, you're bound to not actually know how to play your class well when you first step into PvP. Players who have manually quested for a time will find migrating into PvP a little easier.

There are two parts to tossing auto questing out the door, one is a long term option and the other is altering a habit.

How to "turn off" auto questing (kinda)

The first step is something every player has done by accident: tapping on the quest in progress to stop doing it automatically.

You can tap on a quest to start or stop automatically running to its location and fighting the target mobs. That's the first step, and it's simple.

If you are just looking to fight mobs and don't want to have to do the walking busywork, you can let a quest take you to the target location and then tap on the quest to stop auto questing and kill the mobs manually. I recommend this option, rather than manually running from place to place as the maps are rather large.

The second step requires you to go into your settings and turn off automatic counterattacking. This is as easy as tapping on 'Settings' in the top right of the menu...

... going to the 'Battle' tab, then unchecking "Automatically Counterattack When Attacked'

If you want to take it even further, you can also reduce the auto restoration settings lower or completely to zero. It's up to you, really. Find the way you like to play best by trying new things and messing with the battle settings, then get ready for the long grind to endgame.

If you're new to the game, I highly recommend taking a gander at our Lineage 2: Revolution best classes guide to get started on the right foot.

How to Play Lineage 2 Revolution on PC Thu, 30 Nov 2017 15:42:52 -0500 Ashley Gill

Let's be real: Lineage 2: Revolution is best played on PC, at least for most people.

I say this for a few reasons, which we'll get to here shortly, but don't think you have to play on ONLY your mobile device or ONLY your computer. You can hop between your phone or tablet and PC by making sure your Google or Facebook account is linked to your Lineage 2: Revolution account.

Why play on PC?

There are some distinct benefits to playing on PC rather than your phone, and there are some decent reasons to play on both platforms.

  1. The game will most likely run better on your computer than your phone
  2. You get to see more on the screen, and it's not all tiny and hard to read
  3. The UI is definitely easier to deal with on a bigger screen
  4. You can use the keyboard to play instead of tapping
  5. Swapping between mobile and PC lets you grind on the go while doing your serious playing on keyboard + mouse

Those all sound like pretty good reasons to me, especially for an MMORPG.

How to play Lineage 2: Revolution on PC

Considering how niche Android emulation is and how irritating it used to be, you may be surprised that Android emulation is actually easier than ever on the end user. You can easily get an emulator running and hop right on, provided you have at least 4GB of RAM.

There are two Android emulators people use today: Nox and BlueStacks.

I don't have any experience with Nox (official site), but I have been playing Revolution (and ArcheAge Begins) via BlueStacks on PC, and it is easy as can be. I've heard using Nox is similarly easy, but I'll be focusing on BlueStacks and its convenience for the sake of this article. Both options are free in any case.

You can download BlueStacks from its official site, on which you very well may see a banner for the game. I recommend downloading it from this section of the site to avoid compatibility issues.

Once you get BlueStacks downloaded and installed, you can search for Lineage 2: Revolution in the bar at the top right and download the game. After it's installed, you can hop right on and start playing -- make sure you log in with the same Google or Facebook account you attached to the game on your mobile device.

BlueStacks compatibility issue - Solutions

These solutions were provided by the BlueStacks team themselves, but we're going to touch on them here.

Downloading the right client

Some users are reporting that Google Play says Lineage 2: Revolution is not compatible with BlueStacks.

To avoid this, it is especially important to download the game via the recommended link. If you downloaded from the front page of the site, uninstall and download the game again using the above link. If that doesn't work, there are some other options you can try.

Adjusting settings for less than 4GB of RAM

This part is not necessary for everyone. You may have to adjust the emulator's memory usage if your PC has less than 4GB of RAM.

You can do this by clicking the downward arrow at the top right of the emulator and then clicking on Settings.

From here click on Engine.

If your "Memory (MB)" section says less than 1800 MB, scale it up to exactly 1800 MB. Restart the program.

From here (this is important), you then must delete the data and cache for the Google Play Store.

There are two ways to go about this: either download and run this executable from BlueStacks (the page it's linked on is also linked above), or do it a little more directly by following these steps:

  1. Go to the Home tab
  2. Click on 'System App'
  3. Click on 'Settings'
  4. Click on 'Apps'
  5. Find 'Google Play services,' click it, and then click on 'Clear data'
  6. Find 'Google Play Store,' click it, and then click on 'Clear data'
  7. Restart BlueStacks

Don't let the help bits in the second half of this article deter you from trying to run Lineage 2 Revolution on BlueStacks. If you download the right client and make sure to adjust the emulator's memory usage before even trying to download it, you should be in the clear to play on PC.

How to Get Red Star Rings in Sonic Forces (Stages 11-20) Thu, 30 Nov 2017 12:34:05 -0500 Sarah Elliman

Our goal is to help you find as many Red Star Rings in Sonic Forces as possible. If you need help with the previous stages, check out our guide on where to find the Red Star Rings for stages 1-10.

Stage Eleven: VS Eggman.

This is another boss battle so there are no Red Star Rings to collect in this area.

Stage Twelve: City Park Avenue
  • Ring One: You will come to a circular area with enemies lined up around the circle. Once you have defeated the enemies there will be a capsule that you will need to grab. After you have done this continue up the path and you’ll be able to grab the first Red Star Ring.
  • Ring Two: After following the natural path you will see plenty of grapple points. Using the last one you to drop down, you will be confronted by a line of enemies to the right. Once they are defeated, make your way to the left and you'll find the second ring hidden over there. You will have to jump a gap to reach the platform it is sitting on.
  • Ring Three: After collecting the second ring, if you continue to the right, you should be shot upwards onto a path that will allow you to grab the third ring.
  • Ring Four: There will be more grapple points that will send you upwards to start with, but then you will need to start grappling down. Shortly after, you'll see a spiral rail that will take you to the bottom level. After hitting all the enemies, you will go through an upside-down loop and you'll find the ring.
  • Ring Five: You will then need to grapple upwards, and after passing through some rings, you can collect the final Red Star Ring for this stage.

Stage Thirteen: Mystic Jungle Casino Forest
  • Ring One: Following the natural path, you should spot a gap between one platform and another. There will be a pink bumper and pinball bumper. If you use the pink one to push yourself towards the pinball bumper, you can then slowly drop down to get the ring.
  • Ring Two: Hit the checkpoint then re-use the pinball bumper to boost you up the the higher levels, where you'll find the second ring.
  • Ring Three: Towards the end of the stage, if you fall past some bumpers, you will hit an additional set of pinball bumpers, which will lead to a tunnel below. If you drop down to this tunnel and speed along, you should hit another booster which will send you to the right and up a ramp where you can collect this Red Star Ring.
  • Ring Four: You will then want to use a set of pinball bumpers to your right to help you get back up to the upper level, where you'll find a ramp. You need to go slightly down the ramp so that Sonic can Boost to reach the platform with the ring on it.
  • Ring Five: Go back down towards where you just came from, avoiding the pink pinball bumper, and jump into the right side net. By dropping down you will get the final ring for this section.

Stage Fourteen: Mystic Jungle Aqua Road
  • Ring One: At the start of this stage you can go through a broken barrier on the right and hit some boosters. If you go to the left, you will not be able to get this Red Star Ring. Once you’ve gone through, you should hit a few more boosters which will lead you to a ramp where you can collect the first ring.
  • Ring Two: After getting the first ring, you will have to make your way through a water slide with some enemies that will try to knock you off. If you take the right path you will come across the second ring which will be floating in the center of the path. There are rings on both the left and right paths, so to get them all you would have to come back and re-do the level.
  • Ring Three: Once you get to a checkpoint you will find a Wisp Capsule that you can use. You then want to move upwards, continually hitting enemies with the Lightning ability, which will allow you to go up the path. Here you will find the third ring next to a few red booster rings.
  • Ring Four: Once you are launched into the air from the booster, you will come to another water slide with three branches. If you take the middle path, you will be able to find this Red Star Ring from bouncing off enemies that are trying to push you off the slide.

Stage Fifteen: City Sunset Heights
  • Ring One: You’ll need to continue along the natural path until you come to a grapple point.  Head left, and you'll see the first Red Star Ring just under the arch.
  • Ring Two: Continue down this path, Boosting into multiple enemies along the way. You will eventually run into a bumper that will boost you onto another platform. You’ll naturally be able to pick up the second ring here.
  • Ring Three: You’ll need to build up enough momentum to get up the ramp onto a platform. Using this platform, you’ll want to climb higher and higher. By going to the right, you will eventually hit a brown building you’ll need to scale. After this there are three floating platforms on the roof that will bring you to the third Red Star Ring.
  • Ring Four: When you follow the natural course, you will end up grinding on a rail that will take you back down to the lower levels. Go to the right instead and you’ll see three floating platforms -- the ring is on the rightmost platform.
  • Ring Five: You will then hit multiple bumpers on your way to the end goal. Just before you pass through some rainbow rings, you will be able to collect the final Red Star Ring for the stage.

Stage Sixteen: Metropolis Capital City
  • Ring One: You will have to take out the enemies that are in front of you before you can use the grapple points to swing you around and collect the first Red Star Ring. You could be able to collect this before landing on another platform with enemies’ present.
  • Ring Two: After hitting a checkpoint, you should see a capsule in front of you that you need to run towards. You can use this to defeat the enemies in this area, and you should then be able to jump ahead and collect the next Red Star Ring. You need to collect this before the gravity has returned to normal.
  • Ring Three: Once you have avoided the laser section by running to the right and on the bottom path, you will come to another path which is filled with more lasers. If you take the left path, you’ll be able to pick up another ring and continue through the level.
  • Ring Four: After you have completed the laser section, you should drop down onto a rail that you can grind across. If you move to the left you can avoid the spikes on the rail, and you will also see the fourth Red Star Ring. You will have to quickly jump to the left rail then back to the right rail to collect the ring and avoid getting hit by the spikes.
  • Ring Five: After using the grapple to bounce off enemies to grab additional capsules, you’ll be able to get the last Red Star Ring. This will be after the second time, and you will see an enemy you can bounce off of to reach this ring.
Stage Seveteen: VS Infinite.

This is a boss battle so there are no Red Star Rings to collect in this area.


Stage Eighteen: Chemical Plant
  • Ring One: The game will naturally try to push you upwards after you've passed through the columns of rings. Instead of continuing left, drop down onto some boxes, then jump left to get to some moving platforms. This is where you will see the first Red Star Ring.
  • Ring Two: Go back to the top level and continue along the natural course until you hit the checkpoint and the upside-down loop. Here you’ll want to boost, but go towards the right platform after the ramp. Continue the along intended route and you’ll see a plume of pink water, and just beyond that the second ring.
  • Ring Three: You will then have to make your way towards the end goal and start the level again. Do the same as you would have done for the first ring, but then go to the upper level via the platforms in that area. Boost into some tubing and follow the natural course. After a line of enemies on a path, you should find the ring hiding in the corner.
  • Ring Four: Continue downwards, and as you progress, water should begin to fill this section of the level. Go to the furthest right point and use the boxes to lift you up. Past the plume of water to your left and on the right hand side is the fourth Red Star Ring. 
  • Ring Five: Use that plume of water to push you out onto the upper levels and go left. From here, follow the path across until you come to another section of water. Make your way through, and towards the end there should be a falling platform. Stand on that and the last ring for the section wilk be below it. 

Stage Nineteen: City Red Gate Bridge

Stage Nineteen allows you to collect a series of Red Star Rings all at once. It will be after you run into a Metal Sonic clone that you must chase after. When the Metal Sonic starts shooting energy pillars at you, you will be able to collect the rings as you’re running.


Stage Twenty: Green Hill Guardian Rock
  • Ring One: You'll want to naturally follow the path, which should lead you to a tunnel built into the landscape. As you go down this tunnel it will then fling you into the air where you can collect the first ring.
  • Ring Two: Continue to the right and make your way higher to the upper levels of the stage. When you reach the next level, you'll want to go left across some platforms. The second Red Star Ring will be there amongst regular rings.
  • Ring Three: You then want to lower yourself back to the ground and continue off to the right. After making your way through three lots of metal fists there will be another ring on the ledge of the landscape. You should be able to pick this up as you're going.
  • Ring Four: As you continue to travel along ring paths you will encounter enemies -- use your Wispon ability to defeat them and you'll be able to grab the ring. This ring will be floating above a bridge that can break, meaning you must be careful as you could be sent back to the checkpoint if you fall into the pit.
  • Ring Five: Continue on this path until you reach the arching bundles of rings. You'll want to follow the rings upwards until you reach the upper white platform. From there, you candrop down slightly to pick up the last Red Star Ring for this section.


Was this helpful for you? Are you able to find more Red Star Rings now? Let us know in the comments.

Pokémon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon: Complete Fossils Guide Thu, 30 Nov 2017 11:10:42 -0500 Craig Snyder

Fossil Pokémon are some of the coolest and most unique of the set. The Pokémon series is filled with interesting subsets of Pokémon, but the prehistoric ones have always seemed to really captivate the fanbase. When Twitch Plays Pokémon was a craze, quality memes like Lord Helix popped out of nowhere thanks to them.

Lord Helix may be a thing of the past, but Fossil Pokémon are back in Pokémon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon in some new and improved ways. Let's look at which Fossil Pokémon are exclusive to each game and learn how to get each of them.

How to Get Fossils in Pokémon Ultra Sun & Ultra Moon

In past iterations of the series, you'd have to make a careful choice between which fossils you'd want to invest in. In Pokémon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon, it's a bit different because you have the option of collecting the five fossils from your version of the game as well as trading for the five fossils in the other version of the game.

Another big difference from previous games in the Pokémon series is that you don't have to go through the tedious task of making your way through caves and dungeons to find these fossils. Instead, they're all available in shops in Pokémon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon.

In Konikoni City, you can find Olivia's shop. It's located at the city's crossroads, across from the Pokémon Center. Olivia's shop sells rare stones, including the fossils that can unlock these Fossil Pokémon. All of the fossils cost 7,000 Pokédollars, and you can only purchase one of each fossil.

Depending on which version of the game you're playing, the old woman in the shop will have five different fossils. In Pokémon Ultra Sun, it's Claw, Skull, Helix, Cover, and Jaw. In Pokémon Ultra Moon, it's Sail, Plume, Dome, Root, and Armor. Check out the headings below for each game to discover which Pokémon is unlocked by which fossil.

Pokémon Ultra Sun Fossil Pokémon


Anorith is a Generation III Pokémon of Rock/Bug type that evolves into Armaldo. You can get this Pokémon from the Claw Fossil.


Cranidos is a Generation IV Pokémon of Rock type that evolves into Rampardos. You can get this Pokémon from the Skull Fossil.


Omanyte is a Generation I Pokémon of Rock/Water type that evolves into Omastar. You can get this Pokémon from the Helix Fossil.


Tirtouga is a Generation V Pokémon of Water/Rock type that evolves into Carracosta. You can get this Pokémon from the Cover Fossil.


Tyrunt is a Generation VI Pokémon of Rock/Dragon type that evolves into Tyrantrum. You can get this Pokémon from the Jaw Fossil.

Pokémon Ultra Moon Fossil Pokémon



Amaura is a Generation VI Pokémon of Rock/Ice type that evolves into Aurorus. You can get this Pokémon from the Sail Fossil.


Archen is a Generation V Pokémon of Rock/Water type that evolves into Archeops. You can get this Pokémon from the Plume Fossil.


Kabuto is a Generation I Pokémon of Rock/Water type that evolves into Kabutops. You can get this Pokémon from the Dome Fossil.


Lileep is a Generation III Pokémon of Rock/Grass type that evolves into Cradily. You can get this Pokémon from the Root Fossil.


Shieldon is a Generation IV Pokémon of Rock/Steel type that evolves into Bastiodon. You can get this Pokémon from the Armor Fossil.

How to Get Pokémon from Fossils in Pokémon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon

Now that you're able to pick out which fossil you want, we need to figure out how to get the associated Pokemon from that fossil.

Head to the Pokémon Center on Route 8. From there, you want to go up until you're able to turn right into a forest. Inside of this forest, you'll find a man inside of a recreation vehicle that can revive your fossils. This is the Fossil Restoration Center.

His dialogue is a little weird, as you may expect from someone in an RV in the woods, but feel free to come back to him with as many fossils as you want, and he'll turn them into Pokémon.


Pokémon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon eliminated the stress of having to pick between limited Fossil Pokémon availability, but you're still going to have to grind and work to get your hands on the ones that belong to the game title opposite of yours.

Want more Pokémon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon guide content? Check out these:

Post-Game Guide: Getting Shiny & Oval Charms - Pokémon Ultra Sun & Ultra Moon Thu, 30 Nov 2017 10:51:21 -0500 Craig Snyder

So, you've beaten Pokémon Ultra Sun or Ultra Moon. Well done, but the game is far from over. There's tons of post-game content packed into these two new Pokémon games, and one of the most important things for you to knock out first is collecting the two Key Item charms.

Obtaining the Shiny and Oval Charms is not only part of the post-game bucket list, but doing so is going to help you progress even further into the game by obtaining new and Shiny Pokémon even more easily. Want to know how to get your hands on these two powerful items? Here's how.

How to Get the Shiny Charm in Pokémon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon

Getting the Shiny Charm requires that you complete the Alola Pokédex, which is around 400 Pokémon (not the full 800). This does mean that you're going to have to invest time in getting the Ultra Beasts and Legendaries, as they are part of Alola.

Once you've done that, go to the Game Freaks building. The Game Freaks building is on the second island (Akala), right on the main strip in Heahea City, making it accessible pretty early on into the game. Once inside the Game Freaks building, go up the stairs to the second floor, and you'll find the game director. He's the guy with the red headband.

Talk to him and he's going to give you a stamp for your passport book, the Shiny Charm, and a unique outfit: Karate Gi Jacket and Karate Gi Pants.

What does the Shiny Charm do?

The Shiny Charm is a Key Item that originally comes from Pokémon Black 2 and White 2. It increases your chance of encountering Shiny Pokémon, and you receive this effect by simply having the item in your inventory.

This increase makes Shiny encounters go from 1 in 4,096 random encounters to 1 in ~1,365. Getting Shiny Pokémon from methods like Masuda breeding will also experience an increase in probability.

How to Get the Oval Charm in Pokémon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon

Just like the Shiny Charm, the Oval Charm can be obtained in Heahea City at the Game Freaks building. Go to the second floor of this building and head to the left of the room. Here, you'll find Morimoto. Talk to him and you'll jump into a battle against Morimoto and Iwao. You can only participate in this battle after you've beaten the Elite Four.

Both of them have very high-level Pokémon, so be prepared. Upon beating them, Morimoto will give you the Oval Charm. As an additional fun fact, Shigeki Morimoto is the game designer that created Mew, and Kazumasa Iwao was one of the leads that developed Pokémon's battle system.

What does the Oval Charm do?

Just like the Shiny Charm, the Oval Charm is another Key Item originally from Pokémon Black 2 and White 2. It increases the chance of Pokémon Eggs being found at the Nursery. You experience this effect any time the item is in your inventory.

There doesn't seem to be any precise data on the increase percentage yet, but I do know that an egg cycle consists of 255 steps, and the Oval Charm chance changes every 256 steps. People have reported increases ranging from about 5% to 12%. This item is great when used in tandem with the Shiny Charm during Masuda method breeding.


With these two charms, Pokémon breeding is just about as good as it gets in Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon. Anyone who's interested in trading Pokémon needs these items, and they're really not too hard to get once you've reached the endgame.

Want more Pokémon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon guide content? Check out these:

Fire Emblem Heroes 2.0.0 Update Guide Wed, 29 Nov 2017 17:28:12 -0500 Brandon Janeway

Fire Emblem Heroes 2.0.0 is out and there is a lot of new content in the update. The new content varies from new story content to new game features and changes. This guide has all of the latest for every Fire Emblem summoner. 

New Story Map: Book II

One of the biggest features of the new update is the new book in the story maps. The new chapter continues the story of the Fire Emblem Heroes saga with a a whole new story. 

This new chapter includes Fjorm, the Princess of Ice who has her own unique and special abilities. She can be added to your party after you complete Chapter 1: Part 5 of Book II. If you are a new player, it would be good to start Book II and obtain Fjorm before starting Book I. 

Blessings and Legendary Heroes

The update includes new legendary heroes. These heroes have their own unique element that represents one of the four legendary elements: water, earth, wind, and fire. The first legendary hero you can obtain is Fjorm, which is done through completing Book II. 

A legendary hero's elements depends on their blessing. These blessings give heroes their strength and offer stat bonuses depending on their element. Once a blessing is used on an ally it cannot be removed. You can change the blessing, but the previous one will be lost.

New Feature: Weapon Refinery

This new feature requires you to complete Chapter 13, Diabolical Bloodline and the Rite of Blades Intermission Chapter. After both have been completed, Weapon Refinery can be found in Advanced Growth . 

Refining weapons costs Arena Medals, Divine Dew, and Refining Stones; however, the perks to refine weapons is worth the cost. Arena Medals and Refining Stones can also come from Events and the Arena. Special effects can now be equipped to weapons to offer a variety of effects such as increasing a character's stats. Weapon skills now have the option to be upgraded to high-level weapon skills. 

Other Features  
  • Barracks have gotten bigger by 100, which makes the new barracks cap 1,100.
  • Some special cool downs have been lowered by 1, which now makes special skills more accessible for players. 
  • High-level skill shave been added to staves
  • Arena scores have been changed to now align with Arena Assault, for Beginner and Intermediate levels.
  • Hero feathers have been added as a My Nintendo reward. 

For more information about Fire Emblem: Heroes, stay tuned to GameSkinny and let us know in the comments how you are liking Book II. 

Streets Of Riften Mission Guide for Elder Scrolls: Legends Return To Clockwork City Wed, 29 Nov 2017 11:12:22 -0500 Ty Arthur

CCG phenomenon The Elder Scrolls: Legends is now getting beefed up with whole new cards and campaign missions as the Return To Clockwork City DLC arrives.

During Episode 1: The Lost Treasure, you can take one of two branching paths, deciding to check your Thieves Guild contact for info (rather than chasing after some treasure hunters). On this particular route, you will get the frustrating Streets Of Riften mission that results in an odd duel against a Riften Lawkeeper.

Besides some unexpected new win conditions, you can't choose your deck for this battle, and he starts with 40 health to your 30. To make matters worse, a new 1/1 Imperial Grunt is summoned every turn, and a creature with Guard automatically starts on the left lane. It's a good thing that winning isn't actually your goal here!

Actually defeating the Riften Lawkeeper might be possible, but it's not really worth trying. Instead, your focus should be on committing four "crimes" during the match to sufficiently vex the guard and get yourself arrested. Since pretty much every Elder Scrolls game starts with you in prison somehow, it's a fun little nod to the franchise's history.

 Wait . . . we WANT to get arrested?

Redrawing your starting hand

This entire match is made or broken by the starting draw since you are aiming to meet specific requirements rather than get a traditional win by reducing your opponent to 0 life.

Ideally, you want a hand that includes a method for destroying a support, a way to shift a creature between lanes, and either a creature or a way to steal a card.

If you don't have a card that lets you destroy a support, and you don't have a card that lets you steal, then you should redraw your hand and start from scratch. Stealing an enemy card is critical, as there are only a handful of cards in the deck that let you do this, such as Thieves Guild Shadowfoot.

It's easy to get into a position where you have met two or three of the crime criteria but can't get the final crimes finished before dying, so a strong starting hand is crucial.

 No card stealing and no support destroying? Ditch that hand even though it has good synergy.

1. Commit vandalism by destroying a support or rune

It's unlikely you are going to get the enemy's first rune destroyed quickly due to the deck's makeup and the fact that the enemy can heal himself well above 40 life very quickly.

What's not hard, however, is to take down the Imperial Might support with a single card. Vicious Dreugh automatically destroys the support, so this will be your go-to card for completing the crime. There's a catch here -- it's very likely he'll have a new support out quickly that's even better, so be ready to finish the other crimes rapidly after playing the Dreugh.

If you never draw the Dreugh, you can take out a rune instead by using combos that increase a creature's strength when it switches lanes. Caravan Enforcer plus Moves In Shadows can quickly get you to the 5 damage needed to destroy a support, as can Dune Smuggler and any other creature.

Dune Smuggler's ability to beef other creatures is always active, so if you have him, move a card, then use Move In Shadows next; that's already +2 on the strength side.

 With Vicious Dreugh, this crime is a snap to commit.

2. Commit burglary by stealing a card

This is where you are most likely to get a bottleneck, as whether you can steal a card or not is entirely dependent on the luck of the draw, with very limited theft options available at your disposal.

The incredibly helpful Thieves Guild Shadowfoot instantly completes this crime just by being played, so you really want that card if at all possible.

Thieves Guild Shadowfoot is the key to successful theft.

3. Commit assault by wounding a card

There's an important distinction here on the assault crime -- you have to wound but not kill the creature to count as "assault," so don't discount using your weak creatures that may die in an attack.

Simply having a creature in your lane with a strength of 1 or higher be attacked counts as committing assault as well since all creatures automatically counter attack (assuming the attacking card doesn't only have 1 health and dies).

Using Curse on a creature with more than 1 health also counts as wounding, so don't just use it as a way to murder the chicken for the fourth crime if you have another way to get at the little squawker.

 Sacrificing a weak creature against a strong creature ticks a crime off the checklist.

4. Commit "murder" by killing the chicken

This fourth and final crime is harder to commit than it sounds due to the Septim Guardsman having Guard in the same lane. That lane will also quickly fill with 1/1 creatures that can eradicate anything you play, making it difficult to ever get a swing in at the chicken.

You might get lucky and draw Curse, which lets you kill the chicken outright, but that's a remote possibility. More likely you'll have to deal with the increasing crop of soldiers in that lane first. Don't let your opponent get too far ahead here or it becomes impossible to have a creature survive long enough in the lane to both kill the Septim Guardsdman and attack the chicken.

The left lane is highly guarded, while the right lane will fill up more slowly, so a good strategy is to put your creatures in the right lane where they won't get destroyed immediately, then pull them to the left lane with various abilities for a surprise attack.

An easy way to go about this is to set Caravan Enforcer in the right lane so it gets a bonus when you move it with a different card to to the left lane and destroy the Septim Guardsman or deal the death blow to the chicken. Dune Stalker is a great option for moving Caravan Enforcer.

 Kill that mother clucker!

If you are having serious trouble getting through the Guard creature, Curse plus Finish Off is a nifty combo to get through, and it only costs 2 magicka. You can also get a small army of creatures to attack by saving Murkwater Goblin for when you have Murkwater Guide already in play, since it lets you put copies of Murkwater Goblin back in your hand at no cost.

With these strategies in mind, it shouldn't take too many tries to finally take down the Riften Lawkeeper and get yourself thrown in prison. Up next of course is a prison break as you continue to the Return To Clockwork City story campaign!


Have any other strategies that have worked well in this mission? Let us know how you beat the match in the comments below! If you need help with any other aspect of this strategic collectible card game, check out our complete list of The Elder Scrolls: Legends guides.

 After a couple tries, you'll finally get this screen . . . and a new Return To Clockwork City card!

Animal Crossing Pocket Camp Tips to Camp the Day Away Wed, 29 Nov 2017 10:52:57 -0500 Ashley Gill

Holy moly, I love Animal Crossing: Pocket Camp. Yeah, okay. It doesn't have as many features as typical Animal Crossing games, and getting your friendships up is a pretty big grind, but I just can't get enough. I'm in love.

After playing over the past week and grinding it out (Level 27 now, and more to come!), I've decided to toss out some tips from me to you. Maybe you're brand new to the game, maybe you're just lost on how to do certain things -- whatever the reason or need, I've probably got some tips for you.

We're going to go over the answers to some of players' most commonly asked questions, as well as provide some additional tips to help you get along. If you find my tips helpful, please take a look at my other snazzy Animal Crossing Pocket Camp guides!

How to change clothes

Tap on the 'Items' tab, then look for the clothing icon at the top of the menu and tap it.

You can change clothes by tapping on them and then tapping -. Mix and match to get your perfect look!

How to change what you look like

Tap on the 'More' tab at the bottom right, then tap 'Settings'.

From here you can tap on the 'Edit character' button to change your hair and face.

When installing or upgrading an amenity, make sure to have animals of that same type in your campsite

When you either install or upgrade an amenity, it grants 5 points to each animal of that nature who is currently visiting your camp. That's nothing to sneeze at, especially at higher levels.

Installing or upgrading an amenity also increases the maximum friendship level you can have with the amenity's nature (cool, sporty, natural, cool). Plan your amenities accordingly.

Keep animals at your campsite for materials, let them roam free to level them up

I like having Filbert at my camp. He's a cool guy, and I've had him as a visitor since my first day. But leveling my relationship with him has been deathly slow, mostly because he hasn't had many requests.

Animals at your campsite do not have requests for you very often -- this is something you're better off finding out sooner rather than later.

You can talk to them every two hours or so to gain one point toward your friendship and get some crafting materials, but their requests will not refresh every three hours. Without requests, leveling crawls to a snail's pace.

Keep animals in your camp who grant materials you need regularly, and let the rest run free so you can level up your relationship with them. If you don't want to pay attention to all that, just make sure to rotate your camp visitors regularly.

Animals always give a particular material

Did you know each animal will always give you one particular type of material? They'll give you some extra materials of another type sometimes, but each one has a material they specialize in.

I highly recommend choosing which animals you prioritize in your campsite based on the materials they grant. Check out my Pocket Camp animal crafting material gift guide for the details on that!

Rare bugs and fish can show up anytime

This is probably my biggest problem with Animal Crossing: Pocket Camp, though it definitely makes gifting easier.

All bugs and fish can be caught at any time of day. Weather, season, and time have no effect on which collected items will appear.

Know when items in the Market Place restock/refresh

The Able Sisters sell clothes and hats while Kicks sells shoes and socks, but when do they rotate?

It seems it's random whether the Able Sisters or Kicks will be at the Market Place, but the Market Place does rotate at a steady rate. Here are the times the stock rotates:

  • 1AM Eastern, 10PM Pacific
  • 7AM Eastern, 4AM Pacific
  • 1PM Eastern, 10AM Pacific
  • 7PM Eastern, 4PM Pacific

Always fish, catch bugs, or pick fruit when you're in their respective areas

To avoid running out of any specific collected item, always be sure to do some gathering when you're in an area that will allow it.

Don't stress about your inventory space doing this -- just sell some of the items you have the most of when your inventory is full.

Absolutely buy at least one additional crafting slot

Being able to craft more than one thing at a time will speed up your progress exponentially, and at least one should be your first Leaf Ticket purchase.

I bought both and haven't regretted it one bit.

The best use of your Leaf Tickets is on inventory space

Speaking of inventory space and Leaf Tickets, you absolutely want to pump all or the vast majority of your Leaf Tickets into expanding your inventory, which you can do by tapping on the plus sign icon at the end of your inventory list.

How to use a Calling Card

Go to your 'Contacts' menu and tap an animal who is neither visiting your campsite nor on the map. You can tap the 'Call' button to be presented with the option to use a Calling Card and invite the animal to come by for 3 hours.

How to use a Request Card

You can only use a Request Card on an animal if you've already fulfilled their three requests for the three hour period they're around.

If you've already fulfilled all three requests, you can talk to the animal and choose the top option asking if they need anything. You will then be asked whether you want to use a Request Card.

If you always seem to not have enough of a certain fruit or fish, buy from friends

Having friends is pretty useful. You ask them for help to enter Shovelstrike Quarry, and you can easily check out the first part of their Market Box from the Friends menu before you decide to visit them and spend your hard-earned Bells.

Buying collected items from other players costs more than if the game sold them to you, but it's an easy way to keep your progress moving along.

To sell regularly or via Market Box? That is the question!

You can easily make more money selling your collected items via your Market Box than selling it to the system . . . but there is no guarantee people will buy your goods.

If you have a lot of friends, going the Market Box option is almost a no-brainer as long as you price your goods reasonably. But do note: Once you put something in the Market Box, you can never get it back.

Ask as many people to help you in the Quarry as you can

I recommend this not because it raises the chances of people helping you out (it does), but because of a theory that may increase your winnings in the Shovelstrike Quarry.

Though yet to be proven, the theory is that the amount of friends who help you affects the maximum Bells and Essence you can get from the Quarry. The more who help, the more you can get.

I haven't tested this extensively enough yet to say this is a certainty, as your rewards are based on the ore you dig up. After testing over another week or so, I will update this section.

You can use My Nintendo points for some tasty freebies

Did you know you can get 50 free Leaf Tickets without even trying? What about the fact you can earn My Nintendo points by playing the game and spend them on some goodies? You have to make a Nintendo account first, though.

Tap on the 'Misc' tab and then tap on 'My Nintendo' to find your way to the rewards panel.

If you tap on 'Missions' you can collect points for in-game activity and also for linking your account to your My Nintendo account and social media accounts.

This is also currently the only way to get the OK Motors jacket and cap, each costing 300 My Nintendo points. Plus there's a 5,000 Bells repeatable purchase that's way too tasty to pass up.

Is Pocket Camp eating your battery too fast? Turn on Power-Saving mode

This can be done from the 'Settings' menu found in the 'More' tab. Just head there and scroll down to find the Power-Saving Mode option.

How to see if animals will interact with an item at your campsite

You can check to see if a piece of furniture or an item can be directly interacted with by your visitors before you put it down. Heck, you can even do it just perusing your inventory.

Whether in the 'Place Item' menu or your inventory itself, tap on the item you're curious about and then tap on 'Details' to the right. Items with interactions will have something under the 'Animal Reactions' section of the item info.

This is good to know if you want to see your campers active when visiting. I know I like watching them cook!

That's it for my tips for now. If you enjoyed the tips and found them useful, please take a gander at my other Animal Crossing Pocket Camp guides to learn about fish, how to make a particularly troublesome piece of furniture, and other useful tidbits to help you on your way.

PUBG Guide: AUG A3 New Rifle Stats and Attachments List Wed, 29 Nov 2017 10:16:59 -0500 Sergey_3847

The latest patch for PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds added a couple of new weapons to the game's roster, including the Steyr AUG A3 bullpup assault rifle. This new weapon can be obtained only from air crates.

The Steyr AUG A3 rifle is similar in design to the AUG A2 but features a rail on top of the receiver and an external bolt release. This gives the AUG A3 low recoil and a high fire rate.

Follow this guide if you want to know more about this weapon's stats and compatible attachments.

AUG A3 Assault Rifle Stats

  • Ammo Type: 5.56
  • Magazine Size: 30
  • Extended Magazine Size: 40
  • Capacity: 500

The AUG A3 has four attachment slots that can be occupied by the following items:

  • Magazines:
    • Extended Mag for AR, S12K
    • QuickDraw Mag for AR, S12K
    • Extended QuickDraw Mag for AR, S12K
  • Sights:
    • 2x Aimpoint Scope
    • 4x ACOG Scope
    • Holographic Sight
    • Red Dot Sight
  • Suppressor for AR, S12K
  • Foregrip

It is highly advisable to use the AUG A3 with the Angled Foregrip attached, as it will significantly reduce the vertical recoil. It is quite manageable on its own, but with the foregrip, it will be almost absent.

Is This the Best Assault Rifle in the Game?

While the AUG A3 is a great weapon, and it is a bit better than the M416, it still loses to such rifles as the Groza and AKM in terms of power and damage. So, it's definitely a worthy choice, but it most definitely does not deserve to be a crate-only weapon.


That is it for the AUG A3 weapon stats guide, and if you're looking for more PUBG guides here at GameSkinny, then check the list below:

Summoners War: Data Transfer Failed 3001 Error Fix Tue, 28 Nov 2017 13:44:19 -0500 Ty Arthur

The popularity of mobile sensation Summoners War just exploded as the 2017 World Arena Championships were held at the Microsoft Theater in Los Angeles.

World champ Tomato -- a man of few words who only muttered "no" when asked if he wanted to comment on his victory -- took home the championship and a cool $61,000 this past week.

As more players jump into the game and start summoning their own monsters on the path to domination, a recurring issue has come to light for a segment of the player base: the inability to connect at random times.

This issue has been an intermittent problem for years now, and following all the hype of the World Championships, it has returned for a select portion of unlucky players.

Think you might have what it takes to battle with the finalists at the World Championships one day? (Thanks to SonX2 for the screenshot)

Summoners War Data Transfer 3001 Error Resolution

The issue seems to take place more frequently late at night (typically when server maintenance would be scheduled) and at peak times during siege battles.

Here's the bad news: the Summoners War 3001 bug is definitely a server-side issue on the developer's end rather than anything taking place on your mobile device. Unfortunately, that results in a frustrating "fix," since all you can do is wait for it to get resolved.

Some players have reported success in getting back into the action by rebooting their device, then turning the Wi-Fi entirely off and back on again to try to connect to a different server. This hasn't worked for most who tried the process, however. For most players, the only real fix is time (and perhaps to send an angry email for a little satisfaction).

Although most mobile app problems can be resolved this way, in this particular case, don't go through the standard troubleshooting process of uninstalling and re-installing the app. Due to how mobile games with massive player bases are saved, there's too high a chance of losing everything and having to start over when being randomly assigned a new player ID.


 The bane of any player's existence

If you recently bought a special package with a limited-time experience or mana boost, though, you should absolutely email info[at] to request a replacement or try to get your money back.

Many players have had the 3001 error prevent them from using their boost times effectively, so that's a problem the developers need to know about whenever it occurs. You can also leave a comment at the Summoners War bugs forum to let the devs know the issue is recurring.

Have you experienced the Summoners War 3001 bug, and did you come across any fixes that worked every time? Let us know in the comments!

Elder Scrolls Legends Return To Clockwork City DLC Complete New Card List Tue, 28 Nov 2017 10:46:27 -0500 Ty Arthur

Letting franchise fans explore Tamriel in a very different way, The Elder Scrolls: Legends has seen plenty of changes since coming out in Beta last summer.

We're now several expansions deep, with the impending Return To Clockwork City offering up a three-act expansion with 58 new cards to unlock over 35 story campaign missions.

Mirroring the new Elder Scrolls Online Clockwork City DLC, now you can again seek out the ancient city and find out what Sotha Sil was up to with all those cogs and steam engines.

Besides extra single-player missions, Return To Clockwork City also introduces two entirely new mechanics:

  • Treasure Hunt - offers bonuses when you play cards of specific types that match the desired "treasure," like items or actions.
  • Assemble - choose between two options for that card that also affects every other Factotum in your deck and hand. If you stack your deck with Factotums, you can create an army of overpowering creatures using surprisingly low-cost cards.

Ready to dive in and try out those new mechanics? We've got the inside scoop on all 58 new cards added to The Elder Scrolls: Legends with the Return To Clockwork City expansion!

Return To Clockwork City Neutral Cards

These are your baseline cards that take advantage of the Assemble and Treasure Hunt skills, with Treasure Map particularly useful if you have a Treasure Hunt-focused deck. With Assembled Sanitizer and a Factotum-focused deck, you can get an army of Lethal creatures.

Of course, as with most of the Neutral sets, there are some huge bruiser creatures as well for outrageous costs, which you should try to whittle down through other cards that reduce magicka cost. 

Return To Clockwork City Strength Cards

Strength doesn't get much loving this time around, with only eight new cards added, but that small number of cards can be used to devastating effect. Ratway Prospector and Aldora The Daring in particular become surprise bruisers if you can keep them alive for a few turns while completing their Treasure Hunts.

Return To Clockwork City Intelligence Cards

Intelligence gets an incredibly wide spread on the cost front, ranging from 1 to 9 magicka. Reverberating Strike can be deadly against anyone who floods the lanes with copies of the same card. Laaneth, of course, is perfect for the control freak who needs to be able to choose a specific card at the right time, although the 9 cost makes it useful only in late-game situations.

Return To Clockwork City Willpower Cards

Willpower's additions are all mid-cost cards in the 3-7 range, and they are all extremely useful. Reconstruction Engine has all sorts of uses in keeping lanes full and pulling bonuses off your creatures, while Riften Lawkeeper has got to be one of the best 4-cost cards around, giving you a solid creature with Breakthrough and an unexpected health boost to survive another round. The Mechanical Heart, meanwhile, is basically a free second life to keep you in the match!

Return To Clockwork City Agility Cards

Agility features a more mid-range spread on magicka cost than the other card types. Cog Collector can become an absolute powerhouse if you manage to keep it alive long enough. Murkwater Guide, meanwhile, will continuously bounce 0 cost cards back to you for some crazy combos, while Back-Alley Rogue is excellent for a surprise kill when your opponent thinks his big bad creature is protected.

Return To Clockwork City Endurance Cards

Endurance is all about messing with your opponent in Return To Clockwork City, with Weakness letting you throw a surprise middle finger to the enemy, and Brassilisk ripe for all sorts of insane combos if you can ping him for 1 damage and keep pumping up his health.

That's all 58 cards added to Elder Scrolls Legends with this clockwork-themed expansion! Some pretty powerful combos can be crafted with these new Return To Clockwork City cards -- what card are you most looking forward to getting in your deck, and what strategy will you be trying out when the expansion officially arrives November 30th?

Battlerite Guide: Best Destiny Build Tue, 28 Nov 2017 10:28:25 -0500 Sergey_3847

Destiny is the newest ranged champion in Battlerite. Just like any other ranger in the game, Destiny can be really hard to play with. The ultimate ability, Pinball, is sufficiently powerful but not without its own drawbacks, either.

If you're struggling to understand what kind of Destiny build you want to try out first, then follow the guide below for all the essential tips you will need in this difficult task.

Destiny Abilities Overview in Battlerite

Before deciding what battlerites to use for Destiny's loadout, let's first look at and understand all the basic abilities, ex abilities, and the ultimate ability.

Destiny Basic Abilities
  • Power Blaster: Projectile attack that deals 16 damage. Successful hits reduce the cooldown of Charged Bolt by 1s.
  • Charged Bolt: A projectile that deals 8-32 damage and inflicts Spell Block. Hold to charge a projectile for up to 1.2s to increase damage and distance. 
  • Magnetic Orb: Compresses your champion into an orb to dispel movement-impairing effects and increase movement speed by 125%. Deals 16 damage to the first enemy you hit and knocks them back.
  • Sky Strike: Counters the next melee or projectile attack. Countering an attack vaults you into the air and fires a plasma blast that deals 22 damage and knocks enemies back.
  • Plasma Wall: Deploys a Plasma Wall at target location. The barrier reduces projectile speed and snares enemies that pass through it.
  • Mega Sphere: Fires a huge energy sphere towards target location. Hitting the Mega Sphere with Power Blaster or Charged Bolt causes an explosion, dealing the fired projectile's effects to all nearby enemies along with 14 bonus damage and inflicting Fading Snare.
Destiny EX Abilities
  • Transform Weapon: Transforms your blaster into a defensive form and gain a Shield. The blaster deals 6 damage to enemies and grants a Shield to allies. Successful hits to any target grant you additional Shield.
  • Lockdown: Deploys a Plasma Prison at target location. The prison inflicts Stun to enemies that pass through its wall.
Destiny Ultimate Ability
  • Pinball: Compresses your champion into an orb and dashes forward at supersonic speed. Deals 40 damage and inflicts Stun to enemies hit. Bounces off walls up to a total of three times.

As you can see, Destiny can do a lot of basic damage with such abilities as Power Blaster, Charged Bolt, and Megasphere. This means that your loadout can focus on other features, such as Control, Mobility, and Survival.

Best Build and Loadout for Destiny in Battlerite

  • An enemy passing through Plasma Wall takes 6 damage and is rooted for 1.2s

Crowd control is no less important than dealing damage in Battlerite. If you play 2v2 or 3v3, then Sizzle can slow down the entire enemy team, taking into account that you position the Plasma Wall in the right way.

Violent Revolution
  • Magnetic Orb deals 6 bonus damage and knockback increases by 20%

In fact, no matter what kind of build you're focusing on with Destiny, you should always take Violent Revolution. You can use it in many different ways, such as disengaging or splitting your enemy team (and not just controlling your Magnetic Orb). Try it for yourself, and you will see how invaluable this battlerite is.

  • The duration of Magnetic Orb increases by 0.5s, and its movement increases by 30%

This battlerite works best in connection with Violent Revolution, but even on its own, it can greatly increase the mobility of your champion. 

Energy Conversion
  • Sky Strike grants you a shield that absorbs 12 damage and absorbs an additional 8 damage per hit

Another very good battlerite that protects your champion while in the process of dealing damage. 

Expansion Pack
  • Mega Sphere cooldown is reduced by 3s, and Fading Snare duration increases by 1s

Mega Sphere can be vital for survival in the 3v3 matches, especially against melee, and since it takes a long time to cast, reducing its cooldown becomes highly important. 


Hopefully you find this build to be optimal, and if not, then make sure to leave your own opinion on the best Destiny build and loadout in the comments section below.

Pokemon Ultra Sun and Moon Guide: How to Catch Solgaleo, Lunala, and Cosmog Mon, 27 Nov 2017 17:31:19 -0500 Autumn Fish

Solgaleo and Lunala are the box Legendaries for Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon, so naturally, it stands to reason that you would get one of them in their respective game. However, there are actually two versions of the box Legendary in your game, leaving you with the extra Pokemon you need to fairly trade with another version -- though you'll need to follow an obscure sidequest found near the end of the story to get it.

So how do you catch the original Solgaleo or Lunala, and how do you go on to find their stunt double? Let's dive in!

How to Catch Solgaleo in Pokemon Ultra Sun and Lunala in Ultra Moon

Solgaleo and Lunala become catchable in their respective versions after traveling to Ultra Megalopolis and defeating Necrozma at the end of the game. They're not found at the Altar of the Sunne or Moone, though, like they were in the originals.

Instead, travel to Iki Town on Melemele Island and make your way up towards the Ruins of Conflict. Right before the bridge where you originally met Lillie, you'll find her standing next to Solgaleo or Lunala, depending on your version. She asks you to challenge them to a battle in order to capture and travel with them.

Be sure to save before the battle in case you accidentally knock them out or want to soft-reset for better stats. Also, remember to bring a Pokemon with Synchronize in order to get the Nature you want. Catch it with the skillful toss of a Pokeball and Solgaleo or Lunala is all yours.

Now that you have your box Legendary, you can go about getting the duplicate by first finding Cosmog through an obscure sidequest.

How to Catch Solgaleo Lunala and Cosmog in Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide

How to Find Cosmog in Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon

With the newly captured Solgaleo or Lunala in your party, head back to the Altar of the Sunne or Moone respectively and interact with the Ultra Wormhole at night in the real world. (In Ultra Sun, this is the same time as night in-game. For Ultra Moon, do this during the in-game day.) You'll find a new option in the pop-up menu:

Go to the reverse world

Select the new option to travel to a different world where day is night and night is day. In the reverse world, use the Poke Ride Charizard to fly to the Lake of the Sunne or Moone on Ula'ula Island. From here, head inside the ruined building atop the lake and follow the path all the way to the end.

Once you reach the altar inside, Solgaleo or Lunala will call out to the heavens and a mirage of the opposite version's Legendary appears before them. After witnessing the event, you find Cosmog sitting atop the Altar. Simply interacting with it adds it to your team, so you don't actually have to battle it. You also receive the Z-Crystal for the box Legendary of the opposite version.

Note that you won't find Cosmog if Solgaleo or Lunala is currently fused with Necrozma, nor will you find it if you come at the wrong time of day. Also, note that the Altar of the Sunne or Moone will only be fully accessible after beating the game.

Cosmog evolves into Cosmoem upon reach level 43. At level 53, Cosmoem finally evolves into another Solgaleo or Lunala. It'll be the same as the box Legendary, so you'll essentially see doubles, but you're bound to find someone willing to trade one of their extras for one of yours.


With these Legendary Pokemon in your team, you're that much closer to completing the regional Pokedex. For more on the latest mid-gen remakes, be sure to check out the rest of our Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon guides.

Pokemon Ultra Sun and Moon Guide: How to Find the Fishing Rod Mon, 27 Nov 2017 14:09:40 -0500 Autumn Fish

By now you've likely seen a Totem Sticker or two lying at the bottom of a pond in Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon and are just dying to claim it for yourself. However, before you can add this Sticker to your collection, you must first acquire the Fishing Rod.

The Fishing Rod may not be found as early as in other games, but that's in large part because Game Freak finally got rid of the Old Rods and Super Rods in this generation. Rather, you'll find you have to play a good chunk of the game before you'll have much access to Water Pokemon or any of those pesky underwater Stickers.

So how do you find the Fishing Rod, and how do you use it when you do? Let's jump in!

How to Find the Fishing Rod in Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon

If you're still on Melemele Island, just put your nose to the grindstone and progress through the story. You won't even see a glimpse of the Fishing Rod until you're well into Akala Island, so just put it out of your mind until then.

Once you arrive at Akala, make sure you follow the story past Route 4. As you pass through Paniola Ranch and Route 5, you'll even find two more submerged stickers, just teasing you about not having your Fishing Rod yet.

After clearing Route 5, recuperate in the Pokemon Center. You're not far from finding the Fishing Rod now, but you're going to need to be ready for a serious fight on Brooklet Hill.

As soon as you begin the Water Trial on Brooklet Hill, you'll immediately receive the Lapras PokeRide so that you can traverse the area. Chase all of the Wishiwashi downstream to finally face the Totem Pokemon at the end of the path. After completing the Trial, Lana awards you with the Fishing Rod.

Remember, however, that the Fishing Rod's functionality has changed since the last generation. Instead of being assigned to a D-Pad Shortcut, you need only press the A button while facing a submerged Sticker or an outcropping of rocks where you can fish.


With the Fishing Rod in hand, you can finally catch Water Pokemon and collect submerged Stickers to your heart's content. For more on the latest mid-gen remakes, be sure to check out the rest of our Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon guides.

PUBG Guide: How to Vault Sun, 26 Nov 2017 21:20:43 -0500 Dpaige1991

At long last, Bluehole has rolled out the highly anticipated PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds (PUBG) update that allows you to perform new actions, including vaulting. It's meant to improve gameplay and open up new strategies, as you interact even more with the environment and try to survive. Wondering how to go about actually vaulting, though? Then we've got the guide for you.

What Even Is it?

PUBG is a Battle Royale game where you play as a solider, of sorts, in a vast, open battle field. The goal is to survive against other players, using a number of weapons and vehicles to help you be the last one standing. it sounds easy, but it's more difficult than it might appear. There are up to 100 players scattered through the battleground, along with various obstacles and buildings that can help or hinder you.

That's where vaulting comes in. Bluehole promised new methods of movement to help players take strategic advantage of the environment, and vaulting delivers on that promise. Some objects around the field are too tall to walk over, and jumping isn't exactly graceful or expedient. But vaulting lets you hop over with no trouble.

How Do I Vault?

Let's say you're running away from another player, and you see a tall stone wall you need to hop over. How can you do that? What you have to do is run by holding down the W Key on your keyboard, and when you are close to the object or wall, use the Space Bar to hop over the object. You can even hold you weapon while jumping, if the object is chest height or shorter. By vaulting, you can hop over hard to reach objects or through windows and use that to your tactical advantage.

Why Should I?

Why do you want to learn how to vault? Speed and dexterity are two key factors determining victory or success in the game. Over the course of a match, you will inevitably need to get somewhere fast, find cover, or something along those lines. Vaulting lets you clear obstacles or quickly exit a building, whereas previously, you'd have to walk around that annoying waist-high wall or find the door to the shanty you were hiding in. You want to make sure you learn how to vault if you really want to be the last player standing.


Learning to vault is just one key to success in PUBG. Check out our other PUBG guides for other tips and tricks!

Have you vaulted over objects already, and do you find it useful? Voice your opinion down below in the comment section, and thanks for reading!

Animal Crossing Pocket Camp: Animal Material Guide Sun, 26 Nov 2017 14:22:19 -0500 Ashley Gill

Sure, the football fish might be rare, but crafting materials are used so often and require so much effort to get, they certainly count as rare, too. This guide is for you if you want to know who to focus on to get Wood, Cotton, Preserves, and so on.

Each of Animal Crossing: Pocket Camp's animals give you certain crafting materials to be used to build new furniture for your camp. Knowing which ones grant which items will help you choose which animals to keep at your camp and which ones to focus on leveling at a given time.

Animals will give you materials under three conditions:

  • You fulfill a request for them
  • You talk to them when they've got something to say (red dialogue option seen below)
  • You level up your relationship with them

Animals staying at your campsite won't often have requests for you to fulfill, but you do get to talk to them all every couple hours to get a gift of either Bells or materials.

Having an animal at your camp is an easy and non-resource-intensive (fish, fruit, etc.) way to get materials from them with minimal effort.

We're going to be listing off each animal's primary material gift, which is the material they will always give if you meet any of the three conditions listed above.

Every animal also periodically gives other types of materials alongside its primary. For example, sometimes you may get Preserves to go along with the Wood that Bunnie usually gives. These seem to be random, but they are definitely welcome.

Animal primary gift materials

You'll notice below that, for now, there are not many animals that primarily grant Paper or Preserves. For this reason, you may want to have at least one animal for each of those materials stay at your campsite. The earliest you can get for Paper is Apollo and the earliest for Preserves is Jay.

Animals that grant Cotton Agnes (Cool)
Bitty (Cute)
Bud (Sporty)
Maggie (Cute)
Rex (Natural)
Roald (Natural)
Animals that grant Paper Apollo (Cool)
Charlise (Sporty)
Stella (Cute)
Animals that grant Preserves Angus (Cool)
Jay (Sporty)
Animals that grant Steel Beau (Natural)
Butch (Sporty)
Carrie (Cute)
Cheri (Sporty)
Cherry (Cool)
Eloise (Natural)
Fauna (Natural)
Flip (Sporty)
Goldie (Natural)
Ketchup (Cute)
Kyle (Cool)
Peewee (Sporty)
Roscoe (Cool)
Sandy (Cool)
Animals that grant Wood Alfonso (Natural)
Apple (Cute)
Bunnie (Cute)
Chrissy (Cute)
Filbert (Natural)
Hamlet (Natural)
Hopkins (Sporty)
Kid Cat (Sporty)
Lily (Cute)
Moe (Sporty)
Peanut (Cute)
Punchy (Natural)
Rosie (Cute)
Tad (Sporty)


I don't know about you, but I almost have a shortage of Preserves . . . and keeping Jay hanging around my campsite does help. Hopefully this information will make it easier for you to prioritize certain animals if you need particular materials.

If this guide helped you out and you're looking for more info on the game, check out GameSkinny's other Animal Crossing Pocket Camp guides.

Rules of Survival: Where to Land and Grab your Guns Sun, 26 Nov 2017 12:58:30 -0500 Stephanie Tang

Ever since PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds broke records and took names, the world was primed for a new era of copycat Battle Royale-style games. And man, did we get 'em!

Rules of Survival by NetEase Games is a super-detailed and very pretty dare-I-say knockoff of PUBG gameplay built for Android and iOS. It's far from the only one. The same developer also released Survivor Royale with the same premise and game design. Fortnite Battle Royale is also starting to climb the popularity ranks on console. 

The tips in this guide are quite specific to the map in Rules of Survival, however the tips offered in this guide can be applicable to all of the above games. Check it out! If you're having trouble with game performance, check out this article.

On dropping in and arming up

You begin each match by parachuting out of a plane - but you do have a fair amount of control when you jump, where you intend to land, and how fast you dive down to your destination.

In all instances, wherever you choose to drop, parachute down as fast as you can.

It goes without saying that where you drop down depends a great deal on your play philosophy: whether you intend to drop right into the action, or you start as far away from them as possible and wait for them to slaughter each other off first.

The following are not hard and fast rules, but are good places to pick up weapons as quickly as possible because very quickly; your bare hands just aren't going to cut it. 

Bitter Lake

The reason why you'd want to drop into Bitter Lake are the most obvious:

  • It is the absolute largest area on the map.
  • It's smack dab in the center which puts you at an advantageous spot to start maneuvering once safe zones start taking effect.
  • It's loaded with plenty of buildings for you to comb through for equipment.

It is also one of the busiest sections of the map and for good reason. All those buildings house some pretty fantastic weapons (I've pretty consistently found high drops of assault rifles, pistols, and SMGs in these buildings plus ammo) but if you're going to dive for them, dive fast because others are gunning for the same goods you are.

Rust Bay

The above is actually pretty good advice for all three of these places. Rust Bay is a little further away from the center of action, but loaded with weapon and equipment caches so you won't be the only player interested in touching down in this area. Be ready for combat fairly quickly.

Training Base

High risk, high rewards. This area is small and quite close to Bitter Lake where a lot of the action happens, so lots of it spills over into Training Base quite quickly. This is one of the easiest places to find a vehicle and the weapon drop isn't bad so consider getting in and getting out as quickly as you can.

Other good spots to drop in

Since the way the plane comes in at the beginning of each game changes a little every time. It's usually in your best interests to get on the ground as quickly as possible.. and sometimes that means you're hopping off far away from the areas outlined above. These are two areas more which are also okay to land in if your plane passes over them right away.

  • Research Edifice: This likely won't nab you the greatest amount of loot, but you're likely to find some basics, and you'll be in a good position to cross over into other high-occupancy areas of the map in terms of both distance and preparedness if you're quick enough at rummaging.
  • Safe Store: There's quite a few options for loot here, even high-damage weapons like assault rifles. Its close proximity to Wheat Town means spillover from players dropping down in there is likely to happen quicker than you'd like for a medium-drop area where you're going to need to scavenge a little while longer.

I've seen some other suggestions for landing areas including at Thermal Power since these are areas that don't get a lot of traffic. That's a separate strategy and if you come across a sniper rifle and scope, this can be a devastating camp spot - at least for a little while, until safe zones start closing down on you.

Wherever you choose to go, make sure that you aren't unarmed for long. Your opponents certainly won't be. If you found this guide useful, check out our other Rules of Survival guides!

Rules of Survival Guide: The Basics of Staying Alive Sun, 26 Nov 2017 12:51:26 -0500 Stephanie Tang

Even unfinished, PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds has been raking in gaming awards (most recently Best Multiplayer Game and PC Game of the Year at the 2017 Golden Joystick Awards) and Guinness World Records... so it seems self-evident that PUBG clones are bound to start popping out of the woodwork.

Enter Rules of Survival by NetEase Games - a shockingly polished mobile game available on Android and iOS that follows in PUBG's virtual footsteps almost to a T. What's truly surprising is its meteoric rise to the top of the App Store charts - and all of it without any discernible affiliation with the makers of PUBG - and how the world (so far) seems to simply shrug and go along with it.

There are a few others that have garnered a fair following including Survivor Royale also by NetEase but with half the player count, and the more arcadey-looking Fortnite Battle Royale on Xbox. Many of the play tips that apply to Rules of Survival in this article and these tips for PUBG will also apply to the above games.

On playing mobile

This game is pretty cool for those players who are constantly on the go and can't stay tethered to a PC or Xbox for long... although I would argue that if you're in it for the win, you're in it for the long haul, and no 15 minute morning commute is going to land you a winner, winner, chicken dinner.

(No, the game doesn't actually go so far as to say that on the win screen, but they do inform you that you're downright savage!)

  • Keep a charger handy for this one if the games start to get long. Players should be aware that like many good-looking mobile games, Rules of Survival is going to eat into your battery life.
  • Try to find somewhere you won't be distracted. Not always possible, but a train full of jostling elbows is not going to help your aim, which is already going to be complicated by the fact that you're using virtual controls, not a controller or mouse and keyboard.
  • Take some time to play around with the control schemes. This game has put a ton of effort into customizing controls. Even if you like the default controls (and even I, as one of those oddball players that play on default on nearly every other game in existence, decidedly did not), you should at least check out the Advanced menu and turn on "double tap to turn around."
  • Learn the controls before you play for real. Hard as they tried to make this easy to play, virtual controls are not the same as physical - you are very much limited to confining almost all play to your thumbs, even more so than on controller. Aiming, moving, shooting, and trying to look around is clunky and difficult. (Tip: If you start off at a sprint for a few seconds, the game will lock it on, allowing you to switch over to other maneuvering/action buttons.)

Get moving

Be careful about the terrain that you're in... it goes without saying that the more open the area, the more vulnerable you are.

  • When in tall grass, if you really want to move fast through it, at least keep yourself crouched as you run. You can also choose to go down on a belly crawl if you're more concerned about not being seen at all.
  • Use the terrain to your advantage. Hills, buildings, stick close to them to avoid being seen for as long as possible.
  • It's okay to stay hunkered down in a building for a little while while the initial murder spree is happening. Keep on your toes in case anyone else decides to enter your particular house, but  it's not a bad idea to wait it out a little while to scavenge and organize first.
  • Watch the map. You'll want to open this up from time to time (make sure you're under cover when you do), because the safe zones will change and so will bombardment zones. The HUD will give you some indications, but don't ever forget the big picture stuff when location is so important.

Pick your supplies

Don't let the fact that you pop into the map bare-fisted and swinging worry you. There's plenty lying around for you to pick up, so it's okay to be a little discerning about what you do. As a pack rat and perpetual "but what if"-er myself, this was a particularly hard thing to learn.

  •  Choosing guns: Unless you're firmly planted in a sniping spot with a rifle, spray and pray is largely how you're going to get to the top of the scoreboards in this game. Handguns are nice to have, but you're likely going to want a little more punch and a bigger clip and precision shooting is hard on mobile when you've got to keep moving while you're shooting.
  • Armor up! Anything that can take some of the hit for you is definitely worth having. Grab what you can. 
  • Don't pick up what you don't need. You've got limited capacity, don't clog it up with ammo of the wrong type or too many bandages. Prioritize!
  • Shut the door behind you when you walk into a house and listen for sound cues of other people horning in on your territory.

Stick with your team

While gunning solo might be the most true-to-form Battle Royale style, the game offers the chance to play in duos and a team of four. If you choose these modes, stick to that strength! Having someone else to rely on vastly ups your odds.

Keep these things in mind when you're considering running off: 

  • It's possible to revive you if you get downed. 
  • It's much, much easier to set up a camp spot when you've got extra scavenger hands and extra eyes at your back. 
  • If you're going to range in a vehicle, you're going to want someone around that can provide you adequate cover fire. 
  • It's possible to play with friends! If you can coordinate, you have a huge advantage already over pretty much any and all other teams.

Of course, the opposite is also true. If all of you stay stuck to each other, you have a much higher chance of getting wiped out together too. Who knows who could sneak up on you with a grenade.

Stay close, but not on top of each other. Play it smart!

Other things to note

  • Don't hack: It should go without saying that this tactic is lame and a pathetic way to land on the scoreboard. There are a few hacks out there already; I've seen a few that will drop your recoil down to nothing, for example. But it requires .apk downloads, workarounds, and usually more access to fishy software than I'd want on my own personal phone. Really, let's just not. 
  • Slow and steady: It's an Aesop's fable, but it's also a truism of this game type. If you look like you're going to lose a firefight, bug out. Live longer; someone else may come along to kill that guy for you. You can always heal up if you're hurting, but not if you're dead.
  • Play the odds with loot drops. Occasionally loot crates will drop from the sky with supplies. When faced with these, lots of players get struck by loot fever and run for them - even if they're way out in the open. If you're looking to narrow the playing field, getting yourself situated and picking off these looters may get you some of your best kill streaks.

Got all of the basics down and want some advice on where to parachute in and where to get your hands on the best guns? Check out this guide!

If you're having issues with game performance, check out this article.

Good luck, and fight smart!

Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide: Pokemon Natures Sun, 26 Nov 2017 12:29:35 -0500 Joshua Broadwell

The recently released Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon have received high praise and drawn many back to the long-running franchise with their mix of nostalgia and innovation.

If you haven't picked up a Pokemon title since Silver and Gold or, like this writer, never really paid that much attention to some of the finer points in the games, like natures, you might be thinking Sassy, Quirky, and Impish are the leftover dwarves from Snow White no one ever talks about. But there's a lot more to natures than imparting an element to personality to your Pokemon, as they can significantly affect how your Pokemon grows.

What Are Pokemon Natures?

Natures were first introduced in Generation III (Ruby, Sapphire, and Emerald), and most affect a Pokemon's stat growth. 20 of the 25 natures raise one stat and decrease one, and there are five neutral natures that don't affect anything. Managing natures is particularly useful for those wishing to enter the competitive scene, but it has benefits in normal gameplay too, especially if you like to use your favorites, instead of strong Pokemon only.

For example, Yungoos naturally has low Defense (and low everything else except Attack, for that matter). If you want to use it and still have a good chance of success, a Relaxed or Impish nature would be ideal, since both raise Defense by up to 20 points over time, compared to a hindering or neutral nature, and they lower a stat that isn't as important for Yungoos.

Natures are randomly assigned when the game generates a Pokemon, be it in the wild, an in-game trade, or through breeding. Random it may be, but if you're breeding Pokemon and attempting to obtain a specific nature, having the male or female hold an Everstone ensures the offspring will share their respective nature. That applies to any Pokemon game after Black 2 and White 2, with different mechanics in place for earlier games.

Stat Overview and Nature Chart

In case you're new to Pokemon, here's a short rundown of each stat.

Attack and Defense are both related to physical moves, with attack determining how much physical damage your Pokemon can dish out, and defense relates to how much it can take. Special Attack and Special Defense are the same, but for special moves--the ones with the purple spiral in a move description, such as Psychic. And Speed, if you haven't already guessed, determines turn order and which Pokemon goes first in a battle.

The below Pokemon nature chart (of sorts) groups natures by which stat they raise and lists the lowered stat as well.

Attack Group


  • Raises: Attack
  • Lowers:  Defense


  • Raises: Attack
  • Lowers: Speed


  • Raises: Attack
  • Lowers: Special Defense


  • Raises: Attack
  • Lowers: Special Attack
Special Attack Group


  • Raises: Special Attack
  • Lowers: Special Defense


  • Raises: Special Attack
  • Lowers: Defense


  • Raises: Special Attack
  • Lowers: Attack


  • Raises: Special Attack
  • Lowers: Speed
Defense Group


  • Raises: Defense
  • Lowers: Speed


  • Raises: Defense
  • Lowers: Special Attack


  • Raises: Defense
  • Lowers: Attack


  • Raises: Defense
  • Lowers: Special Defense
Special Defense Group


  • Raises: Special Defense
  • Lowers: Defense


  • Raises: Special Defense
  • Lowers: Attack


  • Raises: Special Defense
  • Lowers: Special Attack


  • Raises: Special Defense
  • Lowers: Speed
Speed Group


  • Raises: Speed
  • Lowers: Defense


  • Raises: Speed
  • Lowers: Attack


  • Raises: Speed
  • Lowers: Special Attack


  • Raises: Speed
  • Lowers: Special Defense
Neutral Group
  • Hardy
  • Docile
  • Serious
  • Bashful
  • Quirky


Whether you're playing just for fun or you're planning on entering a competition, understanding Pokemon natures will get you that much closer to being a true master.

Will you be paying careful attention to your Pokemon's natures from now on? Let us know down in the comments and be sure to check out our other Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon guides!

5 Animal Crossing: Pocket Camp Tips for Beginners Fri, 24 Nov 2017 15:55:38 -0500 spacechaser

At long last, Animal Crossing: Pocket Camp is out! After getting through the tutorial, you may be wondering, "What's next?" Well, here are a few pointers to keep in mind as you start crossing those animals.

1. Head to OK Motors for one free camper makeover.

The kind birds at OK Motors are more than happy to help you customize your camper! When you start the game, you can only change its colors, but the more you play, the more customization options you unlock.

2. Don't be afraid to pick up loads of items.

Try to pick up multiples of a variety of items. Sooner or later, you'll find an animal or two that will ask you for them. You start with an inventory capable of holding 100 items, and that number increases at specific level milestones. If you find yourself having trouble holding all your items, don't be afraid to list them for sale, or to sell them to the vendors in the market place.

Chances are, your friends just cannot get monarch butterflies to spawn, and seeing one or two in your market box will save their hide!

3. Once you have acquired an animal, you can remove their coveted items.


Love the look of an animal but LOATHE the items you need to invite them to your camp? Easy -- once you've successfully invited them, chuck out their furniture! You do unfortunately waste bells, resources, and time in crafting those items, but you can always hold onto them in case another animal needs them, or sell them to vendors at the Market Place to regain a few of those bells.

4. You don't have to stay married to the "style" of camp you pick at the beginning.

No matter how you answer the questions at the beginning of the game, you'll be able to build any and every kind of furniture you want. The only things that question determines are what furniture Isabelle gives you and what animal you'll befriend first. 

5. Keep helping animals even after they've started visiting your camp.

Help as many animals as you can, and you'll be leveling up and bringing in bells like crazy! I like opening the map and checking every area to see what folks are needing. That way I don't have to go to every area and talk to the animals to see what they need.

Have fun! The more you play, the more you'll streamline certain activities and figure out what works best for you. I've spent a lot of time playing so far (as you can tell by my level hiking up so dramatically between screenshots), so stay tuned to GameSkinny for more Animal Crossing: Pocket Camp tips and tricks!

Shadow Of War Rebellion Guide Fri, 24 Nov 2017 15:36:01 -0500 Ty Arthur

A much larger and more expanded version of its predecessor, Middle-earth: Shadow Of War will have you juggling multiple armies of orcs as you defend territory and siege enemy fortresses.

Our reluctant ring wraith Talion learns an uncomfortable truth during the Bruz story missions: orcs and ologs you have dominated can later turn against you! It turns out Celebrimbor's ring of power isn't quite as unstoppable and overpowering as he thought. 

Shadow Of War betrayals are somewhat of a controversial system, since they give you things to do and keep the game interesting after conquering forts, but they can also mean you may lose an orc captain you spent a lot of time grooming and improving through pit fights and training orders.

It's best to think of orcs as a disposable resource and not as a buddy to get invested in as you conquer Mordor. Even if you've assigned an orc a mount and gang of defenders, and given them a special weapon, they may still decide it would be better if they were in charge instead of you!

While betrayal segments already occurred in the standard base game, Shadow Of War patch 1.06 added in the revamped rebellion system (in addition to the much-requested endless siege mode that takes place after Act IV). Below, we cover everything you need to know about how rebellions take place.

 Skoth leads a three-orc rebellion against Talion in Gorgoroth

Shadow Of War Rebellion System

Rebellion now makes a little more sense and has some more rhyme and reason than in the original launch version of the game. Previously, the betrayal mechanics were highly randomized just like everything else in the Nemesis system, to the point of absolutely baffling some players.

For instance, you could remove an orc from the Overlord position running a fort and demote him, force him to kill a blood brother, and all around treat him like garbage, but he might never betray you.

On the flip side, an orc captain you made into your bodyguard and frequently sent out on missions might betray you out of the blue and scream about feeling undervalued and unused.

While some of the randomization is still present in this system, now there's a specific triggering circumstance to multiple betrayals at once. Rebellions are now most likely to occur if most or all of the Army board in a specific region is dominated.

Rebellions due to total board control will usually see two to four orcs or ologs betraying you at the same time to tip the scales of the region and bring in new blood.

If you want to avoid large-scale rebellions as much as possible, only dominate a handful of orcs at a time, and leave the rest of the board under Sauron's control so you can grab them as needed at a later time. Keep in mind there's still the random element, however -- there's a small chance of a rebellion even with only a handful of orcs on your roster.

These rebellions are also now capped, so you won't see five or more betraying orc captains ganging up on you all at once as has happened for some unfortunate players. 

 Seregost is ripe for rebellion as most of the board has been dominated by Talion

Have you lost your favorite orc or olog-hai to rebellion, and how many betrayals did you get hit with at once? Tell us your Shadow Of War tale of woe in the comments section! Special thanks to the Shadow Of War development team's live stream for the rebellion screenshot.


Having trouble with any other aspect of this huge exploration across Mordor as a conquering Nazgul? Be sure to check out our other Shadow Of War guides below:

How to Craft the Lovely Pink Remake of the Lovely Chair in Animal Crossing: Pocket Camp Fri, 24 Nov 2017 15:29:15 -0500 Ashley Gill

Most of the stretch goals you have to complete in Animal Crossing: Pocket Camp are pretty self-explanatory. You know -- harvest fruit, have a whole furniture set in your camp, use certain items. Easy stuff. But one goal is more obtuse, and those with no other stretch goals left are wondering how you complete it.

The stretch goal in question is "Craft the Lovely Pink Remake of a Lovely Chair," which just sounds bizarre to an old player like me who hasn't played any Animal Crossing games heavily since Wild World. What does that even mean?

Let's get into how you can even unlock crafting a Lovely Chair (Lovely Pink), which is more time consuming than anything else.

Be at least level 19 and have met Agnes or Bitty

In order to unlock being able to even craft this item, you need to have unlocked one of two villagers: either Agnes or Bitty.

Both Agnes and Bitty unlock the Lovely Pink variation for the Lovely Chair, but you only need to know one of them. Both of them unlock at a random level after level 19.

Luckily enough, this is also an item you need to get them to visit your campsite, so consider all this to be killing three birds (sorry, Jay) with one chair.

Craft or have a Lovely Chair

If you've met Bunnie, you'll have the recipe for this. If you've gone through the motions to get her to come to your campsite, you'll have made one of these anyway.

You need 30 Steel and 1480 Bells to craft the Lovely Chair (Basic) itself. Crafting it takes 7 hours, so plan ahead!

Making the Lovely Chair (Lovely Pink) will consume the basic variation.

Craft the lovely pink remake of the Lovely Chair

If you've fulfilled the criteria above, you will be able to go into the crafting menu and make this item. It will be easy enough to find!

Crafting the Lovely Chair (lovely pink) requires a Lovely Chair (Basic) as well as 10 Steel. Crafting is a three-hour-long endeavor, so keep it in mind.

And that, my friends, is how you craft the Lovely Chair Remake. It's a lot more simple than it seemed, right?

If you found this information helpful and are hungry to know more about getting around in the game, check out GameSkinny's other Animal Crossing: Pocket Camp guides.

Animal Crossing: Pocket Camp Fish Guide Fri, 24 Nov 2017 14:41:39 -0500 Ashley Gill

You may come into Animal Crossing: Pocket Camp expecting the fishing system to be similar to other games in the series, but you're in for a surprise.

Like many of the game's other systems, Pocket Camp's fishing, and the aquatic life it entails, has been simplified for the mobile experience. Nonetheless, there are things to know about fishing you'll probably want to store in your memory banks.

There aren't a lot of fish to be found in the game at the time of writing, but that is sure to change with updates. Because you need so many items to give the camper animals, it's a good idea to fish whenever you visit the two areas that allow it.

Differences from mainline Animal Crossing games

If you've been dipping in and out of the series for as long as I have, you probably have some expectations about fishing. Let's go ahead and dash those now:

Fish spawns are not tied to time of day, season, or weather in Pocket Camp.

This can be a bit of a downer for those who enjoy the thrill of the fish-hunt like I do, but for those with a tight schedule, this means they don't have to wait until the time is just right to get certain fish.

You also cannot scare fish away in the game -- so feel free to run right past them. They won't go anywhere.

And lastly, every fish will turn and go to your fishing line if tossed near them, regardless of rarity.

Getting a rare fish in Pocket Camp is just about getting lucky, as there's always a chance a fish spawn will be rare.

Fish available in Lost Lure Creek (Freshwater)

Lost Lure Creek hosts two fruit trees, but the main reason you come over here is to add some freshwater fish to your inventory.

Common fish

These fish will bite regularly.

Pale Chub
Sells for 10 Bells

Yellow Perch
Sells for 10 Bells

Crucian Carp
Sells for 10 Bells

Rare fish

These fish bite less often but sell for significantly more than common fish. These are listed in order of rarity.

It's a good idea to hold onto one rare fish just in case, but I've yet to get a single request for a single rare fish from a camper. Something to keep in mind.

Black Bass
Sells for 100 Bells

Rainbow Trout
Sells for 1500 Bells

Sells for 4000 Bells

Fish available in Saltwater Shores (Saltwater)

There's a lot more to collect at Saltwater Shores than Lost Lure Creek. Shells, coral, coconuts, and fish -- that's certainly a longer list.

This area's rare fish tend to be even harder to find than those in Lost Lure Creek.

Common fish

Horse Mackerel
Sells for 10 Bells

Sells for 10 Bells

Olive Flounder
Sells for 10 Bells

Rare fish

These fish bite less often but sell for significantly more than common fish. These are listed in order of rarity.

It's a good idea to hold onto one rare fish just in case, but as mentioned above, I've never gotten a single request for them.

Red Snapper
Sells for 100 Bells

Sells for 1500 Bells

Football Fish
Sells for 3000 Bells

Sells for 5000 Bells

These all make for a total of 13 fish for you to catch and make good-ish use of. With luck, more will be added with updates. But as it stands, this is what we've got.

The big question for most players is what they should do with rare fish for the time being. I've seen players well above levels 30 and 40 stating they've never had requests for rare fish. Being at level 20 myself, I'm inclined to believe it.

For the time being, I recommend holding on to a single of any rare fish you get and selling the rest. Why waste inventory space on items you can't use when you can make bells off them instead?

More fish will be added here as they are added to the game! If you found this guide helpful, you may find some useful info in the other Animal Crossing: Pocket Camp guides on GameSkinny.

Shadow Of War Endless Siege Survival Guide Fri, 24 Nov 2017 13:16:11 -0500 Ty Arthur

Two months after release, most players are now nearing 100% completion on the Lord Of The Ring's unofficial prequel Middle-earth: Shadow Of War. If you've already acquired every skill for Talion and thoroughly dominated every fortress in your bid to stop Sauron's shadow from spreading, there's good news, as new content just arrived for everyone in patch 1.06.

Even if you didn't buy the DLC or season pass, all players now have access to the updated endless siege system, which lets you play out as many fortress siege defenses as you want from now to eternity.

Ready to get started in a non-stop stream of huge battles? Below we cover everything you need to know to survive each of those sieges and come out with some awesome loot.

Starting Shadow Of War's Endless Siege Mode

The newly added endless siege mode is an extension of the 10-stage Shadow Wars segment in Act IV that leads to the game's true ending. If you've done the Shadow Wars, then you pretty much know what to expect from endless sieges.

If you haven't gotten that far yet, then first complete the Shadow Wars to gain access to the new sieges. Each additional siege in this new mode is initiated in the same way as before, by going to a mission start point at the front of a fortress in any region.

Although players in the forums have been hounding the developers to turn endless siege mode into something more like a power struggle mission -- where it takes place with or without you in a set number of turns -- at the moment, that's not how the system works. You get to choose the time of the siege, which means you have infinite time to prepare.

As always, the Nemesis system picks randomized orcs for these sieges, so you may actually end up fighting fewer Legendaries and Epics than you did in the Shadow Wars ... or you could end up against a flood of higher-level orcs with insane defenses. It's all the luck of the draw.

 Starting a new siege

Preparing for Shadow Of War's Endless Sieges

Victory in any siege is usually determined before the battle even starts by thinking ahead and planning according to your enemy's capabilities. Before getting into strategy though, you want to have every orc defender on your walls at your current maximum Talion level.

Be sure to scour the area for high-level orcs and place them on your fortress walls in the Army screen. If they lag behind you in level, throw them in pit fights or send them on power struggle missions to increase their abilities.

If leveling up old captains is taking too long, of course you can always kill your current roster and then recruit new ones that show up by advancing time at a Haedir tower. This is all made much easier if you put a fully upgraded wealth rune on your ring, as that automatically increases a dominated captain's level by 5!

If you have the Slaughter Tribe Nemesis DLC, the Slaughter tribe missions are incredibly helpful on this front, as those captains are almost always at your level or higher.

 The wealth rune is your friend when it comes to recruiting orcs

Don't forget about the loot boxes here, either (and I don't mean those higher-quality ones that cost real money). Shadow Of War absolutely throws in-game Mirian at you in a constant flood, and you can use that to buy the standard loot boxes that come with two captains and a training order.

Always having a steady supply of captains around your level is helpful, but it's the training orders that you really want to get your hands on. Training orders give your captains bonuses such as a flaming weapon, a new skill, a mount, or even a gang of defenders.

This can turn a standard orc captain into a powerhouse instantly. A ranged captain mounted on a caragor with a cursed weapon and a gang of olog-hai defenders is nothing to sneeze at.

After selecting the mission, always be sure to choose the option to select siege defenses, even if you did that in the Army screen already. The reason to go back is that you can see every single attacking enemy captain and get their full stats without having to go through the normal process of hunting down a Worm.

The advantage here can't be overstated. Use that knowledge to tweak your defenses, and swap out your defenders for maximum effectiveness. For instance, if several of the attacking captains have the Beast Fodder weakness, obviously swap out your defenses to include caragors, and then put in orc captains who come with a gang of caragors. Even if they are lower level than your current defenders, they will take out the attacking captains much more quickly.

On the opposite side, if several orc captains are immune to fire, there's not much point in having fire walls, flaming arrow archers, or caged drakes in your defenses, and you might as well switch your summon ability from drake to graug or spiders.

Finally, always be on the lookout for the "No Chance" skill on the list of an orc captain's strengths. This is the kiss of death in siege mode since Talion dying in a fight immediately ends the siege. Even if you have perfect defenses, this can cost you a fortress very unexpectedly.

 Checking enemy strengths and weaknesses

 Surviving Shadow Of War's Endless Sieges

Every single time a siege begins, Talion's first order of business should be to take out the siege beasts by hitting the glowing blue weak points with arrows to blow up their ammo. This drastically reduces the pressure on your capture points since your defenders won't be getting pounded by fire, poison, or curse ammo hurtling out of the sky.

Assuming you don't miss at all, that means you'll be down 4 elf shot when you take on the first orc captain, so keep that in mind if you are fighting someone who is immune to executions or stealth.

 Focusing fire on the siege beasts from the battlements

After the beasts, it's time to hunt down each captain and let your orcs worry about defending the capture points. This just can't be overstated -- unless it's a high-level legendary captain and you want new loot, do not ever kill the enemy captains!

You are basically giving away a free resource by killing captains. Instead, dominate them and then set their order to "stay and fight for me." This shifts the battle decisively in your favor, turning captains against their former troops and replenishing your reserves in case any of your captains have been killed.

Finally, remember how we mentioned orcs with the "No Chance" skill? Never tangle with these guys in close melee combat, as siege battles are too chaotic to leave to chance when that orc can immediately kill you with one lucky shot. Take them out from range up on top of a building, or if they are arrow-proof, summon a graug or your bodyguard to deal with that orc.


Those are all the basics you need to know to survive every single endless siege battle the game can throw at you! If you need help with any other part of the game, from picking Talion's best skills to finishing off those elusive Bruz quests, check out our full list of Shadow Of War guides here.

Have any other tips for us to try out in siege defenses? Let us know your preferred Shadow Of War siege strategy in the comments below!

How to Deal With Pirates in Endless Space 2 Fri, 24 Nov 2017 12:53:08 -0500 Sergey_3847

Endless Space 2 offers an entire arsenal of ships and infantry troops to help you deal with various threats plaguing the unexplored universe. One of the biggest such threats is the pirate fleet, which you may encounter completely randomly during the campaign.

The pirates are absurdly overpowered, and if you can't find a way to deal with them, then take a look at the step-by-step guide below for some essential tips that should help you out.

Step 1: Create and Send Out Scout Ships

Scout ships are a must when it comes to detecting a pirate base before it reveals itself and attacks you. Scouts are cheap, as they don't need any armor or fancy weapons, so create a few and send them before turn 11, which is when pirates start attacking.

Pirate bases usually spawn one jump from home systems or systems with planets. This should give you a sense of where to send the ships and look for the base.

Step 2: Adjust Your Hero Ship Design

Assigning a Hero Ship is absolutely necessary for increasing your ground army's value. But first, you must make a few changes to its design before venturing into the battle with pirates:

  • The Hero Ship must have enough speed to maneuver around the pirate fleet that will try to defend the base, so give it two engines.
  • Remove the default weapons and set up rocket launchers instead.
  • The Hero Ship must be well protected, so make sure that the armor is attached.

Step 3: Prepare for the Battle

Before the battle begins, you can make a few more adjustments in your game menu in order to increase your damage. 

  1. Go to "Military Overview"
  2. Choose "Battle Tactics"
  3. Activate "Barrage Fire"

The last thing you need to do before the battle starts is to activate the fleet action "Guard," a necessary defense mechanism in this situation.

Step 4: Fight for Victory

Before arriving at the pirate base, use the "Barrage Fire" tactics to eliminate the pirate fleet, which will grant you +2% damage at long range per enemy ship.

As soon as you're done with the fleet, activate the "Ground Battle" plan once you arrive at the pirate base. When the battle starts, use the "Preemptive Bombing" on all turns.

This should be sufficient enough to deal with the pirates in Endless Space 2.


If you're also looking for some help on how to use probes in Endless Space 2, then refer to the guide below:

Jurassic Survival: T-Rex Nest Event Guide Thu, 23 Nov 2017 13:03:59 -0500 Craig Snyder

Jurassic Survival is a mobile MMORPG that's extremely similar to the popular Last Day on Earth: Survival, often even referred to as "Last Day on Earth with dinosaurs". It's a game where death isn't permanent, but it is punishing in a way where surviving should be your primary objective.

Having been out for less than two weeks, we're all still figuring the game out and one of the most valuable finds so far is that there are events with big rewards. One of the first, and current, events is the T-Rex Nest Event, and in this guide I'll show you how to complete it.

How the T-Rex Nest Event Works

Upon entering this area on the world map, denoted by the T-Rex marker, the game does a quick job of running you through text prompts that roughly explain how the event works.

It can get a little disorienting and confusing trying to watch your step while reading along, so I'll explain in detail.

When in the T-Rex nest map, the objective is to stealthily creep around and eventually collect the T-Rex egg. The egg can contain three things when you loot it: an egg, egg pieces, or scales. It's worth noting that the egg you get here can't be used for the Incubator.

On this map, there are also 2–3 chests that are randomly spawned. These chests contain materials and even weapons. There are also two T-Rex on the map, and your core objective is to avoid them.

Best Way to Complete the T-Rex Nest Egg Event

The main mechanic is the usage of the bushes scattered all around the map.

When you're in the bushes, the T-Rex won't see you and therefore you won't aggro it. Aggroing the T-Rex is basically a guaranteed death, so the option of just running through this map isn't there. You've got to be patient and careful.

There is an aggro meter that will display above your character when you get too close to one of the T-Rex in your map. When it's not completely full, as shown above, you still have time to escape and drop aggro. When it becomes full and red, the T-Rex is fully aggro'd onto you and you have a few seconds before it simply tramples you to death.

There are two ways to escape dying like this, and it's very likely that you're going to need to abuse them at one point:

  1. Simply exit and re-enter the map.
  2. Close the Jurassic Survival app entirely and reopen it.

I won't be the one to determine if option #2 is "cheating" or not, but as it's currently an in-game mechanic I do suggest that you take full advantage of it. When one T-Rex is aggro'd onto you, any other T-Rex in the map will simply ignore you as you walk past. This is useful information for when you intend to escape by running out of the map.

The general strategy is to roam the map with your eyes set on the chests, not the egg. It's likely that you're going to find the egg along the way, anyway. With it being random between how many chests there are, either two or three, it can be a little tricky to determine when you're done searching. If you find three, you're done. If you find two, I'd continue searching for a few more minutes until you're confident that there are no more or you've found the egg.

Above is what the egg looks like on the map. On your minimap, it will simply appear as a yellow egg.

Where to Use the T-Rex Nest Egg Materials

The drops you get from the T-Rex egg can be taken to your Dealer and exchanged for valuables.

As shown above, 10 Green Scales can be exchanged for a Pistol, five egg pieces can be changed for an Ice Axe, and two eggs can be exchanged for a Pan. These three items are extremely useful for your survival, so I highly recommend putting in the time to get what you can out of this event while it lasts.


Take advantage of this event while it lasts. With Jurassic Survival being brand new, no one really knows what to expect as far as how long this event will be available for. Leave me a comment below if you have any questions or would like to talk about Jurassic Survival!

Hand of Fate 2 - How to Riposte Thu, 23 Nov 2017 12:58:55 -0500 Allison M Reilly

Defiant Development's latest game, Hand of Fate 2, has been receiving stellar reviews ever since it came out in November 2017. The game builds upon many mechanics from the first title, Hand of Fate, while also introducing new ones. One of the new mechanics is the riposte, a type of counter attack that some players are finding difficult to execute. Are you having trouble with the riposte? Here's how to do it in Hand of Fate 2

How to Riposte

To riposte, immediately press the attack button after pressing the block button. It is a 1-2 button press with tight, precise timing.

If the riposte is successful, then the character will perform an attack animation different from its normal animation. Yellow numbers will also appear above the enemy's head to indicate the increased damage from a successful riposte.

How Not to Riposte

In Hand of Fate 2, riposting isn't possible in every instance. Below is a list of cases where riposting will not work.

  • Button mashing will cancel a riposte (Executing a successful riposte takes timing)
  • Don't hold the block button as it will also cancel a riposte
  • You can't riposte with a heavy weapon
  • You can't riposte with some weaker daggers against Northerners as their attacks cause the player to stagger too much
  • Not all attacks trigger a riposte as some can only be dodged.

Riposting with a Sword and Shield

Many players are having the most difficulty riposting against Northerners, but riposting against them is the exact same technique as riposting against other enemies. The only major difference is you can't riposte against them with dueling weapons. Players can riposte against Thieves with dueling weapons.

These tips and the attached videos should help you perfect your riposte in Hand of Fate 2. The move is tricky, but not impossible. It just takes practice to get the timing right. Hopefully, seeing the riposte in action will give you a better idea of how to do it properly.

Dissidia Final Fantasy NT: Character Guide Thu, 23 Nov 2017 10:29:17 -0500 Lauren Harris

Square Enix has partnered with TeamNinja to bring a port of the 2015 arcade game, Dissidia Final Fantasy NTto a whole new audience. This new evolution of squad based battles will release on January 30 2018, exclusively for the PlayStation 4.

Like previous entries in the series, Dissidia Final Fantasy will consist of fast-paced, strategic brawls with over 20 classic Final Fantasy heroes and villains available as playable characters. Each character is assigned to one of the four classes in the game -- Vanguard, Assassin, Marksman, or Specialist.

In an official announcement from publisher Square Enix, it was revealed that there will be no Story Mode and no cross play between Arcade and PS4. They added that the game will have a 3v3 battle system with additional PS4 exclusive set-ups.

Many Final Fantasy fans believe that the characters are the most important part of the series, some of these characters becoming iconic figures in their own right. So with that in mind, let’s take a look at some of the classic characters this franchise has brought us, and maybe get to know a little more about some of the lesser known characters and their abilities within Dissidia Final Fantasy NT. 

Vanguard Class

The Vanguard class is made up of the heavy hitters of Final Fantasy. Unsurprisingly, they mostly favor huge swords that deal a great amount of damage.

Cloud Strife (Final Fantasy VII)

This powerful swordsman is probably the most recognizable character in all of Final Fantasy. He can send enemies flying sword or deal a great amount of damage during charging attacks.

Sephiroth (Final Fantasy VII)

A legendary member of the SOLDIER mercenary group, this fallen hero wields the iconic sword, Masamune. This long bladed weapon allows Sephiroth to attack swiftly during combat.

Cecil Harvey (Final Fantasy IV)

Cecil Harvey is a mysterious man who calls upon the powers of Dark and Light. An expert in both swordsmanship and aerial combat, Cecil has the ability to switch between the two combat styles.

Firion (Final Fantasy II)

After both his biological and adoptive families were murdered, Firion became a determined warrior fighting for a world free of war. He uses an array of arms that he can combine together to unleash devastating combo attacks.

Garland (Final Fantasy)

The main antagonist of the original Final Fantasy, the Warrior of Chaos is equipped with a large sword that shape shifts during combat. 

Cloud of Darkness (Final Fantasy III)

This infernal manifestation wants nothing more than to return all of existance to the nothingness that is asceneded from. Using the Umbral Torrent ability, it gathers energy and emits a destructive beam attack.

Warrior of Light (Final Fantasy)

The Warrior of Light is a noble warrior that fears no one. He courageously wields his sword and shield, specializing in close to mid-range attacks.

Assassin Class

This class consists of the more agile and flexible fighters among the Dissidia Final Fantasy NT roster. Assassins are quick on their feet, able to swiftly dodge attacks, and strike with deadly precision.

 Noctis Lucis Caelum (Final Fantasy XV)

Prince Noctis is the heir to the throne of Lucian. He wields spectral weapons that he can conjure at will from thin air. This impressively versatile power is only possessed by those of his royal line.

Lightning (Final Fantasy XIII)

Fighting for what she believes is right, Lightning is an independent soldier with a kind and gentle heart. She has the ability to shift roles in combat between physical and magical attacks.

Jecht (Final Fantasy X)

Jecht can manoeuvre his way close to foes in order to attack with his signature brutality. Jecht's EX skill can throw off his opponents' timing leaving them vulnerable to his attacks.

Tidus (Final Fantasy X)

He is an agile fighter who can dodge attacks with ease. Tidus uses his sword in combination with a blitz ball to deal damage to enemies.

Kuja (Final Fantasy IX)

Known as the Angel of Death, Kuja attacks via spell casting and aerial attacks. He is the only character that is able to strike while gliding.

Zidane (Final Fantasy IX)

A thief with a cheerful personality and an unwavering willingness to help others. Full of energy, Zidane uses his grace and quick-thinking to help his team in battle -- preferably during mid-air combat.


Kain Highwind (Final Fantasy IV)

Obsessed with dolling out justice, Kain's capacity for compassion is matched only by his skill and speed in combat. He wields a deadly spear that he uses to gain the advantage over aerial foes. 

Marksman Class

This class is made up of characters specializing in ranged based spells and attacks. Marksman class characters are great at healing or buffing others.

Y’shtola (Final Fantasy XIV)

This talented long-range attacker supports her team with powerful spells that de-buff opponents. Y'shtola is a great support character that shouldn't be overlooked.

Shantotto (Final Fantasy XI)

Although she may not look like much, Shantotto is a warrior fear for her aggressive and unpredictable attacks. She draws her strength from Bravery -- the more she gains, the more powerful magic spells become.

Ultimecia (Final Fantasy VIII)

Ultimecia is a powerful sorceress who's magical attacks increase in damage with each blow she lands. Her EX skill can be used to conquer her enemies by raining down powerful spells from any range.

Kefka Polazzo (Final Fantasy VI)

This colorful character is a powerful mage that has the ability to cast spells that target a large area. This powerful ability deals damage to anyone caught within its area of effect. 

The Emperor (Final Fantasy II)

By skilfully utilizing The Emperor's abilities, you can corner your opponents by setting traps. Once such trap is his Starfall skill which can bind enemies for a long time.

Ace (Final Fantasy Type-0)

While Ace is wise beyond his years, he has been known to be reckless at times. His go-to weapon is his deck of playing cards that he throws from a distance to gain an advantage over his opponents with inferior range.

Terra Branford (Final Fantasy VI)

Another long-range spellcaster, Terra has a variety of projectile based magic attacks. She can fire multiple projectiles against a single opponent or choose from a selection of advanced spells that can severely hurt her target.

Specialist Class

Members of this unique class are able to use strong melee attacks in addition to casting magic spells. This make them great all round fighters that can be useful in a variety of situations.

Vaan (Final Fantasy XII)

Vaan is skilled in using a variety of weapons. He's also super reliable as he always aids his friends in battle.

Bartz Klauser (Final Fantasy V)

Bartz is a warrior with a very focused goal -- to balance out the right and wrongs of life. He lands stronger attacks the more they are used in battle.

Onion Knight (Final Fantasy III)

Onion Knight may be the youngest warrior, but he possesses great strength and speed. His mastery of sword and magic makes him very useful in battle.

Ramza Beoulve (Final Fantasy Tactics)

In order to prove his worth, Ramza protects and fights for others. He achieves this by using magic to strengthen and buff the entire party. 


Like most Final Fantasy games, Dissidia Final Fantasy NT features Summons. These magnificent creatures help to fight your opponents in battle, with each Summon having its own set of powerful abilities. These summons play a major role in the game and have continued to grace the Final Fantasy series throughout the years.


The ice-elemental Summon known as the Empress of Ice. She is also known for her signature move, Diamond Dust, which deals ice-elemental damage and freezes everything in an instant.


The fire-elemental summon. A powerful demon that controls fire to scorch enemies. His signature move, Hellfire, attacks all opponents on the battlefield.


The ageless mage, Ramuh, is the lighting-elemental. He appears as an old man with a staff, which he uses to call down thunder to destroy the enemy. His signature move is Judgement Bolt.


This legendary knight rides his horse, Sleipnir, to deliver a crushing blow to his enemies. Odin's signature move is Zantetsuken, which allows him to cut through enemies, inflicting instant death.


This incredible large sea-serpent controls water and all who dwell in the oceans. This water-elemental has a signature move called Tsunami to call forth a massive tidal wave that does damage to all enemies.


This ancient mechanical tank is infused with ancient power. It's signature move is Divine Judgement which deals holy damage to all enemies.


This conqueror of the skies is one of the strongest among the summons. His signature move, Mega Flare, is a breath of energy that turns into a beam which deals non-elemental damage to his enemies. This move ignores defences and evasions.


That's all of the characters announced so far, but expect more to come before the January 30 release date. What do you think of the roster so far? Are there any glaring omissions you think should be included? Let us know in the comments below!

Animal Crossing: Pocket Camp Questions Guide Wed, 22 Nov 2017 19:19:19 -0500 Ashley Gill

There are three phases to the character creation and tutorial process in Animal Crossing: Pocket Camp:

  1. Answering K.K's questions
  2. Choosing your starter face and hair
  3. Answering Isabelle's questions

If you're familiar with the Animal Crossing series, the question portions at the start of the game can be a little stressful. Traditionally these sorts of questions have had permanent effects on a character, and no one wants to walk into this sort of long-term game without knowing what's going to affect what their character looks like.

KK Slider question

K.K.'s question is one that seems particularly important, especially since it's the first thing Animal Crossing Pocket Camp throws at you.

The question you see to the right is one with no "right" answer, but surely there's a "right" one for your Pocket Camp life. Right?

Oddly enough, nobody knows what the answers to this question actually do. The consequences of your first questions are generally obvious in the Animal Crossing series, but this time around, the first question seems absolutely pointless.

We may be wrong for now, but as far as anyone can tell: This question does nothing. Maybe this was the original question that chose your campsite theme? Who knows. All you need to know for now is not to stress over it.

Choosing your face and hair

Did you know the face you choose at the start dictates which shirt you start with? Check out my Pocket Camp starter face and shirt guide to see your options.

Isabelle's question

Isabelle wants to know what your ideal campsite might be -- and, much like the above sections, it can be kind of an overwhelming question for longtime Animal Crossing players.

The choices are natural, cute, sporty, and cool. The option you choose will affect the starter look and theme of your campsite as well as which villager you interact with first. That's not so bad, is it?



Your campsite's theme will affect the types of villagers that will want to swing by for a visit and affect how long they'll hang around. Each villager has a specific theme it's attracted to, and it is possible to feature more than one theme on your campsite (though it's best to focus on one or two).

So while Isabelle's question does affect how you start Animal Crossing Pocket Camp, it absolutely does not have any long-term effects. Just choose which you think will attract the villagers you like to start, then pick and choose from there. Happy camping!

Animal Crossing Pocket Camp Starter Face & Shirt Guide Wed, 22 Nov 2017 19:19:16 -0500 Ashley Gill

It may seem like K.K. Slider's question at the very start of Animal Crossing: Pocket Camp will affect what you look like, but it's actually a much more direct process.

In Pocket Camp, players can choose their face and hair colors and styles at the very start of the game (as well as later), but that less-than-fateful decision does have one effect some players may not know about: The face you choose determines the shirt you start with.

This is a lot more straightforward than K.K.'s question, which (as far as most can tell) doesn't seem to have any bearing on anything for the time being. Choosing your starter face does dictate the shirt you start with, which isn't really a huge deal, but it's definitely something to be aware of if you're about to get started.

Boys and girls not only have different face and hair options in Pocket Camp, they also start with different shirts. The two tables below are separated by boys' faces and girls' faces.

You can buy all of these shirts (and other clothing) from the Able Sisters when they're at the Marketplace. In addition, several of these shirts also have short-sleeve variations. This is all something to know, but don't let the starter shirt make you stress out at character creation!

Boys' faces and starter shirts


Blue-Stripe Shirt

Tan Dogtooth Shirt

Blue Tartan Shirt

Blue-Grid Shirt

MVP Shirt

No. 1 Shirt

Red-Bar Shirt

Fall Plaid Shirt

Grape-Stripe Shirt

Painter's Shirt

Flame Shirt

Jungle-Camo Shirt


Girls' faces and starter shirts

Gelato Shirt

Picnic Shirt

Rugby Shirt

Red-Grid Shirt

Icy Shirt

Folk Shirt

Winter Sweater

Mint Gingham Shirt

Lively Knit Shirt

Bubble-Gum Shirt

Dapper Shirt

Spring Shirt


This is just one part of the character creation process! K.K. Slider and Isabelle both ask you questions that may or may not affect your gameplay. Check out what they do in my Animal Crossing Pocket Camp starter questions guide.

Hustle Castle Tips: Every Day YOU'RE Hustlin' Wed, 22 Nov 2017 18:35:30 -0500 Allison M Reilly

If you don't have enough hustle in your life, then Hustle Castle is the mobile game for you. Available on both iOS and Android, Hustle Castle is a medieval-themed RPG where you are lord/lady of the castle. Build up your castle, fight monsters, train your warriors, and rescue the princess all in one game. It sounds like a lot, but once you get started and get the hang of the game, then it's not too hard to keep track of everything. Here are some tips to keep your game moving in Hustle Castle.

Don't Spend All Your Blue Gems at Once

When you start the game, you're given a ton of blue gems for free. It's easy to spend them all right away training your warriors, upgrading rooms more quickly, and expanding your castle. But avoid spending them in the early game! You'll reach a point where you'll need a ton of gold for the next upgrade (for me it was the Level 2 cellar). Instead of grinding, use the blue gems for those moments so you can upgrade your throne room (and everything else) much more quickly.

Add New Rooms as Soon as You Can

As you upgrade your throne room, new rooms open up that you can add to you castle. As soon as you can, add the new rooms, especially the fighter training room, the hospital and the magic workshop. The fighter training room is where you level up your warriors, allowing them to wear stronger armor and use better weapons. The hospital recharges health faster, which is great for the grind. The magic workshop is where you can create spells that can be cast during battle. The spells are incredibly helpful, as they are the "last little bit" needed sometimes for your warriors to win the battle.

Take Time to Do the Side Quests

Besides the main story of following the princess's trail and killing the monsters along the path, there are also invasions and enemies. Invasions are monsters that make their home in previous levels. Going back and defeating them not only gives you a reward for each win, but beating the entire invasion in the time allotted also grants a reward.

The enemies, also known as other players' castles, will show up randomly throughout the map and will have varying levels of difficulty. Each one you can beat earns a reward. Unlike the invasions, there's no time limit to defeating these enemies, although the exact player will change and the positions will move around the map.

Use the Living Room as Soon as You Can

The living room allows two NPCs -- one man and one woman -- to live together. After a little while, the woman gets pregnant and has a baby, who eventually grows up to become a useful member of the castle. Once you unlock the living room, the game provides a player with a couple to start. But once the child is born, the couple will not bear another. Switch them out as soon as you can with two new people until your castle is full. As you make your way through the game, there will be fewer and fewer opportunities to find new people to join your castle as a battle reward.

Overall, Hustle Castle is a fun, casual mobile game that doesn't require you to spend money in order to progress; players can easily get through the game (although not nearly as quickly) without spending a dime. Hopefully, the tips in this article make it easier to defeat those bad guys who had the nerve to kidnap the princess!

Titan Quest: Ragnarok Runemaster Class Guide Wed, 22 Nov 2017 16:15:50 -0500 Ty Arthur

What an unexpected holiday present to fans: Titan Quest rises again! A whole decade after the base game's original release, an expansion just arrived (although perhaps it's not quite so unexpected considering the launch of the Anniversary Edition last year).

As should be obvious from the name and imagery, the Ragnarok DLC injects a Norse theme to this aging ARPG. It's interesting that the expansion arrives just as Thor: Ragnarok hits theaters, and does it have anyone else now biting their nails over the upcoming God Of War mythology reboot?

Although the graphics are quite aged, if you've devoured Grim Dawn and the Ashes Of Malmouth expansion, you will be right at home playing Titan Quest and the updated mechanics in Ragnarok.

Just as Grim Dawn saw the recent additions of the Necromancer and Inquisitor, now in Ragnarok a whole new skill mastery has been added. Runemasters are warrior-shamans from the cold North who inscribe their equipment with runes or drop runes on the ground to gain battlefield control.

 Titan Quest: Ragnarok Rune Mastery Skill Tree

Runemaster Mastery Combinations

Including the Dream skill mastery from the original Immortal Throne expansion, Ragnarok now bumps the total base classes up to 10 with the addition of the Runemaster.

Below is every class combination currently available with this new Titan Quest mastery, along with tips on how to combine mysteries for effective class combinations.

Mastery 1 Mastery 2 Class
 Runemaster  Runemaster  Runemaster
 Runemaster  Defense  Runesmith
  Runemaster   Dream  Seidr Worker
 Runemaster   Earth  Stonespeaker
 Runemaster   Hunting  Dragon Hunter
 Runemaster   Nature  Skinchanger
 Runemaster   Rogue  Trickster
 Runemaster   Spirit  Shaman
 Runemaster   Storm  Thunderer
 Runemaster   Warfare  Berserker


Picking Secondary Masteries

Effectively picking your secondary mastery requires knowing ahead of time what skills you intend to pick on the Runemaster side.

The first tier of the skill tree will change your attack focus, the second tier offers various bonuses, while the third tier is where you start to get actual runes that modify how you play.

The fourth tier is then filled with various elemental or lightning-focused attack options, while at tier five you choose between either elemental or freezing runic mines to place on the ground. Finally, the sixth tier is all about selecting defensive options to round out your build.

These are the four base branches of the Runemaster skill tree at the first tier:

  • Rune Weapons increases your elemental and total damage with each basic attack.
  • Magical Charge deals elemental damage and grants elemental retaliation.
  • Energy Drain gives additional energy and health while slowing opponents with each basic attack.
  • Transmutation turns a portion of your basic attack into elemental damage instead.

Although it seems like the most obvious choice, Thunderer is weirdly the odd man out on the Runemaster combos. You can get some decent combos there with the right skills and stats, but strangely the lightning on lightning stacking doesn't actually have the synergy you'd expect.

So far, dual wielding as a Berserker seems to be working incredibly well, as it pairs well with the Runemaster's focus on increasing damage on basic attacks. Reckless Offense on the second tier has a small chance to go off with each attack, drastically increasing damage for that attack, pairing with lots of basic weapon attacks.

Dragonhunter is an interesting mastery combo when combining bow ranged attacks with a focus on the Thunder Strike skill, launching multiple area effect projectiles.

Runesmith is excellent for survivability, creating a walking tank. Although it seems cool at first as it offers damage absorption, the Energy Armor skill has a hefty energy cost and a long cool down time, so it's less useful on this build than might be expected.

If you are going for a melee-focused build of any kind, the Runeword: Feather skill reduces strength requirements for heavy weapons and also increases offensive capabilities for any attack.

 Setting down Runic Mines for defense

Those are all the basics you need to know to get started with a Titan Quest Runemaster build (special thanks to YouTuber Wilfrid Wong for the screenshot)!

What's your favorite Runemaster combination so far, and what skill load out should we be trying? Let us know in the comments!

Kingdoms of Heckfire Beginner's Guide: Tips for Defending Your Kingdom Wed, 22 Nov 2017 13:41:10 -0500 Autumn Fish

In Kingdoms of Heckfire, you spend a lot of time upgrading your kingdom's Might so that you can stand a chance against the monsters and players invading and besieging you. In order to quickly upgrade your Might, you're going to need to be persistent and know how to gather the necessary resources.

If you followed the game's tutorial, you should already have a pretty decent idea of how to go about increasing your Might. However, there are a few tips the game doesn't tell you that really help with building up the facets of your kingdom quickly yet strategically.

Let's dive in!

Don't Focus Solely on the Town Hall in Kingdoms of Heckfire

One mistake I know I made in the beginning was focusing on upgrading my town hall. Well, turns out that it's not only inefficient for gaining Might quickly, but it's also likely to just make you a target.

Upgrade every last building in your Kingdom to the same level as the Town Hall before finally leveling it up. Doing this ensures that you're as powerful as you can be and swimming in Might as you slowly but steadily climb in level.

Join an Active Clan for Safety and Help Progressing

Clans definitely aren't just for socializing. When your shields go down, players are going to target you and it's not going to be pretty. That's why it's important to join an active Clan as soon as you can build the Clan Tavern. As an added bonus, being in a Clan often helps you progress by providing you with resources in the form of Clan Chests and Hires.

Fight Realm Monsters for Gold and Clan Chests

If you have more 220 Energy, it may be a good idea to raid some Realm Monsters. Doing so will net you a bunch of Gold and other resources and the other people in your Clan will even receive Monster Slayer Chests. These chests are important to grab because they contain the keys needed to open the main Clan Chests, which offers big rewards to every Clan member.

Tips and Tricks for Building Might Kingdoms of Heckfire Beginner's Guide

Don't forget the resources scattered about the Realm map, either. If you ever need extra Gold, Food, or Ore, don't hesitate to send a few troops out to harvest it. You can even recall them at any time if you sense danger lurking.

Hire and Be Hired in Kingdoms of Heckfire

As you fly through upgrades, you'll quickly notice that there isn't a steady way to draw in Gold aside from braving the Realm. However, if you take advantage of the Ally Hiring system, you'll be racking in so much Gold you won't know what to do with it all -- except Hire more allies!

Once you build the Waritorium, you can Hire other players as allies as well as be Hired by others as an ally. When an ally is under your employ, they provide a bonus in battle, and the allied individual will receive rewards for it. However, if someone else Hires one of your Allies, you'll lose them, but be compensated by being paid more than what you Hired them for.

This is because every time you Hire an ally, their value increases. That means if you want them back, you'll have to cough up more than you originally Hired them for. This is interestingly a really decent way to rack up Gold and you should consider doing it while waiting for upgrade timers to finish.

Of course, the same applies to being Hired. Whenever you're Hired, you get a flat 100 Gold until you hit around 28,000 value. At that point, you gradually receive more and more gold every time somebody Hires you, so put yourself out there! Tthe Hiring system will make you rich quickly if you know your way around it, so don't pass it up.


Stay safe out in the Realms of Kingdoms of Heckfire, and good luck crushing your foes! Be sure to check back with GameSkinny for your fix of gaming guides and news.

How to Get Red Star Rings in Sonic Forces (Stages 1-10) Tue, 21 Nov 2017 15:31:42 -0500 Sarah Elliman

Red Star Rings were originally called Special Rings and were first introduced in Sonic Colors back in 2010. Originally, the rings enabled you to unlock special bonuses for the game; however, for Sonic Forces, the Red Star Rings have become hidden collectibles. There are five rings in each stage of the game, and we'll show you how to find them all.

Stage One: Green Hill Lost Valley

  • Ring One: The first ring is located near a totem pole that you will get to as you move through the level. When you get to this spot, use your homing attack while hitting jump repeatedly. This should defeat all enemies in the area, and you’ll be able to grab the ring floating in the air.
  • Ring Two: The next Red Star Ring is located below a platform with spikes on it, near where the floor breaks. This is a simple ring to collect, and the third one is close by.
  • Ring Three: The third ring is on a swinging platform located right next to the previous ring. You will be able to grab the platform by holding the right bumper and moving to the left. Once you are on the platform, you will be able to grab the ring, and the platform will take you back up to the top level.
  • Ring Four: Once you’re back on the top level, if you move to the right, you’ll find a ramp that you can jump off into a red air booster. Following this, you should be able to collect the fourth ring.
  • Ring Five: The final Red Star Ring is located on the right-hand path after the Wisp Capsule. You should be able to run alongside a sand waterfall to collect the final ring.

Stage Two: The Chemical Plant Spaceport

  • Ring One: As you progress through the level, you’ll find the first Red Star Ring near a group of enemies once you bounce off a bumper. After the enemies are defeated, you can bounce off a bumper to the right, then use your Wire Attack while pushing upwards to gain more upward momentum, and you’ll be able to grab the ring in the air.
  • Ring Two: The next ring will be located as you’re grinding across a rail collecting other ordinary rings. You will then land on a platform where you will find a capsule. Using your Burst ability, you can cause an explosion that will push you forwards. Keep using this ability until you’re all the way up, and you’ll be able to find the second ring on the upper level.
  • Ring Three: Once you’re able to get to the next area, you should see a checkpoint and a Red Star Ring next to a Wire Attack Point. This point will swing you across the gap, and you’ll be able to collect the third Red Star Ring.
  • Ring Four: One you’re up high on another platform, you can move to the right and either jump up or down. Going down will enable you to collect the fourth ring on a falling platform. Using your Burst ability, you’ll be able to jump back up before the platform falls and you lose a life.
  • Ring Five: Towards the end of the level, there will be a rainbow ring that can boost you into the air, enabling you to collect the final ring for that stage.

Stage Three: City Ghost Town

  • Ring One: This level will feel incredibly nostalgic, as you play as a more vintage Sonic throughout the level. Following the natural path of the level, you will be flung up onto the higher platforms. Right next to you should be a massive wall of rings. Continue going right and you will find the first ring on the archway.
  • Ring Two: This ring is found once you hit a checkpoint; you will pass through two loops and then be launched into the air, where you'll easily be able to grab this Red Star Ring.
  • Ring Three: At this point, you should have collected a large group of rings on a high platform. After this, you need to move to the right and use the bumper to jump across a gap. This is where you will be able to find the third Red Star Ring of this area.
  • Ring Four: If you jump down cautiously from the left edge of the platform where you got the last ring and continue to the right, you will eventually find multiple platforms with gaps in them. The one holding the fourth Red Star Ring is too high to reach. You have to drop down onto a spring that will enable you to collect it.
  • Ring Five: After this, you'll want to go past the column of rings and then jump down to the next gap. Keep going down until you get to the bottom, and when you reach a podium with a box and rings on it, make your way back up onto the level above the one you were previously on. You'll then want to boost, which should be enough to send you flying and get the final Red Star Ring.

Stage Four: Death Egg Prison Hall

  • Ring One: You’ll find this ring just slightly off a ramp from the path that you will natural drift towards through the level. You can launch off this ramp, which will then take you to a higher level where you can grab the first ring.
  • Ring Two: Past the next ramp there should be another Red Star Ring next to a set of bumpers.
  • Ring Three: Soon you should come to a wall where you will be accosted by a group of enemies. Once you defeat the enemies, you will have a lift drop. You need to grab it and launch upwards to be able to collect this ring, which should be located at the top.
  • Ring Four: This ring is in the next area of the game as you move across lifts. If you move to the right on one of the lifts and then jump onto a bumper, you should then be launched into the air. You then need to move to the right to jump off another bumper, where you will land on a new platform and find the fourth Red Star Ring.
  • Ring Five: The last ring is located towards the end of this stage and your final goal. You need to stay on the top path while dodging enemies who try to shoot you if you keep hitting boosters on the top platform. The Red Star Ring is on the center track, but you can only move to get it if you have been able to stay on the top level.

Stage Five: VS Zavok.

This is your first boss fight, and consequently, there are no Red Star Rings to collect in this area.

Stage Six: Death Egg Egg Gate

  • Ring One: You should instantly pick up the first Red Star Ring from following the path.
  • Ring Two: After coming out of the station in this level, you can take the middle path towards a rail. Further along you should see a bumper that should boost you up to another platform. There will be some enemies on this platform, and once defeated, you can grab the first ring for this stage.
  • Ring Three: After grabbing the first ring, you can move upward onto a floating platform. As you do this, there will be more enemies to defeat and another ring that you can grab.
  • Ring Four: At this point you should be dodging enemies that will be shooting lasers at Sonic across three different rails that you can jump between. If you’re looking to collect the Red Star Rings, it is better to stick to the left rail, as that will be where the ring is. The Red Star Ring is toward the end of the rails, so you’ll have some time to make your way over to the left rail.
  • Ring Five: After you have gotten through the rising boxes section, you’ll need to avoid a turret. Then as you progress through, you’ll be able to bounce off a spring to attack the enemies. If you are using your Homing Attack on the enemies, you can use this to jump and bounce off a metal rod, which will send you soaring to another platform. There should be three boxes on this platform; by using your Stomp Ability, you can break them and grab the last ring.

Stage Seven: Green Hill Arsenal Pyramid

  • Ring One: After a wide platform with many rings to collect, you will be launched onto another platform below. You will want to stop and walk backwards across this platform; this is where you will find the first Red Star Ring.
  • Ring Two: You will then be traveling along a path that will ultimately launch you into the air and through the top of the pyramid. As you are travelling downwards through the tunnel, the second Red Star Ring will be up for grabs in the middle.
  • Ring Three: Once you have finished free-falling, you will need to continue forward until you hit a bumper. If you go to the right, some enemies will span, travel back to your previous platform, and use the bumper to go to the left. The third Red Star Ring will be on the middle of the platform.
  • Ring Four: Continuing through this path, you’ll want to go forward, where you will end up on multiple rotating platforms. You will come across rails to grind and other platforms to jump across. When you reach a path with multiple enemies blocking different sections, the Red Star Ring will be towards the end and in the middle of the path.
  • Ring Five: Before launching across to the other platform, drop down onto the lower level and to the left of the bumper; the last Red Star Ring will be there.

Stage Eight: Mystic Jungle Luminous Forest

  • Ring One: When you see some flying enemies in this level, you can use your Homing Attack on them. You will then be able to jump on them one after the other and grab the Red Star Ring in the air.
  • Ring Two: At some point in the level, you will be able to jump over to a gap with multiple rails that you can grind on. If you stick to the middle ring, you will be able to run into a red ring booster that will allow you to grab this ring.

Stage Nine: Mystic Jungle VS Infinite.

This is the second boss battle of the game, and there are no Red Star Rings to be collected.

Stage Ten: Green Hill Green Hill

  • Ring One: You should hit a spring with a totem pole in the background; instead of landing on the top platform, drop down instead. Go to the left, where you will need to jump over some spikes, and the first Red Star Ring is hidden there.
  • Ring Two: You should hit a spring that will launch you into the air and place you on the top path of this section. You should come across a Speed Sneaker box, which you can then break. This will be followed by a Shield box over a gap, and you will find the Red Star Ring afterwards.
  • Ring Three: Continue left and you will eventually hit another checkpoint. After this, you will want to keep using springs to get yourself onto the top level. You will come across a bridge, and on the other side is a capsule that will launch you into the air, where you can grab the third ring.
  • Ring Four: Move forward, but let a falling platform drop you down to the middle level. Continue this path and you should hit a slope with enemies lined up on it. You can Boost through them while running and collect the fourth Red Star Ring at the end.
  • Ring Five: Then go to the right and make your way down to the lower platforms. Use the springs to get yourself back up to a falling platform; it is beneath some spikes. You’ll need to use your Boost ability very quickly and launch to the left. This way you’ll be able to collect the last ring.


Was this helpful for you? Are you able to find more Red Star Rings now? Let us know in the comments.

Gift Guide: Best Gifts for Mobile Gamers Tue, 21 Nov 2017 13:51:15 -0500 Lauren Harris

Logitech Powershell Controller for iOS



Available on Amazon


Mobile gamers can turn their phones into a portable console with this nifty gift. The Logitech PowerShell controller for iOS lets you game for hours on its 1500mAH battery. Its supports iOS7 and iOS8 compatible games and it's small enough to easily fit in your pocket. Enjoy the controller style feel of mobile gaming with this PowerShell Joystick Gaming Case.




There you have it seven of the best gifts for mobile gamers. Any gaming gift is nice but searching for the right gift can make things easier. So, let’s buy the right gift for those mobile gamers on your holiday list. They'll be glad you did.

SNES Classic Edition Wireless Controller



Available on Amazon


For all the retro gamers out there, here’s the perfect gift. This 8Bitdo SN30 2.4G SNES Classic Edition Wireless Controller is rechargeable with a lithium ion battery built in. It comes with a USB Cable for connections with Windows, MacOS, Raspberry Pi, Android, and much more. Mobile gamers can enjoy the classics wirelessly and it even comes with upgradeable firmware.






Price: Free


Available on App Store and Google Play


Sphero is another very interesting gift for mobile gamers. This tiny ball lets you play games, learn code, and drive. You can use JavaScript to when you download the Sphero Mini now. You can use the Mini as a controller to play different games or they can program the robot ball with the Sphere Edu app.





Samsung Gear VR Headset

Price: $24.95


Available on: Amazon


Help your mobile gamer take their gaming to the next level with the gift of virtual reality. This lightweight and inexpensive VR headset makes playing comfortable and pairs with the Samsung Galaxy Note 5, S6+, S6, and S6Edge+.  



Samsung- Evo 64GB MicroSDXC Memory Card

Price: $28.10


Purchase on Amazon


Another great gift for mobile gamers is the Samsung- Evo 64GB microSDXC Memory Card so, they can add more memory to their phone. This expands the storage on  your gamer's phone so they can download as many games as they like! As an added bonus, this card is magnetic and water resistant. 



Apple iTunes Gift Card

Available to buy on


The easiest gift for mobile gamers is an iTunes gift card. They can buy whatever their heart desires and purchase some great games in the App store. Even $25 is more than enough to rack up quite a few paid, mobile games. 




Everyone enjoys a good mobile adventure or puzzle game whether it's Candy Crush or Subway Surfers. If you know a hardcore mobile gamer, there are many gifts that will give them what they need to expand their library or add more space for games on their mobile device. Without further ado, here are some of the best gifts to get your favorite mobile gamers.

Pokemon Ultra Sun and Moon Guide: All Haircuts and Colors Tue, 21 Nov 2017 13:00:25 -0500 Autumn Fish

In Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon, you can change your haircut at any Salon in Alola. Many of the hairstyles from the previous games have returned, but there are a few new ones that really spice up the mix.

What's annoying is that neither Ultra Sun nor Ultra Moon let you try out or even get a look at haircuts or colors before paying for the style. You're either stuck soft resetting for the hair you want or looking at a guide much like this one here.

Even at endgame, it's annoying to unnecessarily waste Poke Dollars just because you don't like the hair you picked -- especially when you throw bangs into the equation. So without further adieu, let's take a look at all of the hairstyles and colors found in these mid-generation remakes.

All Male Haircuts and Styles in Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon

The six male haircuts from the original games return, along with two brand new ones. Achieving your desired hairstyle is as simple as buying a Cut for 4,000 Poke Dollars or a Cut and Color for 5,000 at any Salon.

Medium and Layered Medium and Smooth Caesar Cut
Modern Quiff Short and Layered (New) Short and Tousled (New)
Braided Cornrows Long and Tousled (Unlocked After E4)


All Female Haircuts in Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon

The eight female haircuts from the original games return, alongside two brand new ones. Achieving your desired hairstyle starts with purchasing a Cut for 4,000 Poke Dollars or a Cut and Color for 5,000 at any Salon.

Chin-Length Bob Short and Bobbed Medium and Wavy
Long and Straight Long and Wavy Romantic Tuck
Braided Tails (New) Flipped-Out Bob (New) Cornrow Braided Bun
High Pigtails (Unlocked After E4)


Female hairstyles are a bit more customizable than male ones since they have the chance to pick what bangs they want with the majority of cuts. The only haircut that doesn't support bangs is the Cornrow Braided Bun. There are three bangs options to choose from:

Sideswept Straight None


The bangs look exactly the same on every hairstyle they go with, but the power to mix and match them with almost any haircut gives female characters a grand total of 28 unique styles to choose from.

All Hair Colors in Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon

The nine hair colors from the previous games all make a return, here. All you need to do to change your hair color is buy a Color for 2,000 Poke Dollars or a Cut and Color for 5,000 at any Salon.

Black Honey Blond Dark Brown
Ash Brown Caramel Blond Platinum Blond
Wine Red (Unlocked After E4) Pink Brown White (Unlocked After E4)


Now go out and find your perfect hairstyle with confidence! Be sure to check out our other Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon guides while you're around!

(Screenshots courtesy of Nintendo Insider, Samurai Gamers, and YouTuber Ran NG.)

Endless Space 2: Using Probes Effectively Mon, 20 Nov 2017 16:55:00 -0500 Ty Arthur

There's a huge universe out there to explore in Endless Space 2filled with resources to exploit, civilizations to encounter, and enemies to crush beneath your galactic boot heel!

As with many of these futuristic 4X-style games, there's a staggering number of elements to juggle and a whole lot of gameplay options you might not even realize you can use on the first playthrough.

While the in-depth nature of the game makes it a must-try for the 4X fans, it can also turn off more casual gamers not familiar with the style, as there's a steep learning curve here.

Probes are one of those elements that are easy to miss or just simply misunderstand if you did manage to notice them sitting there. Below, we cover everything you need to know about gaining access to probes, using them to explore and find anomalies, and replenishing your depleted probe stock.

Using Probes in Endless Space 2

Some players totally miss probes in the early stages of the game because only exploration ships (marked with the magnifying glass) and hero ships are capable of launching probes.

What's the point of probes instead of just sending a fleet off to find locations? Probes can head into unexplored areas that haven't been revealed yet, bypassing normal movement paths and unveiling anomalies or even new systems. 

To launch probes, you first have to add them as a module to an explorer ship

Like most technologies in the game, probe modules can be upgraded later on for better results and longer vision range. For instance, researching Machine Bacteria on the Science and Exploration technology tree gives access to Titanium and Hyperium probes.

 Checking the probe module on a ship

To see probes off to find new systems, access the fleet menu and click the explorer or hero ship, then select the Launch Probe button (the icon pretty clearly looks like a probe or a satellite moving towards the right). The Launch Probe button also shows your current stock of probes along with the maximum number that the ship is capable of housing.

Probes replenish automatically over time for any ship equipped with the module (see the replenishment rate by hovering over the icon and checking the Cooldown entry). 

Besides just checking to see if an area of space has any systems worth exploring, probes are also used for investigating anomalies. When you find a system, check the list of planet names underneath it. If any planet names are pulsing, they have anomalies to explore by sending a probe.

Zoom into the planet and click the curiosity question mark icon to launch a probe. You can also get to the same options by choosing Start Expedition instead.

 Investigating anomalies on a planet

Anomalies and curiosities vary wildly in their results but can be well worth discovering, sometimes offering up resource caches, speeding up research, and so on. In a few cases, the results may be unpleasant, however, like an unexpected attack.

Some higher-level curiosities will be grayed out when you hover over them -- that means they are higher level than your current tech research level and you have to first upgrade before you can investigate them with a probe.

 Checking probe info on the Start Expedition screen

Because your probe-laden ships are frequently on the edge of your explored space and might run into trouble, it's usually a good idea to have a group of explorer ships together launching probes rather than sending out one lone exploration vessel.

The main advantage to probes is that you can send them off in a different direction than you are currently exploring in order to cover more ground (er, space, I guess), or you can send them to an area that may be dangerous and you aren't sure about quite yet. In the early game this can be huge because it provides an advantage in locating neighboring systems and getting colonies going.


That's all the basics you need to know to utilize Endless Space 2 probes, and we'd like to extend special thanks to YouTuber BigBossBilly for the screenshots. Have any other tips on probing systems and finding curiosities? Let us know in the comments below!

ArcheAge Begins: Assassin and Mage Heroes Guide Mon, 20 Nov 2017 15:29:55 -0500 Ashley Gill

At the time of this writing, there are 32 heroes for players to choose from in ArcheAge Begins. Among those 32 heroes are five classes, giving players a great amount of freedom in teambuilding for both PvE and PvP situations.

This guide aims to inform you of each hero's skills, strengths, and weaknesses without having to consult the (slow-loading) Guide section of the game. Each hero within a class is different, and knowing what each of them does will help you know what you want before popping open one of those hero scrolls.

Here we're going to be going over the two spotlight classes: Assassin and Mage -- or primarily physical and magical damage dealers, respectively. Every team needs at least one, but which one fits your needs? We're going to find out here soon enough!

One note here, though, is that the number of times a hero attacks using a skill is not listed. How skills change with levels (marked with "with talents") is mentioned, just not the number of attacks. This was to keep the guide easier to use for new players.

This information is best paired with the Knight, Warrior, and Musician hero guide I've also worked up if you want to try to match up synergizing heroes. Its layout is identical, and it packs the same type of informational punch as this side of things.


This is the bread and butter physical damage class of ArcheAge Begins, but don't take that to mean all these heroes do is deal damage.

Most Assassins pack in some sort of utility, whether it be crowd control (CC), debuffs, or buffs. These factors are what you have to take into consideration more than their direct attacks.


Tahyang specializes in AoE physical damage. Three of his five abilities hit multiple enemies when talented, with Rain of Arrows having a very large range at max level.

All of his skills culminate to make Tahyang a ranged AoE Assassin with one form of CC.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals physical damage; deals harsh physical damage and deals damage to two enemies with talents
  • Serial Shot -- Deals physical damage; deals harsh physical damage to up to 3 enemies with talents
  • Shock Arrow -- Deals physical damage and stuns enemies for 5~7 seconds with talents
  • Rain of Arrows -- Deals AoE physical damage; range gets wider with talents
  • Aim for the Wrist -- Reduces enemy accuracy by 15%~25% for 8~16 seconds with talents

Melisara deals a fair amount of AoE damage, has two skills that inflict bleeding, and can restore her own HP. That all sounds pretty good, right? Heck yeah, it does.

The unique part of her kit is her self-heal in Healing Kiss, but she squarely fits the role of melee self-sustain AoE physical + DoT Assassin.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals physical damage with a guaranteed crit on the fourth hit; each attack will be a critical and deal harsh damage with talents
  • Shadow Strike -- Deals physical damage; becomes AoE and causes bleeding with talents
  • Strike Down -- Deals AoE physical damage and inflicts bleeding for 9~17 seconds
  • Swiftness -- Grants 15%~33% movement speed to allies in an area for 20~30 seconds
  • Healing Kiss -- Gradually recovers her own HP over 6~18 seconds

Another AoE-focused ranged Assassin? Yep, that's exactly what Ixion is -- and he's got some utility to boot.

Ixion is a ranged AoE utility Assassin with an enemy defense debuff, a movement speed debuff, and a self-buff that increases the damage on his two non-Normal Attack primary damage skills.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals physical damage; the last hit becomes AoE with talents
  • Dead Shot -- Deals physical damage to enemies in an area; reduces hit enemy defense by -15% for 6 seconds with talents
  • Rampage -- Deals AoE physical damage
  • Focused Fire -- Buffs himself to increase the damage of Dead Shot and Rampage for 20~40 seconds
  • Set Trap -- Reduces the movement speed of enemies in an area by 25%~30% for 20~33 seconds

Catherine is one of the most popular Assassins in ArcheAge Begins, in part due to her kit but also because she is very clearly a succubus. Her portable stripper pole is a powerful tool.

With her charm and stun, Catherine is a melee self-sustain AoE Assassin with two forms of CC. Be aware she will charge the backline in a fight and make herself vulnerable.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals physical damage; becomes harsh physical damage and AoE with talents
  • Onslaught -- Deals physical damage; stuns the target enemy for 6 seconds and deals damage to enemies in an area with talents
  • Spirit Drain -- Deals continuous damage for 3 seconds and restores 75%~125% of the damage as HP; with talents, this attack hits 2 targets and also reduces movement speed by 35%
  • Adept Shadows -- Grants herself 10% critical damage for 9~21 seconds
  • Song of Enchantment -- Charms enemies for 10~15 seconds

The quintessential elven ranger, Kaelyn is yet another Assassin that packs a heavy AoE punch -- but her skills are not purely offensive.

Kaelyn is a ranged AoE Assassin-support, able to put out damage while cleansing her allies of damage over time effects and reducing incoming physical damage. This makes her great against DoT teams or heavy physical attack teams, but means she's not so useful against other compositions.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals physical damage; deals harsh physical damage to 2 enemies with talents
  • Storm of Arrows -- Deals physical damage to enemies in an area; with talents deals additional physical damage to enemies over 3~6 seconds in a smaller area
  • Survival Instinct -- Makes allies immune to bleed, poison, burn, and disease for 6~10 seconds
  • Explosive Arrow -- Deals AoE damage
  • Evade Lethal Strike -- Reduces incoming physical damage by 5%~10% for 12 seconds

This big guy is one of the strangest Assassins in ArcheAge. His direct damage in itself isn't all that fantastic, but he does pack a bunch of damage over time skills along with two defensive skills.

Jergant is one of the tankier Assassins thanks to his Spectral Revenge skill, which makes him a prime frontline fighter. He's a ranged AoE DoT Assassin with a defensive streak. That's a mouthful.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals physical damage; deals harsh physical damage and becomes AoE with talents
  • Bleeding Arrow -- Deals physical damage and applies bleeding for 6~12 seconds; becomes a harsh physical AoE with talents and deals poison damage instead with talents
  • Cannon Blast -- Deals AoE and poisons enemies for 6~15 seconds
  • Focus -- Makes allies immune to immobility, slow, sleep, blind, fear, hit list, launch, physical skill bind, stun, fall, charm, and silence for 6~10 seconds
  • Spectral Revenge -- Deflects 25%~75% of incoming physical damage from himself for 9 seconds and restores as much HP as damage deflected

The closest to a traditional rogue you're going to get in ArcheAge Begins, Lupinlulu is one of the few single target Assassins and he's worth it with the right team composition.

Lupinlulu boosts his own critical rate and critical damage while also being able to penetrate enemy defense and spawn a clone to take the heat off. He is a melee single-target burst damage (crit) Assassin with one stun, and all his damage skills deal damage multiple times for more chances to crit.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals physical damage; deals harsh physical damage, and increases his critical strike chance by 5%~10% and critical damage by 20%~50% with talents
  • Shadow Step -- Teleports behind enemies to deal physical damage; stuns for 3~6 seconds with talents
  • Thrash -- Deals physical damage; causes bleeding with talents
  • Daru Double -- Resets his threat value and summons a taunting Daru Double for 5~10 seconds
  • Detect Weakness -- Buffs himself to ignore 5%~10% of enemy defense and attacks for 9 seconds

The only rare Assassin at the time of this writing, Aello is unique among her peers due to her heavy emphasis on applying and maintaining poison on any and all enemies she can reach.

Three of Aello's abilities are AoE and three apply poison, making her purely a melee AoE poison Assassin.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals physical damage; deals AoE damage with talents
  • Poison Spray -- Deals AoE physical damage
  • Deadly Poison -- Inflicts poison on an enemy; inflicts poison on one enemy and deals physical damage to surrounding enemies with talents
  • Apply Poison -- Applies poison to her normal attacks for 20~30 seconds which has a 20%~33% chance to poison targets
  • Weaken Poison Resist -- Poisons an enemy for 6~10 seconds


While many Assassins have a fair amount of utility under their belts, there are a few Mages that are almost entirely suited to supporting instead of damage dealing. They are, after all, magic users.

Unless you're going for an almost solely magic damage team, you'll want to pay attention to each Mage's utility skills to see whether they fit on your ideal team.


This guy is definitely not the most impressive-looking Mage and he is the first one you get, but Aranzeb is no slouch with his signature Rain of Fire, sleep, and ally buffs.

Aranzeb is a ranged AoE utility Mage with a sleep that's appropriate for both physical and magical teams but fits best on magic damage-heavy teams.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals magic damage; deals harsh magical damage and becomes AoE with talents
  • Rain of Fire -- Deals AoE magic damage; the radius becomes one of the longest in the game with talents
  • Disorient -- Puts enemies to sleep for 8~16 seconds
  • Aranzeb's Lineage -- Increases ally magic power by 15%~25~ for 12 seconds
  • Improved Cohesion -- Increases ally accuracy by 15%~25%

She may be a Mage, but Eanna is anything but purely offensive.

Eanna has two offensive skills and three support skills, and while her standard attacks do automatically critically hit, she is not fated to do tons of magic damage. She is a ranged support Mage through and through.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals magic damage; deals harsh damage and automatically crits with talents
  • Hell Spear -- Deals AoE damage; deals harsh magic damage and reduces enemies' magic resist for 9 seconds with talents
  • Order of the Dead -- Decreases damage taken by allies by 5%~10% for 12 seconds
  • Depths of Death -- Increases damage taken by enemies by 5%~10% for 12 seconds
  • Barrier -- Shields an ally for 20%~30% of their HP for 24 seconds

Aranzeb's damage may almost all be piled onto one skill, but Aranzebia is a little different. She has the typical Mage utility but can put out more damage than her male counterpart.

Aranzebia is a ranged AoE Mage with heavy movement-impairing effects. If you're about to go against teams that are mostly melee, she's almost a shoe-in.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals magic damage; deals harsh magic damage and one hit will automatically crit with talents
  • Dahuta's Breath -- Deals AoE magic damage
  • Earth's Grasp -- Reduces enemy movement speed by 50%~75%
  • Icebound Earth -- Deals AoE magic damage and makes them immobile for 3~7 seconds
  • Blessing of Illusions -- Increases her defense by 15%~25% for 12 seconds

Orchidna is a unique case among the other Mages in that she is the one and only summoner.

While she herself does deal AoE damage, her real draw lies in the Summon Monster skill, which in effect adds an extra member to your team until it dies or another is summoned. The catch? The summon doesn't have any skills until it hits level 3.

Orchidna is a summoner with ranged AoE magical damage.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals magic damage; deals harsh AoE magic damage with talents
  • Summon Monster -- Summons a Monster Warrior, Mage, or Musician to attack enemies for 10~20 seconds; summons get up to 2 skills with talents
  • Summon Crow -- Summons a crow to deal AoE magic damage
  • Queen's Wrath -- Reduces enemy attack by 15%~25% for 9 seconds
  • Armor of Vengeance -- Deflects 50%~90% of damage incoming to her back to attacking enemies for 9 seconds

This guy's damage is almost entirely focused around his poison effects, but Raven has a trick up his sleeve that makes him pretty worth it: his cooldown reduction skill.

Raven's damage is nice but the fact he can eventually reduce ally cooldowns by 50% is more than nice -- it's great. Paired with the enemy ranged accuracy reduction, he can be a real pain for the enemy in a lot of matchups. He's a DoT-focused Mage, but his real value lies in the ally cooldown and enemy accuracy reductions.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals magic damage; deals harsh magic damage and one attach will be an automatic critical with talents
  • Contagion -- Deals magic damage and inflicts poison for 6 seconds; deals harsh magic damage and the poison spreads to other enemies with talents
  • Disease -- Poisons an enemy for 6~10 seconds
  • Blinding Flash -- Reduces enemy ranged hit accuracy by 90% for 6~10 seconds
  • Time Warp -- Reduces the cooldown of all skills by 15%~50%

Darcell is one mean lamia. With two very potent crowd control skills and some potent single-target magic damage, she is an easy addition for a number of teams. Though she is most useful versus enemies specializing in physical damage.

Darcell's two damage skills both eventually splash to other targets, albeit no more than 2 additional targets. This doesn't sound great until you factor in the "harsh" and "very harsh" magical damage these skills present, Deadly Melody's innate crit, and Chilling Tune's crit damage buff.

That all said, Darcell is a ranged single-target burst Mage with two forms of heavy CC.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals magic damage; deals harsh magic damage and each of its 4 hits deal damage to 1 extra enemy with talents
  • Deadly Melody -- Deals critical magic damage; deals very harsh magic damage to the target and up to 2 nearby enemies with talents
  • Drip Drop -- Launches an enemy into the air for 6~14 seconds
  • Bind Wrists -- Binds enemy physical skills (excluding normal attacks) for 8~16 seconds
  • Chilling Tune -- Increases her critical damage by 50%~100%

Ahimoth is a strange case. He's got a fair amount of damage and utility, but his biggest damage source is Hit List, which takes a few seconds to trigger and can be dispelled in the meantime.

Despite the above issue with Hit List, Ahimoth is still a potent utility CC Mage. He boosts his own critical hit and puts out harsh damage, but his real draws lie in his immobilize, fear, and enemy magic resist reduction.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals magic damage; increases his own critical hit chance by 5%~10% and his critical damage by 20%~50% for 3.4 seconds with talents
  • Bonds of Death -- Deals damage to an enemy and reduces its movement speed; deals harsh damage to up to 4 enemies and immobilizes them with talents
  • Whisperers of Terror -- Fears an enemy for 8~16 seconds and reduces their magic power by 15%~25%
  • Hit List -- Deals harsh damage to an enemy after a 10~6 second delay
  • Grim Reaper's Touch -- Reduces enemy magic resist by 15%~25% for 9 seconds

I'm not going to pretend I know what Anthalon's Curse actually does because I don't have him and any information I'm finding on this skill is conflicting.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals magic damage; Deals harsh AoE magic damage with talents
  • Mind Drain -- Stuns an enemy and deals continuous magic damage to them, recovering 50%~75% of the damage as HP
  • Flames of Command -- Deals continuous AoE damage
  • Vitality Blade -- Deals magic damage; deals harsh magic damage and bleeds to up to 3 enemies for 9 seconds with talents
  • Bone Armor - Deflects 25%~75% of incoming magic damage for 9 seconds
  • Anthalon's Curse -- Applies Anthalon's Curse (random debuff) on 25%~50% of enemies within 20 meters of the target

That's all there is to Mages and Assassins in ArchAge Begins as it stands, but that's still a great deal of variety to pick and choose from when paired with the Warrior, Knight, and Musician classes.

ArcheAge Begins: Knight, Warrior, and Musician Heroes Guide Mon, 20 Nov 2017 14:54:22 -0500 Ashley Gill

ArcheAge Begins packs in five separate hero classes, which is a reasonable spread. On top of that, the class set is much more varied than it might at first seem. Each hero, no matter the class, is distinctly unique and works better and against some heroes more than others.

The variety in hero abilities and building teams is one of the bigger draws of the game because of the sheer amount of options between your own team composition and whatever enemies you'll face in stages, raids, or PvP.

This guide is split into two parts due to length, with this one highlighting Knights, Warriors, and Musicians and the other focusing on Assassins and Mages. Each hero's section lists its skills and mentions its strength or type.

For ease of use, skill listings will not mention how many times a skill hits. Instead, they mention the type of damage (physical or magical, harsh, etc.) and any other effects the skills may have once leveled up (referred to as "with talents" here).

Knight Heroes

Knights are the magic resist-oriented class in ArcheAge Begins -- but don't think their abilities are copies of their physical-oriented Warrior brethren.

Each Knight is unique and can find its way into most party lineups, but some are certainly better suited to some tasks than others and vice versa.


This should be your go-to if you need someone with high magic resist, two taunts, and reliable AoE physical damage.

Gigas deals a lot of AoE physical damage, which is just the thing you're going to need for certain stages. This all sounds good, and the Silence skill is just the icing on the cake.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals physical damage to enemies; deals harsh AoE physical damage with talents
  • Mighty Sunder -- Deals AoE physical damage; adds a 6-second taunt with talents
  • Boastful Roar -- Taunts enemies for 8 seconds and increases his defense by 10%~16% and magic resist by 20%~30%
  • Whirlpool -- Deals AoE physical damage
  • Silence -- Silences enemies for 6-12 seconds

Shashuk is in a weird spot. His damage is solid but his taunt is shorter than the other normal Knights and his taunt buff is less than the others. However, he gets a very good reflect via Thorns.

Shashuk's biggest draw lies in his Thorns skill, and even that has to be almost fully talented to make him worth it. The magic attack reduction on his standard attacks makes him good against high magic attack teams.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals physical damage to enemies; reduces enemy magic attack by 10~15% talents
  • Finishing Strike -- Deals physical damage and crits automatically if hitting an enemy from behind; deals harsh physical damage and crits automatically from any angle and inflicts bleeding with talents
  • Victor's Cry -- Taunts enemies for 5 seconds and increases his defense and magic resist (up to +8% DEF and +15% MRES)
  • Uppercut -- Deals physical damage; deals very harsh physical damage with talents
  • Thorns -- Deflects 25%~50% of incoming magic damage from himself for 9 seconds and restores as much HP as damage deflected

Siranus is one Knight that can fit on most teams, but excels on teams more focused on magic attacks as he has two skills that reduce magic resist and increases casting speed.

This should be your go-to magic tank for any team with piles of magic damage. The increased magic damage granted by his debuffs on enemies is no joke, and the team-wide invincibility is more than sufficient as a protective skill.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals physical damage to enemies; reduces enemy magic resist by 10%~15% with talents
  • Swinging Strike -- Deals physical damage to enemies; deals AoE physical damage and taunts for 8 seconds with talents
  • Invincibility -- Makes allies invincible for up to 14 seconds with talents
  • Mocking Howl -- Taunts enemies for 8 seconds and reduces their defense by 10%~16% and their magic resist by 20%~30%
  • Yaksa's Grace -- Increases ally casting speed by 5%~20% for 9 seconds

The Knight class's rare hero, Inoch is an incredibly durable tank. He works well in almost any team but excels versus enemies with high magic attack.

This guy only has one short taunt but has two stuns in his kit. Those facets, combined with his self buffs, make Inoch basically a pure tank, and there's absolutely nothing wrong with that.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals physical damage; deals harsh physical damage and increases his defense by 10%~15% and magic resist by 20%~30% with talents
  • Charge -- Charges to deal physical damage and stun enemies for 5 seconds; makes him invincible for 8 seconds with talents
  • Storm Cleave -- Deals physical damage to two enemies; attacks three enemies and stuns for 5 seconds with talents
  • Menacing Roar -- Taunts enemies for 5 seconds and reduces their attack by 5%~8% and their magic attack by 10%~15%
  • Tight Defense -- Increases his defense by 10%~25% and his magic resist by 20%~50%

Warrior Heroes

Warriors are the physical defense counterparts to Knights and should be used when up against teams or stages with a large chunk of physical damage. And of course, there's no harm in having both a Warrior and a Knight on a team if the situation calls for it.


A lot of newer players mistakenly think Gene is bad because he's the first Warrior you're granted, but that is not the case. He is a competent physical tank, and he packs some good damage and crowd control effects.

Gene is well-rounded enough to fit in most teams but is not the most durable of the Warrior lot. He's a good choice if you need some extra damage along with durability, rather than a ironclad tank.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals physical damage to enemies; deals harsh AoE physical damage with talents
  • Whirlwind Slash -- Deals AoE magic damage; taunts enemies for 6 seconds with talents
  • Mocking Shout -- Taunts enemies for 8 seconds and increases his defense by 20%~30% and magic resist by 10%~16%
  • Sunder Earth -- Deals AoE physical damage
  • Earth Shatter -- Reduces the movement speed of enemies in an area by 25%~30%
  • Kyrios's Courage -- Deals AoE physical damage with a 25%~50% chance to freeze enemies

This big guy might be the game's mascot. It's really hard to tell. In any case, he's technically a Warrior, but is not entirely defense-oriented despite his two taunts and a stun.

Balrog is best on teams with high physical damage as he reduces their defense, attack, and magic attack. Reducing their defense makes them more vulnerable to attacks, and reducing their offensive stats keeps your teammates alive.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals physical damage to enemies; deals harsh physical damage and reduces enemy defense by 10%~15% with talents
  • Assault -- Charges and deals AoE physical damage; taunts enemies for 6 seconds with talents
  • Enemy Territory -- Deals AoE physical damage; stuns for 5 seconds with talents
  • Threatening Shout -- Taunts enemies for 8 seconds, and reduces their attack by 20%~30% and magic attack by 10%~16%
  • Haste -- Increases movement speed of allies in an area by 25%~33% for 20~30 seconds

And here we finally have a purely defensive Warrior. Ollo is a hard dwarf to take down, and he is fantastic versus enemy teams with high attack.

Ollo has everything a tank could want: a stun, enemy attack reduction, ally buffs, and even team healing. You could not do much better except for Toro, the game's only current rare Warrior.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals physical damage to enemies; reduces enemy attack by up to 10~15% with talents
  • Ollo's Hammer- - Deals AoE physical damage; deals harsh physical damage and stuns enemies for 5 seconds with talents
  • Mocking Cry -- Taunts enemies for 5 seconds and increases his defense by 10%~15% and magic resist by 5%~8%
  • Shatigon's Revenge -- Deflects 25%~50% physical damage from allies for 9 seconds and heals them for the damage deflected
  • Shatigon's Blessing -- Increases defense of allies in an area by 10%~25%

This is another purely defensive Warrior. Much like Ollo, Toro's exceptional versus physical attack teams.

Toro's kit is a bundle of enemy debuffs, from stats reduction to a physical skill bind. It all looks great, but he's not meant to go against teams with high magic attack. Keep that in mind and use him accordingly.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals physical damage; increases his own defense by 20%~30% and magic resist by 10%~15% with talents
  • Shield Bash -- Deals AoE physical damage to enemies; deals AoE harsh physical damage and binds enemy physical skills for 9 seconds with talents
  • Hobgoblin Fire -- Reduces the accuracy of enemies in an area by 15%~25% for 9 seconds
  • Shout of Provocation -- Taunts enemies for 5 seconds and reduces their attack by 10%~25% and magic attack by 5%~8%
  • Hobgoblin Game -- Reduces enemy attack by up 15%~25% for 9 seconds


Keeping in line with ArcheAge's style and lore, Musicians in ArcheAge Begins are the game's support and/or healer heroes.

It's almost always a requirement to have at least one Musician in a party, but you can't just toss any one of them in a team and hope it does well. Each excel in different ways, and we're about to find out just how.


Kyprosa is a pure healer, perhaps too good for this world. Everything about her kit is protective and she certainly stands as a powerful healer. She fits on most teams with ease.

A special thing to note with her is the status effects she dispels, as the cleansing is absolutely necessary in many match ups.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals magic damage to enemies; creates a barrier on allies that protects them for up to 20% of their HP for 5 seconds with talents
  • Continuous Heal -- Restores an ally's HP 5 times; increases heal amount and AoE heals with talents
  • Clear Mind -- Dispels Immobility, Slow, Sleep, Blind, Fear, Hit List, Launch, Physical Skill Bind, Stun, Fall, Charm, and Silence from allies and makes them immune to these effects for up to 14 seconds with talents
  • Devotion -- Restores the HP of the lowest HP allies for 5~10 times
  • Blessing and Curse: Blessing -- Increases all allies' incoming heals by 25%~50% for 24 seconds
  • Kyprosa's Love -- Creates a barrier on allies in an area that protects them for 25%~50% of their maximum HP for 12 seconds

Lucius is one Musician that is perfectly suited to high magic damage teams. His one heal is adequate, but his real benefits lie in buffing and debuffing to allow your team to pump out an insane amount of magic damage.

The only real downside to Lucius is he is basically useless on high attack teams. He's also best paired with allies that have their own sustain.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals magic damage to an enemy; increases an ally's magic attack by 20%~25% with priority given to Mages
  • Healing Music -- Restores the HP of the lowest HP ally 10~15 times; with talents, restores the HP of the 3 lowest allies 15 times and then the HP of the lowest HP 10 more times
  • Sonic Blade -- Deals magic damage
  • Song of Focus -- Increases allies' magic power by 10%~20% for 12 seconds
  • Veil of Illusion -- Reduces enemies' magic resist by 15%~25% for 9 seconds

Specializing in general offense and defensive buffs, Naima can fit on most teams but like Lucius, she is not a reliable sustained healer as she only has one actual heal.

This is another Musician better suited to tanks or Assassins with their own sustain.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals magic damage; damage becomes AoE with talents
  • Healing Dance -- Restores the HP of the lowest HP ally 10~15 times; with talents, restores the HP of the 3 lowest allies 15 times and then the HP of the lowest HP 10 more times
  • Vibrant Rhapsody -- Increases all allies' attack and magic power by 10%~25%
  • Mirror Image -- Resets Naima's threat value and summons a mirror image for 5~10 seconds
  • Earth Anthem -- Increases allies' defense and magic resist by 15%~25%

The other side to the Kyprosa coin, Nadiya is also a pure healer with cleansing effects. Kyprosa focuses on cleanses status effects while Nadiya focuses on dispelling damage over time effects.

Nadiya fits on most teams with ease. Her cast animations are some of the longest, though; keep that in mind in raids.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals magic damage; with talents, allies receive 3%~5% less damage
  • Surge of Life -- Gradually restores an ally's HP; heal becomes AoE with talents
  • Pain Relief -- Dispels Bleed, Poison, Burn, and Disease from allies; makes allies immune to damage over time skills for 6~14 seconds
  • Heal All -- Restores the HP of the lowest HP ally 5~15 times
  • Blessing and Curse: Curse -- Reduces enemies' incoming heals by 25%~50% for 24 seconds

Choa is easily the best Musician for a physical attack team, particularly those heavy on melee Assassins. She is an offensive support.

Another Musician with only one heal, Choa's whole draw is the immense physical damage increase she can bring the right team. Her one heal is pretty weak in comparison to some other options, meaning it's best to pair her with other heroes with sustain.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals magic damage; with talents, deals harsh magic damage and increases an ally's attack by 20%~25% with priority on Assassins
  • Echo of Light -- Restores HP to one ally over 2.5 seconds; heal becomes AoE with talents
  • Echo of Darkness -- Deals magic damage; becomes AoE and reduces enemies' incoming healing by 25%~31% with talents
  • Deify -- Increases a melee ally's critical hit chance by 2.5%~5% and melee critical damage by 25%~50% for 12 seconds
  • Incapacitate -- Reduces enemy defense by 15%~25% for 12 seconds

A mostly-defensive Musician, Melia specializes in going up against teams with high magic damage. Her buffs and debuffs target magic attack and magic resist.

Melia has one purely offensive skill, Spear of Judgment, which seems out of place among her other support-focused skills but allows her to dish out some damage while mitigating it. Pair her and two magic damage dealers with Lucius for a good laugh.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals magic damage; with talents, deals harsh magic damage and increases an ally's magic resist by 20%~25% with priority on Knights
  • Fountain of Healing -- Restores the HP of the lowest HP ally 5~15 times
  • Detect Magic -- Increases ally's magic resist by 15%~15% for 12 seconds
  • Spear of Judgment -- Deals AoE magic damage
  • Focused Control -- Reduces enemy magic power by 15%~25% for 12 seconds

Every Musician has its specialty and Narin's is to bolster her own team against physical damage.

Narin is essentially the physical counterpart to Melia, and like Melia she is not too useful against teams of the opposite damage type.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals magic damage; with talents, deals harsh magic damage and increases an ally's defense by 20%~25% with priority on Warriors
  • Seed of Healing -- Restores an ally's HP; with talents, restores an ally's HP and then gradually heals more after the effect
  • Drums of War -- Increases ally defense by 9%~17% for 30 seconds
  • The Divine Whip -- Deals AoE magic damage
  • Demoralize -- Reduces enemy attack by 15%~25% for 9 seconds

The one rare Musician, Oscar is a pure defensive healer capable of keeping allies clear of any and all status effects while being a more efficient healer than the rest.

Oscar fits on pretty much any team but is especially useful on teams with absolutely no sustain because he can heal so much, so often. If you're up in the air over which Musician to take into PvP and actually have Oscar, just use him.

  • Normal Attack -- Deals magic damage; with talents, instantly restores the HP of the lowest ally and restores their HP gradually over 4 seconds
  • Song of Healing -- Restores 3 allies' HP; with talents, also restores allies' HP over time after the initial effect
  • Purify All -- Cleanses allies in an area of all status and damage over time effects, and makes them immune for 8~14 seconds; also recovers HP with talents
  • Combust Magic -- Cleanses allies in an area of Immobility, Slow, Sleep, Blind, Fear, Hit List, Launch, physical skill binds, Stun, Fall, Charm, and Silence for 6~14 seconds

That's it for the current Warriors, Knights, and Musicians in ArcheAge Begins. If you enjoyed this guide, check out our other ArcheAge Begins guides.

Pokemon Ultra Sun and Moon Guide: Ultra Wormholes and the New Shiny Hunting Method Mon, 20 Nov 2017 10:57:13 -0500 Autumn Fish

In Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon, you have the rare chance to travel to other dimensions by utilizing Ultra Wormholes. You doubtlessly already know that you can use these Ultra Wormholes to find a slew of Legendaries and Ultra Beasts, but did you know they're also useful for catching rare Pokemon and even shinies?

That's right, Ultra Wormholes can quickly fill out your PC Boxes with valuable Pokemon if you know how to properly utilize them. In this guide, we'll touch on everything you need to know about Ultra Wormholes and how you can use them to find Shiny Pokemon.

Let's dive in!

Ultra Wormholes in Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon

After traveling through the Ultra Wormhole to reach Ultra Megalopolis during a story segment before the Pokemon League, you can ride Solgaleo or Lunala into the Ultra Wormhole at any time to explore Ultra Space. The Ultra Warp Ride plays out like a minigame.

In Ultra Space, you collect orange energy orbs to gain speed and avoid electrical energy orbs to prevent loss of momentum. If you lose too much speed, you may be sucked into an Ultra Wormhole that you didn't want to enter.

Traveling in Ultra Space is done with gyro controls by default. However, you may switch to Circle Pad controls by complaining to the Aether Foundation employee at Game Freak's office in Heahea City.

As a bonus, you may even choose whether you want to ride on Solgalea or Lunala by talking to Zossie or Soliera in Ultra Megalopolis. This is purely an aesthetic choice, however, since they both have the same hitbox.

In Ultra Space, there are five different colored Ultra Wormholes that lead to different types of Pokemon, Legendaries, and Ultra Beasts.

  • White Wormholes -- These always lead to an Ultra Beast. The rarer the Ultra Wormhole, the rarer the Ultra Beast. Note that Ultra Beasts can be captured multiple times.

  • Red Wormhole -- These lead to a cliffside. Rare bird Pokemon and various Legendaries are found here.

  • Yellow Wormhole -- These lead to a cave. Rare cave-dwelling Pokemon and various Legendaries are found here.

  • Green Wormhole -- These lead to a field. Rare field-dwelling Pokemon and various Legendaries are found here.

  • Blue Wormhole -- These lead to a waterfall. Rare water Pokemon and various Legendaries are found here.

Note that if you accidentally knock out any Legendary Pokemon, you'll have another opportunity to find them again. Once captured, however, you won't be able to encounter them again in that save.

As you travel deeper into Ultra Space, you become increasingly more likely to encounter rare types of Ultra Wormholes that lead to rarer Pokemon encounters.

Ultra Wormholes Explained Rarity Levels Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides

The rarer the Ultra Wormhole, the more likely you are to encounter a rare Pokemon. If you go through a colored rarity Level 4 Ultra Wormhole, you're guaranteed to find a Legendary Pokemon -- unless you've caught all of the ones found in that color wormhole and don't meet the requirements for any that may be left.

The further you travel in Ultra Space, the more likely you are to encounter rare Ultra Wormholes. Rarity Level 2, 3, and 4 Wormholes begin to appear more often in Ultra Space the further you go, while Rarity 1 Wormholes slowly peter out as you rack up the Light Years.

If you get really good at Ultra Warp Ride, you can use it to not only capture Legendary Pokemon but Shiny Pokemon as well.

How to find Shiny Pokemon by Exploring Ultra Wormholes in Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon

Shiny Pokemon are surprisingly common beyond Ultra Wormholes. What's even better is if you save before initiating the encounter and it turns out to be shiny, you're free to soft reset for better IVs, natures, and abilities as it will always be shiny.

The rate of encountering Shiny Pokemon dramatically increases the further you travel in Ultra Space. It's also suspected that the rarity level of the Ultra Wormhole has an impact on whether the Pokemon turns out shiny or not as well.

It'll be easier to hunt for these shinies after you've captured all of the available Legendaries. However, if you wish to avoid the Legendaries for now and hunt for Shiny Pokemon, try to enter a Rarity Level 1 or 2 Ultra Wormhole after traveling several thousand Light Years through Ultra Space.


Once you get good at navigating around Ultra Wormholes, your PC boxes will be positively flooding with Legendary and Shiny Pokemon. While you're here, be sure to check out our other Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon guides.

Crypt of the Necrodancer Amplified: Tips for Playing as Tempo Sun, 19 Nov 2017 19:31:45 -0500 Allison M Reilly

Tempo is one of the new playable characters in the Crypt of the Necrodancer DLC, "Crypt of the Necrodancer Amplified," which came out in early 2017. Tempo starts with a shovel, a blood dagger, a compass, and a torch. He jumps one space per beat like normal and has a permanent telepathy, so he can see all the enemies in the level right at the start. Although he can one-hit kill every enemy (armor still counts), what makes playing with him challenging is that Tempo can only make 16 moves before he dies to "Tempo's curse."

What is Tempo's Curse?

Unlike the other characters where you have an unlimited number of moves, Tempo starts each level with 16 moves. Besides the normal steps, opening a door, digging a dirt block, sliding across an ice tile, and missing a beat each count as one move. When Tempo runs out of moves, he dies. Fortunately, there are a few ways to replenish moves. Each action listed below brings Tempo back to 16 moves.

  • Killing an enemy
  • Eating food
  • Purchasing or picking up an item. This only counts once, so no item swapping!
  • Opening a chest
  • Taking the stairs and moving on the next level

Here are a few tips to playing as Tempo so you can get through each zone with ease!

Get to the Stairs as Fast as You Can

Because of the 16-move limit, you want to pay attention to the compass's arrow and head in the direction of the stairs. Getting stuck in a dead end means you can't find any enemies or items in time to replenish your moves before you die. There also isn't much point in backtracking or going to an adjacent room just to kill the enemies because you risk running out of moves before getting back to the stairs. Once you can take the stairs, then take them. It refreshes your moves nonetheless.

Avoid the Shop

It can be tempting to visit the shop if you pass it because Tempo accumulates gold much more quickly. Although he receives the same amount of gold from each enemy (depending on the multiplier), the levels are swamped with enemies to help the player get through each level. However, you will rarely have enough steps to go in the shop, make a purchase, and come back out with enough steps to get to an enemy to kill. Although the purchase does completely refill your number of available moves, it's unlikely you'll be able to make it out and to an enemy before the curse strikes.

Practice Each of the Zones with Another Character First

The game may vastly increase the number of enemies in each level to help you replenish your moves, but the enemies from all of the zones are included. So, for Zone 1, there are green slimes among golems, shove monsters, devils, blademasters and more. The mini bosses are zone specific, so no banshees in Zone 1, although each level now has two mini bosses that need to be killed before the stairs open up. If you're not familiar with the enemies found in each zone, or need to refresh your memory, then play through each of the zones first before making attempts with Tempo.

Have a Blood Weapon

Tempo starts with the blood dagger and can use any weapon he picks up. However, because you can't backtrack or go to the shop with Tempo, it's very difficult to pick up armor and healing items as you play. You have to hope the useful items are in the chests that are conveniently located along your path. If you come across another blood weapon, then pick it up! The new blood weapon will likely be one step above the blood dagger and is just about the only healing opportunity Tempo gets during the game. Most other weapons are useless because Tempo already one-shots every enemy.

Get Good at Throwing the Dagger

If your moves are counting down and you feel stuck, then throw the blood dagger (or blood spear if you've picked it up) as a last resort. If your weapon kills an enemy, then your moves are refilled. You're without a weapon until you can grab it, but hopefully the trick buys you enough time to grab the weapon and refill your moves again so you can continue your run.

If you haven't tried "Crypt of the Necrodancer Amplified" yet, then give the DLC and Tempo a try, especially if you're looking for a challenge. Some fans have remarked that playing as Tempo is not only difficult but also way more fun than playing through as Aria. Perhaps these tips will make the learning curve a bit easier to handle.

South Park: The Fractured But Whole Guide - How to Find Mr. Hankey Sun, 19 Nov 2017 19:20:06 -0500 Brandon Janeway

South Park: The Fractured But Whole is full of character cameos and Easter eggs from the beloved comedy show. One of those is the iconic Mr. Hankey from the very first season of South Park. He is hidden in the game, and finding him will let you take a selfie with this South Park character.

In order to get to his hidden location, you are going to need to have the sandblaster buddy power, which is with Toolshed. Sandblaster is the only thing that will let you solve the puzzle that you will encounter. 

Once you have sandblaster, you can make your way to the community center. In the community center, head to the women's restroom, which is in the upper left corner. In the restroom, you need to find and move the trashcan next to the sink so that you can punch the wall behind it. After you punch the wall, you will be able to scan and interact with the pipe behind the wall.

Now you will need to select and use the sandblaster ability. This will unclog the nearby toilet when you increase your fart strength to the proper amount. You'll know the proper amount because poop will leak out of the stall and shoot out. This means you have found Mr. Hankey. 

Open the stall and Mr. Hankey will want to take a selfie with you. He also will follow you on Coonstagram, which will increase your follower account and help you earn the Master of Social Media achievement. 

This guide is guaranteed to help you find the iconic South Park character. Let us know in the comments who your favorite cameo was. 

DragonVale Event: Dragon Breeding Combinations Sun, 19 Nov 2017 18:02:00 -0500 Sarah Elliman

We all know the key to DragonVale is breeding the most amazing dragons possible, but sometimes it’s hard to know which combinations create each dragon. This is especially true when certain events come around or any time new dragons are added to the roster. Here we bring you all the new and returning dragons coming to DragonVale.

New Dragons


Seraph Dragon

Breeding: Seraph can be bred by any two dragons with the elements light, air, and fire. Dragons such as Wind and the Infrared dragon have these particular elements.

Breeding Time: Seraph usually takes 40 hours for breeding but will take 32 hours with increased breeding.

Bounteous Dragon

Breeding: Bounteous can be created through any two dragons possessing the elements fire, plant, and earth. A Fire and Moss dragon may be a good option for breeding the Bounteous Dragon.

Breeding Time: Regular breeding is 14 hours, and accelerated breeding is 11 hours and 12 minutes.

Bogberry Dragon

Breeding: Bogberry can be made through any two dragons that carry the hybrid element. The Harvest and Feast dragons may be the best bet for this breeding, especially as they are returning dragons for the event.

Breeding Time: Normal breeding is 16 hours, and accelerated breeding for Bogberry is 12 hours and 48 minutes.

Teozinite Dragon

Breeding: Teozinite can be bred using any two dragons combining earth, plant, and cold elements. You could combine the Evergreen dragon alongside the Earth dragon to get this pairing.

Breeding Time: Regular breeding is 22 hours, and accelerated breeding is 17 hours.


Returning Dragons

Harvest Dragon

Breeding: Can be bred with any two dragons containing the elements earth, plant, and water. You can combine the River and Plant dragons to hopefully get this combination.

Breeding Time: Normal breeding time is 18 hours, and shortened breeding time is 14 hours and 24 minutes.

Leaf Dragon

Breeding: Can be bred with any two dragons containing plant, water, and light elements. You could combine the Meadow dragon with the Water dragon to achieve this dragon.

Breeding Time: Normal breeding time takes 37 hours, and decreased breeding time takes 29 hours and 36 minutes.

Feast Dragon

Breeding: Can be bred with any two dragons with the plant, earth, and light elements. You could combine the Tree dragon and the Sand dragon to get Feast.

Breeding Time: Normal breeding time takes 25 hours, and accelerated breeding takes 19 hours and 24 minutes.

Berry Dragon

Breeding: Can be bred with any two dragons containing the fire, water, and light elements. Try combining the Heat and Shimmer dragons to achieve the Berry dragon.

Breeding Time: Regular breeding time takes 16 hours, and quickened breeding time will take 12 hours and 48 minutes.

Harvest Moon Dragon

Breeding: To get the Harvest Moon Dragon, you need to breed the Harvest Dragon and Moon Dragon together.

Breeding Time: Normal breeding time takes 18 hours, and accelerated breeding takes 14 hours and 24 minutes.

Seed Dragon

Breeding: You can breed any two dragons that have the cold, water, and light elements. A combination of Phantom and Water, or perhaps Lotus and Cold, can bring this dragon about.

Breeding Time: Normal breeding time will take 18 hours, while accelerated breeding time will take 14 hours and 24 minutes.

Gourd Dragon

Breeding: The Gourd Dragon can be reproduced by breeding the Pepper Dragon and Root Dragon.

Breeding Time: Normal breeding time takes 30 hours and 52 minutes, while quickened breeding takes 24 hours and 41 minutes.


Those were the new and returning breeds to DragonVale for this event. If you've got any other tips or good breeding combinations for these dragons, drop us a comment below.


Pokemon Ultra Sun and Moon Guide: All 100 Totem Sticker Locations (with Screenshots) Sun, 19 Nov 2017 17:48:21 -0500 Autumn Fish

Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon got rid of the dreaded Zygarde Cells collectathon from the original games so that you no longer need to complete a lengthy fetch quest in order to access all of Zygarde's many forms. With this quality of life adjustment, there was room for another kind of collection quest.

This is where Totem Stickers come in. There are 100 of the shiny things scattered all about Alola, and collecting them offers up the rather enticing promise of your very own Totem Pokemon.

You read that right! After collecting a set number of Totem Stickers, you are rewarded with your very own Totem Pokemon to raise and bring into battle. The more Totem Stickers you collect, the more Totem Pokemon you can get.

So what kind of Totem Pokemon are we talking about here? And where the heck are all of those Totem Stickers? Let's jump in!

Totem Pokemon Rewards for Stickers in Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon

After meeting Samson Oak, he'll tell you to find Totem Stickers and show them to him after collecting 20. Once you do, he'll award you with a Totem Pokemon and ask you to find more Stickers. If you repeat this until you have all 100 Totem Stickers and show them to Samson Oak, he'll reward you with a total of six Totem Pokemon -- enough for a full team.

Which Totem Pokemon you receive depends on what version of the game you're playing:


Stickers Ultra Sun Ultra Moon
20 Gumshoos Alolan Raticate
40 Alolan Marowak Araquanid
50 Lurantis Salazzle
70 Vikavolt Togedemaru
80 Mimikyu Mimikyu
100 Ribombee Kommo-o


All 100 Totem Sticker Locations in Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon

Totem Stickers are introduced to you by Ilima when you meet him upon arriving at the Pokemon Center in Hau'oli City. He'll show you the Totem Stickers he's sticking up around the island before giving you leave to start collecting them at your leisure.

From this moment, you'll soon find that these Totem Stickers are scattered absolutely everywhere, from really obvious places to deviously hidden ones. No matter how sharp and thorough you are, you're likely to still miss some. So without any further adieu, let's take a look at all 100 of Alola's Totem Stickers.

Melemele Island (17 Totem Stickers)
Location How to Find Screenshot
Hau'oli City Outside of the Pokemon Center. Melemele Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Hau'oli City Between the Hair Salon and Clothing Shop. Melemele Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Hau'oli City Outside of Ilima's House, by the front door. Melemele Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Hau'oli City Outside of Ilima's House, in the pool. Requires Fishing Rod. Melemele Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Hau'oli City Inside Ilima's House, in the 2F Bedroom. Melemele Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Hau'oli City Outside of City Hall, to the right of the entrance. Melemele Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Hau'oli City Inside City Hall, behind a bench on the left side. Melemele Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Hau'oli City Outside of the Malasada Shop, on the side of the building. Melemele Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Hau'oli City Outside of the Police Station, on the NW railing. Melemele Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Hau'oli City Outside of the Ferry Terminal, to the left of the entrance. Melemele Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Hau'oli City At the SE edge of the Pier. Melemele Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Route 2 Outside of Guzma's House, on the porch. Melemele Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Route 2 Inside Guzma's House, on the fridge. Melemele Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Route 2 Outside of the Berry Fields House, on the side. Melemele Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Route 2 Inside the Berry Fields House, behind the Delibirds. Melemele Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Route 2 On the left side of the Pokemon Center near Ilima's Trial. Melemele Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Iki Town Behind a rock by a house in the SW. Requires Tauros. Melemele Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide


Akala Island (33 Totem Stickers)
Location How to Find Screenshot
Heahea City On the wall at the Western Pier. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Heahea City Outside of the Tide Song Hotel, on the right. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Heahea City Outside of the Tide Song Hotel, on the left. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Heahea City On a table on 1F of the Tide Song Hotel. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Heahea City On a 3F balcony of the Tide Song Hotel, first room on the left. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Paniola Town On a wagon in the west side of town. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Paniola Town Inside Kiawe's house, by the stairs on 1F. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Paniola Town Inside Kiawe's house, in a room on 2F. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Paniola Ranch In a pond to the NW. Requires Fishing Rod. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Paniola Ranch On a fence to the SE. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Route 5 In a pond south of the Pokemon Center. Requires Fishing Rod. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Heahea City Outside of the Dimensional Research Lab, on the right. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Heahea City Outside of the Dimensional Research Lab, on the satellite. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Heahea City Inside the office building, in 2F Game Freak office. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Heahea City Inside the office building, on 3F by the stairs. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Heahea City Outside of the Surfboard Shop, on the porch. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Royal Avenue On the park bench in the south end of town. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Royal Avenue Behind the Thrifty Megamart. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Battle Royal Dome On the railing on 2F. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Battle Royal Dome Behind the left staircase on 1F. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Wela Volcano Park Under rocks behind the sign near the entrance. Requires Tauros. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Route 8 Outside of the Aether Base, on the side. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Route 8 To the right of the Fossil Restoration Center trailer. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Heahea City Inside the Dimensional Research Lab, behind Burnet's Desk. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Konikoni City Inside Olivia's Jewelry Shop, on 2F by the TV. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Konikoni City Inside the Restaurant, behind the counter on 1F. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Konikoni City On the Western Docks. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Hano Resort At the Southern Pier. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Hano Beach On the outer wall hidden under an umbrella. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Hano Beach Play with Sandygast until it follows you and reveals the sticker. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Hano Resort Inside the Lobby, behind the waterfall. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Hano Resort Inside the Lobby, in the water to the SW. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide
Konikoni City On the Lighthouse found through Diglett Tunnel. Requires Machamp. Akala Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guide


Ula'ula Island (34 Totem Stickers)
Location How to Find Screenshot
Malie City Outside of the Ferry Terminal, to the right of the entrance. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Malie Garden On the right side of the building in the middle. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Malie City Ouside of the Clothing Shop, behind the sign. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Malie City Outside of the Kantonian Gym, on the right side. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Malie City Inside the Community Center, in a classroom. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Malie City Inside the Library, to the right of the staircase on 1F. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Malie City Inside the Library, on a post in a corner on 2F. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Malie Outer Cape On the left side of the Recycling Plant. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Mount Hokulani On the rails leading up to the Observatory. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Mount Hokulani On the right side of the Observatory. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Hokulani Observatory Behind the Reception Desk. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Hokulani Observatory In the left wing of the hallway. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Hokulani Observatory In the Observatory hidden behind a desk to the right. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Blush Mountain Outside of the Power Plant, behind a rock. Requires Tauros. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Blush Mountain Inside the Power Plant, to the right of the TV. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Route 13 Outside of the Motel, by the room entrance. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Route 13 On the side of a trailer. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Route 14 On a collapsed section of road to the north. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Route 14 In front of the abandoned Thrifty Megamart. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Route 15 On the porch outside of the Sufboard Shop. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Route 16 On the side of the Aether Base. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Ula'ula Meadow In a pond. Requires Fishing Rod. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Route 17 Outside of the Police Station, behind the sign. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Route 17 Inside the Police Station, on the computer tower. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Route 17 Behind some rocks outside of Po Town. Requires Tauros. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Po Town On the side of a building when sneaking into town. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Po Town Outside of the Pokemon Center, on the side. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Po Town Inside the Pokemon Center, beside the ruined Cafe. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Po Town Outside of the Shady House, to the right of the entrance. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Po Town 3 Stickers under rocks outside of the Shady House's side exit. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Po Town Inside the Shady House, behind a pile of furniture on 1F. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Po Town On the 2F balcony of the Shady House. Ula'ula Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides


Poni Island (16 Totem Stickers)
Location How to Find Screenshot
Seafolk Village Outside of the SE Whiscash Ship, on the porch. Poni Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Seafolk Village Inside the SE Whiscash Ship, on the right wall. Poni Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Seafolk Village Outside of the SW Huntail ship, to the left of the entrance. Poni Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Seafolk Village Inside the SW Huntail ship, on a crate. Poni Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Seafolk Village Inside the Eastern Gyarados ship. Poni Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Seafolk Village Inside the Western Wailord Restaurant, next to the Dewpider. Poni Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Seafolk Village On a crate in the NE part of town. Poni Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Poni Wilds Near the entrance to the Ancient Poni Path. Poni Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Ancient Poni Path On a SW wall near the entrance. Poni Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Ancient Poni Path On a barrel in the courtyard of Hapu's House. Poni Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Ancient Poni Path Inside Hapu's House, in the Kitchen. Poni Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Ancient Poni Path Inside Hapu's House, in the Bedroom. Poni Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Ancient Poni Path Outside of Hapu's House, behind the well. Poni Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Ancient Poni Path On a wall on the NE portion of the path. Poni Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Exeggutor Island Under rocks near the eastern side of the island. Requires Tauros. Poni Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides
Poni Gauntlet To the left of the entrance to the Battle Tree. Poni Island Totem Stickers Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon Guides


Which Totem Pokemon are you planning on adding to your party? Sound off in the comments below!

Be sure to check out the rest of our Pokemon Ultra Sun and Ultra Moon guides while you're around.

Syllablade Beginner's Tips and Tricks Guide Sun, 19 Nov 2017 14:37:21 -0500 bazookajo94

When you don't wanna play Boggle anymore, and you can't look at Alphabear without reminiscing about the early days of few ads and simple puzzles, maybe it's time to move on to a more forgiving game or a game that combines word-puzzles with ... role-playing? 

Yes, that game exists, and it's called Syllablade, an RPG with a word-game twist. Create words in a Boggle fashion (meaning the letters have to be near each other, you can't skip over tiles, and you can't reuse letter tiles you've already selected) to serve as the strength behind your attacks. Defeat all the monsters in a stage and move on to the next stage, utilizing items you buy from the shop or special attacks and defenses earned in battle. 


I could spend paragraphs giving you tips on word game strategy, but they're all the same, and you already know them: 

  • the higher the letter count, the higher the attack, and the higher amount of coins you'll receive
  • the game tells you what's a word and what isn't by highlighting the tiles green when the letters you've strung together are an actual word (great news: you can string together swear words, though I haven't had the opportunity to try them all out yet)
  • the "special" tiles that appear--such as an attack bonus or a healing potion--can be used at any point in a word; they serve as a blank tile that you only have to include in your word to get the benefits
  • be mindful of the value of the letters, as you'll want to use higher-valued letters more often than lower-value letters
  • be on the lookout for pluralities or different suffixes because they're longer words with higher points

Remember all the training you've amassed playing previous word games, and that aspect of the game should be fine. Now, here are a few more tips specific to Syllablade to help aid in the RPG side of the game. 

Don't waste time saving money

The coins you gain during battle go toward the upgrade items you buy for your character. The more expensive ones give you better stats. The appeal of the bigger, better item lurks, but don't save your money. Spend it as soon as you can buy the next available item, because guess what? 

The effects stack. You don't even have to continue wearing the item to gain its stats. Just buy it and equip whatever you want, and you still have the increased vitality, strength, or luck. 

So don't waste your time waiting for the better item, because you'll get it eventually. 

Keep your stats even

It's always a good idea to keep your stats even, as you learn in any RPG game. Though the appeal of being super strong at the start of the game works for the first few levels, as the game progresses and strategy starts to matter more, you'll be glad to have a more equal repertoire of skills in your pocket (ha ha, get it? Because it's a mobile game). 

Of course, if you know your strengths and weaknesses as a player, certainly play to your own set of skills. If you are good at finding long words and aren't afraid to take a hit every now and then, upgrade the stats that cater to your play style. This is just general advice for those who, like me, suddenly forget how to spell all words as soon as you have been tasked to spell, as your life literally depends on it.

Pay attention to the top of the screen

It's easy to get distracted when you focus most of your talents on finding words to destroy the enemy. It's how you win. 

But don't forget that Syllablade is more than a sum of its letters. There's a battle going on at the top of your screen, and you need to pay attention to it as much as the tiles down below. 

So when your strike is over and it's the opponent's turn to attack, stare at the top screen. See what falls during the course of battle. Collect whatever falls with your fingers.

True, when the items fall, you don't have to swipe them with your finger  in order to collect them, because after a while they'll automatically add themselves to your inventory; however, it's good to know what's going on up top and what's in your bag of tricks.

Another thing to pay attention to at the top of the screen is the your opponent's remaining health. I know I've told you that the bigger the word, the better, but you get certain bonuses if you give an exact hit, so if the enemy has 2 HP left, try to get a word worth two points to earn the extra bonuses. 

These are but some humble tips from a humble gamer who enjoys word games mixed with RPG mechanics. There are different strategies for different gaming styles, but for the humble beginner, hopefully this guide aids in your quest to finally leave Boggle behind.